AUTOMATION AND SYSTEMS LABORATORY

Shared by: wuxiangyu
Categories
Tags
-
Stats
views:
56
posted:
8/10/2011
language:
English
pages:
136
Document Sample
scope of work template
							                                                                 "Technical Information"

                                                                        ADVANCED
                          AUTOMATION AND SYSTEMS LABORATORY
                                                                              (6AD)




                       * Center:             "................................................................"
                       * Country: "................................................................"
                       * Date:
                                              "................................................................"
                       * Issue:
                                             "................................................................"



                                                                  Quality Certificates:



                                                                                                                                         Worlddidac
                                                                                                                                          Member

   ISO 9000: Quality Management                  European Union Certificate                 Certificates ISO 14000 and   Worlddidac Quality Charter
      (for Design, Manufacturing,                       (total safety)                 ECO-Management and Audit Scheme            Certificate
Commercialization and After-sales service)                                                 (environmental management)        (Worlddidac Member)
Advanced Automation and Systems Laboratory
                               (6AD)



                              Index




- Classroom and Laboratory Lay Out (Example).

- List of modules and teaching units included plus summarised catalogues
(included in priority 1 + 2 + 3).




                                                                           Ref.:6AD-pre(01/11)
                                                                                                                                           Classroom and Laboratory Lay Out

                                                                                                                                                               ADVANCED
                                                                                                                 AUTOMATION AND SYSTEMS LABORATORY
                                                                                                                                                        (Example of Priority 1)
                                                                                                                                                                       (6AD)



                                                                                                                                                                                      32 cm
                                                                                                                               3,3 cm


                                                                                                                        STAND ALONG




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         NON TEACHING UNITS
90x40




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     EPID/T                      CEAC




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           OTHER TEACHING
                                                                                                                                                                        UCP             UCP-P
                                                                                                                            AND                                          Unit   INT      Unit        INT                         OTHER PRIORITIES                                     Unit                       Unit




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                AND
                                                                                                                         DANGEROUS
                                                                        STUDENT




                              SEMINARY
                                                                         TOILET




                                                                                                                            UNITS
                              150x80




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         CEAB
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Unit
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             WITH SCADA-NET
90x40




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                LOCAL NET
                                                                                                                                                     EDIBON




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 SYSTEM




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              EXPANSIONS SPACE
                                                                                                   SERVICES
                                                                                                                                                       ESN




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         CRCI
                                                                                                                                                    SCADA-NET




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Unit
         TOILET        MANAGER           100x40                                            MAIN
                                                                                            AIR
                                                                                                    MAIN
                                                                                                    WATER
                                                                                                                MAIN
                                                                                                             ELECTRICAL                 PROJECTOR
                                                                                                                          BLACKBOARD



                                                                                           PANEL   CABINET    CABINET
                                                                                                                           ELECTRONIC




                        ROOM
                                                                                           90x60




                                                                                                                90x60




                                                                                                   90x60
                      90x40




                                                                                                                                                     TEACHER




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         CECI
                                          06x051




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Unit
                                                              150x80




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              9 cm
                                                                                  2,7 cm




                                                                                                                                                       DESK
                                                                                           90x60
                      90x40




         TOILET
                                                                                                    STOCK                                                                               1,4 cm
                                                                                                                90x60
                                                                                           90x60




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         CPVMI
         EMERGENCY DOOR




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Unit
                                                                                                   90x60
                                                                                                                                                        COMPUTER
                                                                                                                                                       CONTROLLED
          150x80




                                150x80




                                                     150x80




                                                                                                                                                          UNITS




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         NON TEACHING UNITS
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           OTHER TEACHING
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                AND
90x40




                   90x40




                                           90x40




                                                                                                                                                                        SCE     INT           RYC          INT                   OTHER PRIORITIES                             PLCE   PLC-IN                       SBB
                                                                                                                                                                        Unit                  Unit                                                                            Unit    Unit                        Unit
        ROOM 1             ROOM 2                  ROOM 3

                                                                                                                                                            1,5 cm
                                                                       1,6 cm                                                                                                            25 cm


                                                                                                                                                     Web-cam
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Teaching Unit                      150x80 cm      Table office
                                                                                                                                                     Computer for each Teaching Unit                 Unit

                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Electronic
                                                                                                                                                     Teacher and Student Desk with                   INT                         48x35 cm           90x60 cm       Shelves
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Interface                                                                                          E: 1:100
                                                                                                                                                     computers
                                                                                                                                                                                                     90x40       Cupboard
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     80x30         Table
                                                                                                                                                     Table for Teaching Unit
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 EDIBON ESN SCADA-NET
                                                                          Advanced Automation and Systems Laboratory
                                                                                             (6AD)




List of modules and teaching units included plus
            Summarised Catalogues

                          Priority 1
              0610: PLC Trainer
              0620: PLC Process Emulators Applications Module.
              0621: PLC Small Scale Real Applications Module
              0633/10S: Industrial PLC (Any) .
              0650: Automation & System Module
              0651: Automation (Regulation and Control) Module
              0652: Automation (Control) Module.
              0600/ESN: EDIBON Scada-Net for Automation & Systems units




                                                                                                                       Ref.:6AD-pre(01/11)
                                                                                      issue:01/11


                                           PLC TRAINER

 Ref: 0610                                                                                1 / 1

 ITEM             REFERENCE                          DESCRIPTION                    QTY.
   1         PLCE                    PLC TRAINER                                      1
   2         0620PARTS               COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                       1
   3         0620PA                  COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
   4         0620IYPM                INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP                     1
   5         0620CAPRO               TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
   6         0620TD                  TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
   7         0620MANU                DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
Notes:

1) Multipost option:
     This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
     number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
       a) Technical conditions included:

              -   Laboratories adaptation.
              -   Installation of all units supplied.
              -   Starting up for all units.
              -   Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
            - Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
            the teaching techniques uses.
            - Technology transfer.
       b) Commercial conditions:
            - Packing.
            - Financing charges.
            - C.I.F. charges.
       c) Others conditions:
              - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:

                      .   Required services manual.
                      .   Assembly and installation manual.
                      .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                      .   Set in operation manual.
                      .   Safety norms manual.
                      .   Practices manual.
                      .   Maintenance manual.
                      . Calibration manual.




              See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
 PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
                                                                                                   Always included
                                                                                                    in the supply:




                                                                                                          2
                                                                                          PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
                                                                                              each particular EDIBON
                                                                                             Computerized Teaching Unit



     1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
           (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                           PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                                             Items supplied as standard
 1 PLC-PI Unit:                                                                                                               1.- Control of theparticular unit       9.- PLC process application for the
                                                                                                                                  process through the control              particular unit.
     This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a                                     interface box without the           10.- PLC structure.
     simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,                                          computer.                           11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
     additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the                                    2.- PID control.                             configuration.
     proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON                                               3.- Visualization of all the sensors    12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
     Computerized Teaching Unit).                                                                                                 values used in the particular       13.- PLC program languages.
     Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.                                                                               unit process.                       14.- PLC different programming
     Front panel:                                                                                                             4.- Calibration of all sensors               standard languages (ladder
        Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.                                   included in the particular unit          diagram (LD), structured text
                                                                                                                                  process.                                 (ST), instructions list (IL),
        Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.                                        5.- Hand on of all the actuators             sequential function chart
        Touch screen.                                                                                                             involved in the particular unit          (SFC), function block diagram
      Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC                                                         process.                                 (FBD)).
      Inside:                                                                                                                 6.- Realization of different            15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
        Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.                                                           experiments, in automatic way,           development of new process.
        Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program                                              without having in front the         16.- Hand on an established process.
                                                                                                                                  particular unit. (These             17.- To visualize and see the results
        capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.                                           experiments can be decided
        Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.                                                       previously).                             and to make comparisons with
                                                                                                                                                                           the particular unit process.
      Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).                                                                             7.- Simulation of outside actions,      18.- Possibility of creating new
 2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:                                                                                                 in the cases do not exist                process in relation with the
    For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.                                                                        hardware elements. (Example:             particular unit.
 3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
                                                                                                                                  test of complementary tanks,        19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
                                                                                                                                  complementary i n d u s t r i a l
 4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                                                                 environment to the process to       20.- Own PLC applications in
 Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.          Weight: 30 Kg.                                                          be studied, etc).                        accordance with teacher and
                                                                                                                              8.- PLC hardware general use.                student requirements.
 More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
 automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf

 PLCE. PLC Trainer
                                                                                              Always included
                                                                                               in the supply:




                                                                                                                                                                                                                   6.- Systems & Automatics
                                                                                          2                     3
                                                                                         PLC                PLCE
                                                                                     Programming         Touch Screen
                                                                                       Software      Programming Software

                           1   Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer

                                                              SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                  PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                             Items supplied as standard                                       Using the PLC Programing Software:
 1  PLCE. Unit:
     This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple                            1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
     and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,                                                  The programs can be written in several programming languages:
     additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.                                                                            Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
                                                                                                                                        Sequential function chart. (SFC).
     Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.                                                                                     Function block diagram. (FBD).
     Front panel:                                                                                                             2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
         Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push                                  3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
        button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of                                  4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
        the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital                               5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
        outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass                                          6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
        connections (GND). Touch screen.                                                                                           established in a variable.
     Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).                                          7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
     Inside:                                                                                                                  8.- How to use analog inputs.
         Power supply 100... 240V (AC).                                                                                       9.- How to use analog outputs.
         Panasonic PLC:                                                                                                       10.- Use of temporizers.
           High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32                                       11.- Logic functions implementation.
           Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.                               12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
         Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.                                                  13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
     Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.                                                       14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
  2 PLC Programming Software:                                                                                                 15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
     Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages                                          16.- Functions library.
     can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential                               17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
     function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,                                    18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
     programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,                                        * Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
     function blocks, inputs/outputs...                                                                                       Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
     Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal                                 19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
     relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,                            20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
     file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC                                      21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
     addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software                                         words).
     provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions                                  22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
     Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse                                   23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
     of programs is easy.                                                                                                     24.- Switching from one screen to another.
  3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:                                                                                   * Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
     Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy                                Other practical possibilities:
     Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps                                   -It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
     Editor.                                                                                                                       causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
    Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.                                                                                  happens in the outputs.
 4                                                                                                                                -It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
 5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
                                                                                                                                   transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
 Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.                                                                     (for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
 More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/                                                                 output, (for example: a pump).
 automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
                                                                                                                Page 85                                                                     www.edibon.com
                                                                      issue:01/11



                        PLC PROCESS EMULATORS APPLICATIONS MODULE

Ref: 0620                                                                 1 / 3

ITEM          REFERENCE                            DESCRIPTION      QTY.
  1         PLCE-CST            TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROL                1
  2         PLCE-AV             CAR PARKING                           1
  3         PLCE-AG2Z           TWO ZONES PARKING GARAGE              1
  4         PLCE-CA             ELEVATOR CONTROL                      1
  5         PLCE-CLA            AUTOMATIC WASHING MACHINE CONTROL     1
  6         PLCE-MB             DRINKS MACHINE                        1
  7         PLCE-MBC            HOT DRINKS MACHINE                    1
  8         PLCE-CB             PUMP CONTROL                          1
  9         PLCE-MA             EMBOSSING MACHINE                     1
 10         PLCE-ST             DRILLING SYSTEM                       1
 11         PLCE-SBAR           DIRTY-WATER PUMP SYSTEM               1
 12         PLCE-SBP            PUMP SYSTEM (PRESSURE)                1
 13         PLCE-SL             CLEANING SYSTEM                       1
 14         PLCE-SALL           AUTOMATIC FILLING SYSTEM              1
 15         PLCE-SBT            CONVEYOR BELTS SYSTEM                 1
 16         PLCE-SCCT           CONVEYOR CHARGING SYSTEM              1
 17         PLCE-SCA            CANALIZATION SYSTEM                   1
 18         PLCE-SDT            PIPE BENDING SYSTEM                   1
 19         PLCE-PAE            AUTOMATIC STAMPING PRESS              1
 20         PLCE-PLLT           FILLING PROCESS OF TANKS              1
 21         PLCE-SCC            COLLECTING BELT CONVEYOR              1
 22         PLCE-MCC            MAILS ALLOCATION MACHINE              1
 23         PLCE-RAC            COMPRESSED AIR NETWORK                1
 24         PLCE-TC             COAL TREATMENT                        1
 25         PLCE-PELE           PACKING LINE AND BOTTLING PLANT       1
 26         PLCE-CA2P           TWO-DOORS ACCESS CONTROL              1
 27         PLCE-CI             FIRE CONTROL                          1
 28         PLCE-CP             PROXIMITY CONTROL                     1
 29         PLCE-CCO            SLUICE GATE CONTROL                   1
 30         PLCE-CNC            LEVEL AND FLOW CONTROL                1
 31         PLCE-CNTA           WATER TOWER LEVEL CONTROL             1
 32         PLCE-CF             PHOTO CONTROL                         1
 33         PLCE-CMM            MOLDING MACHINE CONTROL               1
 34         PLCE-CPOS           POSITION CONTROL                      1
 35         PLCE-CS             SILO CONTROL                          1
 36         PLCE-CACV           VEHICLE FEEDING & LOADING CONTROL     1
 37         PLCE-ACC            FEEDING AND LOADING CONTROL           1
 38         PLCE-CML            LIQUIDS BLENDING CONTROL              1
 39         PLCE-CME            MIXER CONTROL                         1
 40         PLCE-CR             REACTOR CONTROL                       1
 41         PLCE-CCP            COUNT AND POSITION CONTROL            1
 42         PLCE-CL             ROLLING MILL CONTROL                  1
Ref: 0620                                                                      2 / 3

ITEM          REFERENCE                    DESCRIPTION                   QTY.
 43         PLCE-CTRA     WORKCELL APPLICATION                             1
 44         PLCE-CTI      TOWER LIGHTING CONTROL                           1
 45         PLCE-AC       BUFFER STORAGE                                   1
 46         PLCE-RT       TEMPERATURE REGULATION                           1
 47         PLCE-CSC      HEATING SYSTEM CONTROL                           1
 48         PLCE-CSV      VENTILATION SYSTEM CONTROL                       1
 49         PLCE-M        MOTOR CONTROL                                    1
 50         PLCE-MPP      STEPPER MOTOR CONTROL                            1
 51         PLCE-MET      STAR-DELTA CONNECTION                            1
 52         PLCE-MCETI    REVERSING STAR-DELTA CONNECTION                  1
 53         PLCE-MD       DAHLANDER MOTOR CIRCUIT                          1
 54         PLCE-M2BS     MOTOR WITH 2 SEPARATE WINDINGS                   1
 55         PLCE-MAC      STARTING A WOUND-ROTOR MOTOR                     1
 56         PLCE-AN       ANNUNCIATOR                                      1
 57         PLCE-SLU      RUNNING LIGHT                                    1
 58         PLCE-CPR      REACTIVE CURRENT COMPENSATION                    1
 59         PLCE-MCI      REVERSING CONTACTOR                              1
 60         0620PARTS     COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                       1
 61         0620PA        COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
 62         0620IYPM      INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP                     1
 63         0620CAPRO     TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
 64         0620TD        TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
 65         0620MANU      DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
 Ref: 0620                                                                  3 / 3



Notes:

1) Multipost option:
     This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
     number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
      a) Technical conditions included:

             -   Laboratories adaptation.
             -   Installation of all units supplied.
             -   Starting up for all units.
             -   Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
           - Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
           the teaching techniques uses.
           - Technology transfer.
      b) Commercial conditions:
           - Packing.
           - Financing charges.
           - C.I.F. charges.
      c) Others conditions:
             - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:

                   .   Required services manual.
                   .   Assembly and installation manual.
                   .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                   .   Set in operation manual.
                   .   Safety norms manual.
                   .   Practices manual.
                   .   Maintenance manual.
                   . Calibration manual.
                                   PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE

                                             †Traffic and Parking

PLCE-CST. Traffic Signal Control


                                                               It represents an automatic traffic signal control where is possible to
                                                               emulate a traffic crossroads.
                                                               We can select the operation mode choosing between day or night and
                                                               to control the traffic state using traffic lights and vehicle detectors.
                                                               The pedestrians can request to stop the vehicles flow pushing a button.




PLCE-AV. Car Parking


                                                               It represents a car parking where is possible to emulate the elements
                                                               used in a typical car parking like barriers, vehicles presence detectors,
                                                               traffic lights, fire sensors.
                                                               We can know the number of vehicles inside the parking with lights and
                                                               if the parking is full or free.




PLCE-AG2Z. Two Zones Parking Garage


                                                               It represents a parking garage with two zones where is possible to
                                                               emulate the control of four barriers, two in the entrances an two in the
                                                               exits, in the automatic parking.
                                                               We can know the number of vehicles inside the parking with lights and
                                                               if the parking is full or free.




                                                      Page 8                                                              www.edibon.com
                               PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
                                      †Small Industrial Machines


PLCE-CA. Elevator Control


                                                           It represents an elevator control allowing to emulate the sequence of
                                                           actions of an elevator in a three floors building.
                                                           The elevator’s state using different sensors and lights can be
                                                           demonstrated.
                                                           It is included elements like alarms, lights and calling buttons in the
                                                           emulation, etc.
                                                           The sequence of actions in the elevator’s control panel can be seen
                                                           too.




PLCE-CLA. Automatic Washing Machine Control


                                                           It represents an automatic washing machine control allowing to
                                                           emulate the sequence of actions carried out by a washing machine.
                                                           We can start/stop the system, to use the three program selector, the
                                                           temperature control and to know the machine’s state using different
                                                           sensors and lights which indicates us the machine’s actions and its
                                                           state.




PLCE-MB. Drinks Machine


                                                           It represents an automatic drinks machine where we have the
                                                           possibility of work with a complete scheme of actions of an automatic
                                                           drinks machine.
                                                           We can select a drink, to insert coins, to obtain drinks, the coins can be
                                                           returned pushing a button and is possible to simulate the fault of drinks
                                                           in different columns.




PLCE-MBC. Hot Drinks Machine


                                                           It represents an automatic hot drinks machine where we have the
                                                           possibility of work with a complete scheme of actions of an automatic
                                                           hot drinks machine.
                                                           We can select a drink, we can know the level of drink using sensors and
                                                           the status of the machine.
                                                           Finally we can select sugar and extra-milk.




                                                  Page 9                                                               www.edibon.com
                             PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE



PLCE-CB. Pump Control



                                                          It represents a pump control where we have four pumps inserting water
                                                          in a big tank.
                                                          We can regulate the number of pumps working and to know the level
                                                          of water into the tank using level sensors.
                                                          Is possible to regulate the discharge rate with the output valve in the
                                                          tank.




PLCE-MA. Embossing Machine



                                                          It represents the embossing process of metal disks controlled with an
                                                          electropneumatic system.
                                                          The valves regulate the flow of gas to the electropneumatic system
                                                          moving the steel punches and we can know the position of the steel
                                                          punches using position sensors.




                                                Page 10                                                            www.edibon.com
                              PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
                                      †Small Industrial Systems

PLCE-ST. Drilling System


                                                           It represents a drilling system where we can emulate the movements of
                                                           a drill.
                                                           We have two motors one for vertical movements and the other one is
                                                           the motor of the drill.
                                                           We can switch on/off the coolant valve and to select the clamping
                                                           pressure.




PLCE-SBAR. Dirty-Water Pump System



                                                           It represents a dirty-water pump system where we can emulate the
                                                           control of the dirty-water flow using a valve and two pumps which
                                                           insert dirty-water in the pipe from the dirty-water tank.
                                                           The level of dirty-water into the tank is measured using four level
                                                           sensors.




PLCE-SBP Pump System (Pressure)
        .



                                                           It represents a pressure system where we use two pumps with their
                                                           motors when we have to introduce air in the tank.
                                                           We can activate or deactivate the pumps with the three-phase
                                                           contactors.
                                                           In the tank we have two level sensors and a pressure sensor.
                                                           The output of the pressured air is controlled using a flow sensor.




PLCE-SL. Cleaning System




                                                           It represents a cleaning system where is possible to emulate the
                                                           movement of a basket which has vertical movements.
                                                           The electrovalve has three positions and it can move the basket from its
                                                           position to the designated position with a manual regulator.
                                                           We can know the position of the basket using position sensors.




                                                 Page 11                                                             www.edibon.com
                                  PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE



PLCE-SALL. Automatic Filling System


                                                               It represents an automatic filling system where we can choose the
                                                               number of elements packed in each pack.
                                                               We can emulate the motors and the presence sensor of the system
                                                               working.
                                                               We can emulate the movement of the conveyor belt with the packs in
                                                               this filling process.




PLCE-SBT. Conveyor Belts System



                                                               It represents a conveyor belts system where is possible to emulate a
                                                               system of sand transport.
                                                               We can activate or deactivate the three motors using the three-phase
                                                               contactors.
                                                               We have the possibility of simulate faults in the three-phase fuses and
                                                               the three-phase magnetothermics.




PLCE-SCCT. Conveyor Charging System


                                                               It represents a conveyor charging system where is possible to emulate
                                                               the work of four conveyor belts switching on/off their motors and we
                                                               can open or close three lock gates.
                                                               With this system we can control the conveyor charge process.




PLCE-SCA. Canalization System




                                                               It represents a channeling system where we have a dam which provides
                                                               water using a general pipe with a general valve.
                                                               This general pipe provides water to other pipes, those pipes provides
                                                               water to the houses, parks, etc using their own little valves.
                                                               In the homes the valves which regulate the water flow are taps.




                                                     Page 12                                                            www.edibon.com
                                PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE



PLCE-SDT. Pipe Bending System



                                                             It represents a pipe bending system where we can emulate the bending
                                                             process of the pipe.
                                                             We can start/stop the system using a switch and to know the state of the
                                                             machine with maximum/minimum sensors, to insert pipes with an
                                                             electrovalve and to control the conveyor belt.
                                                             We will know if we have a pipe in the machine with the piece presence
                                                             sensor.




PLCE-PAE. Automatic Stamping Press



                                                             It represents an automatic stamping press where is possible to emulate
                                                             the pressing process of steel sheets.
                                                             We can know the state of the press and electrovalve with the
                                                             maximum/minimum sensors.
                                                             The press has a piece presence sensor, and warning lights.
                                                             We can control the rollers and the conveyor belt with switches.




                                                   Page 13                                                             www.edibon.com
                                  PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE

                                           †Big Industrial Systems

PLCE-PLLT. Filling Process of Tanks



                                                               It represents a filling process of tanks with three tanks where we can
                                                               emulate the filling and emptying processes of the tanks and the level of
                                                               the liquid inside the tanks.
                                                               Is possible to switch on or switch off the different input or output valves
                                                               of each tank.




PLCE-SCC. Collecting Belt Conveyor



                                                               It represents a collecting belt conveyor system where is possible to
                                                               emulate five conveyor belts transporting different materials to the
                                                               general conveyor belt.
                                                               We can activate or deactivate the five conveyor belt motors and switch
                                                               on/off the general conveyor belt in two directions left and right.




PLCE-MCC. Mails Allocation Machine



                                                               It represents a mails allocation machine which allocate the mails to
                                                               different cities.
                                                               It uses five motors, one for each city and a conveyor belt.
                                                               We can activate or deactivate each motor and the general conveyor
                                                               belt.
                                                               The general system can be activated or deactivated.




PLCE-RAC. Compressed Air Network




                                                               It represents a compressed air network where is possible to emulate
                                                               the actions in an air network.
                                                               We can control valves, dryer, motors with contactors and we can know
                                                               the flow in the output of the compressor with a sensor.
                                                               The electrovalve moves the final piston.




                                                     Page 14                                                                www.edibon.com
                                PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE



PLCE-TC. Coal Treatment


                                                             It represents a coal treatment system where we can see three chutes
                                                             with three valves each one and a big tank.
                                                             We can control the flow of coal with the three valves and is possible to
                                                             know if the tank or the chutes are full using coal presence sensors.




PLCE-PELE. Packing Line and Bottling Plant



                                                             It represents an automatic packing line and bottling machine where is
                                                             possible to emulate the processes of bottling, sealing, labeling,
                                                             packing and palletizing.
                                                             In this automatic plant we can control the movement of the conveyor
                                                             belt and to obtain information about the process using sensors.




                                                   Page 15                                                             www.edibon.com
                                 PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE

                                       †Simple Control Applications

PLCE-CA2P Two-Doors Access Control
         .



                                                              It represents two automatic doors where is possible to emulate the
                                                              movements and positions of each automatic door using sensors and
                                                              electrical motors.
                                                              We have the option of activate or deactivate the electrical motors.
                                                              The doors can be opened using the presence sensors.




PLCE-CI. Fire Control


                                                              It represents a fire control station where is possible to emulate different
                                                              emergency situations with fire.
                                                              We have the possibility of activate and deactivate the alarm buttons,
                                                              the fire detectors, the uninterruptible power supply, the elevator, the
                                                              emergency door, the exit signs, and the temperature sensors.
                                                              We can also activate the water pump.




PLCE-CP Proximity Control (security)
       .


                                                              It represents a proximity and presence security control where we can
                                                              obtain information about the presence in different places of a bank
                                                              office using a PIR sensor, presence sensor, magnetic sensor and
                                                              infrared electronic barriers.
                                                              The office has an alarm and a bell.
                                                              We can also activate a security camera and the security key.




PLCE-CCO. Sluice Gate Control


                                                              It represents a sluice gate control where we can see three sluice gates
                                                              and we have to control them using the water pumps and the gates
                                                              control.
                                                              We can start/stop the system using the general switch and we have the
                                                              possibility of faults using the fuses and the magnetothermics.




                                                    Page 16                                                               www.edibon.com
                              PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE



PLCE-CNC. Level and Flow Control



                                                           It represents a level and flow control where we can fill the tank with
                                                           water.
                                                           We can control the water supply and the water outflow with an
                                                           electrovalve.
                                                           We know the state of the tank with a capacitance probe which shows
                                                           the level of water in the tank with lights.




PLCE-CNTA. Water Tower Level Control



                                                           It represents a water tower level control where is possible to emulate
                                                           the water flow control with the input valve and the motor of the pump.
                                                           We can measure the level of water in the tank and in the water tower
                                                           using sensors.




PLCE-CF. Photo Control




                                                           It represents a photo control machine where is possible to emulate the
                                                           functions of the camera, dryer, flash and printer.
                                                           We have a photo presence sensor, a coin presence sensor and the
                                                           return coins possibility.
                                                           Finally we can switch on/off the machine.




PLCE-CMM. Molding Machine Control



                                                           It represents a molding machine control where we can emulate a
                                                           machine which gives shape to the pieces pushing them.
                                                           It works with three electrovalves which we can activate or deactivate,
                                                           each electrovalve has a limit switch.




                                                 Page 17                                                           www.edibon.com
                              PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE



PLCE-CPOS. Position Control



                                                           It represents a position control where we can move the sheet to the
                                                           correct position using a motor with a lefthand and righthand rotation
                                                           and crowling speed the incremental shaft encoder can count pulses
                                                           and to give a fine sincronism.
                                                           We have the possibility of saw the sheet connecting the saw motor.




PLCE-CS. Silo Control



                                                           It represents a silo control system where we can emulate the filling
                                                           process.
                                                           The filling motor has a manual rate or an automatic rate and the
                                                           output valve has its own discharge rate.
                                                           We can measure the level with four presence sensors and to know if the
                                                           silo is full with the full sensor.




PLCE-CACV. Vehicle Feeding & Loading Control




                                                           It represents a vehicle feeding control where we use three conveyor
                                                           belts to transport the material to the vehicles.
                                                           We can switch on/off each conveyor belt and the valves.
                                                           We have two traffic lights which can indicate when the vehicle can start
                                                           its movement and a weight vehicle sensor.




                                                 Page 18                                                             www.edibon.com
                              PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE

                                     †Industrial Control Applications

PLCE-ACC. Feeding and Loading Control




                                                             It represents a feeding and loading control system where we can
                                                             control the voltage in the load between the A-B terminals.
                                                             We have to select a configuration which activate or deactivate the
                                                             mosfets and we can know what switch is closed with its own light.
                                                             We can see in the graph the state of the voltage in the load between the
                                                             A-B terminals.




PLCE-CML. Liquids Blending Control


                                                             It represents a liquids blending control where is possible to emulate
                                                             the mix of different liquids and their flows are regulated using four
                                                             valves.
                                                             The liquids are mixed using a mixer with its own motor.
                                                             The flow of the mix is regulated using an output valve.
                                                             We can measure the temperature and the level of liquid with sensors.




PLCE-CME. Mixer Control



                                                             It represents a mixer control where we can emulate the mix with two
                                                             different products in a big chute from two little chutes using conveyor
                                                             belts, finally the general conveyor belt will transport the mix.
                                                             We will control the motors of the conveyor belts and the valves in the
                                                             system and we will know the big chute's level using sensors.




PLCE-CR. Reactor Control




                                                             It represents a reactor control where is possible to emulate the mix of a
                                                             catalyst, an inert gas and the substance.
                                                             We can regulate the catalyst and the inert gas flow with valves, and the
                                                             substance with a pump.
                                                             The inlet and the output of the product are regulated using valves.
                                                             We mix the substances with an agitator into the reactor.




                                                   Page 19                                                              www.edibon.com
                                   PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE



PLCE-CCP Count and Position Control
        .


                                                                It represents a count and position control where is possible to emulate
                                                                the robot’s movement selecting the general final position.
                                                                It shows with lights the final selected position of each motor.
                                                                We can know when the robot is opening or closing its hand and when it
                                                                has taken a piece with light signals.




PLCE-CL. Rolling Mill Control



                                                                It represents a rolling mill control where is possible to emulate the
                                                                position of rolling mill, the movement of the different motors and the
                                                                position of the conveyor belt using an electrovalve.
                                                                We can obtain information about the presence and the thickness of
                                                                each sheet of metal using sensors.




PLCE-CTRA. WorkCell Application


                                                                It represents a workcell with a robot inside where is possible to emulate
                                                                the automatic work of a robot and the conveyor belts.
                                                                We can activate or deactivate the conveyor belts and start/stop the
                                                                general system.
                                                                We have input and output sensors and a light which indicates when the
                                                                robot is working.




PLCE-CTI. Tower Lighting Control




                                                                It represents a tower lighting control where is possible to emulate the
                                                                lighting of different levels of a tower using a lights system.
                                                                It has two directions up and down and we can know the level using a
                                                                display.




                                                      Page 20                                                              www.edibon.com
                                PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE

                                         †Thermal Applications

PLCE-AC. Buffer Storage




                                                             It represents a buffer storage system where is possible to emulate the
                                                             storage of heat using fluids.
                                                             We can control the valves state, the pumps, the boiler, and the buffer
                                                             storage tank state.
                                                             Is possible to know when the collector is working using a sensor.




PLCE-RT. Temperature Regulation




                                                             It represents a temperature regulation system where we can control the
                                                             temperature inside our home.
                                                             We can regulate the temperature using the thermostat and the
                                                             temperature sensor.
                                                             The heater and the solar cells will heat the water inside the water circuit
                                                             and it will fill the radiator heating the house.




PLCE-CSC. Heating System Control



                                                             It represents a heating system control where is possible to emulate the
                                                             heating process controlling the flow of hot water into the circuit
                                                             activating or deactivating the valves in the pipes and using the
                                                             temperature control regulator.
                                                             We can start/stop the system using a general switch.




PLCE-CSV. Ventilation System Control




                                                             It represents a ventilation system control where we are trying to clean
                                                             the air in a garage.
                                                             We can control the air inside measuring the level of CO and smoke
                                                             with sensors.
                                                             We can activate four pumps and two fans.
                                                             Is possible to control the traffic lights and the automatic barriers.




                                                   Page 21                                                               www.edibon.com
                                  PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE

                                    †Electrical Machines Control (Motors)

PLCE-M. Motor Control


                                                               It represents a motor control where is possible to emulate the
                                                               movements of a three-phase motor with both turning directions
                                                               controlled by three-phase contactors.
                                                               In the secondary, we can use the three-phase contactors with the star
                                                               or delta connection.




PLCE-MPP Stepper Motor Control
        .


                                                               It represents a motor control where is possible to emulate the stepper
                                                               motor.
                                                               We can start/stop the stepper motor using a switch.
                                                               It has reverse/forward directions controlled by a switch, and it can be
                                                               controlled in manual or automatic mode.
                                                               The speed regulation is controlled using three switches and the
                                                               position is controlled using an encoder.




PLCE-MET. Star-Delta Connection


                                                               It represents a star-delta connection in the secondary and emulates
                                                               the motor's movement.
                                                               Is possible to switch on/off the motor and connect the secondary in
                                                               star-delta connection using the three-phase contactors.
                                                               We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses and the
                                                               magnetothermics.




PLCE-MCETI. Reversing Star-Delta Connection



                                                               It represents a reversing motor with star-delta connection in the
                                                               secondary and emulates the motor's movement.
                                                               Is possible to switch on/off the motor in both turning directions and
                                                               connect the secondary in star-delta connection using the three-phase
                                                               contactors.
                                                               We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses and the
                                                               magnetothermics.




                                                     Page 22                                                            www.edibon.com
                              PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE



PLCE-MD. Dahlander Motor Circuit


                                                           It represents a Dahlander motor which has two connections of velocity
                                                           with 2 and 4 poles and emulates the motor's movement.
                                                           Is possible to switch on/off the motor in both turning directions and to
                                                           connect it with 2 or 4 poles using the three-phase contactors.
                                                           We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses and the
                                                           magnetothermics.




PLCE-M2BS. Motor with 2 Separate Windings


                                                           It represents a motor with two separate windings and emulates the
                                                           motor's movement.
                                                           Is possible to switch on/off the motor and to connect the different
                                                           windings and the secondary with the three-phase contactors.
                                                           We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses and the
                                                           magnetothermics.




PLCE-MAC. Starting a Wound-Rotor Motor



                                                           It represents the starting of a wound-rotor motor where is possible to
                                                           emulate the motor's movement.
                                                           Is possible to switch on/off the motor and to connect the secondary
                                                           with different loads with the three-phase contactors.
                                                           We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses and the
                                                           magnetothermics.




                                                 Page 23                                                             www.edibon.com
                                PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE

                                            †Alarms/Current

PLCE-AN. Annunciator



                                                             It represents an annunciator where is possible to emulate the
                                                             operation of one of this machines which shows what button is pushed
                                                             lighting the button pushed.
                                                             We have an annunciator with several buttons and near of the
                                                             annunciator we have an electrical scheme which shows what switch is
                                                             activated or deactivated.




PLCE-SLU. Running Lights




                                                             It represents a running lights system where we can emulate the control
                                                             of the eight lights in different speed, sequence and direction.
                                                             We can start/stop the system using a switch and we can do it in
                                                             automatic or manual state.
                                                             We have three kinds of sequences and two directions and an speed
                                                             control.




PLCE-CPR. Reactive Current Compensation


                                                             It represents a reactive current compensation system where is possible
                                                             to emulate the connection of three-phase capacitive loads.
                                                             We can connect each load using the three-phase contactors.
                                                             We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses.




PLCE-MCI. Reversing Contactor



                                                             It represents a three-phase motor with reversing contactors and
                                                             emulates the motor's movement.
                                                             Is possible to switch on/off the motor in both turning directions using
                                                             the three-phase contactors.
                                                             We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses and the
                                                             magnetothermics.




                                                   Page 24                                                            www.edibon.com
                                                                                issue:01/11



                        PLC SMALL SCALE REAL APPLICATIONS MODULE

Ref: 0621                                                                           1 / 2

ITEM          REFERENCE                           DESCRIPTION                 QTY.
  1         PLCE-BS1           VIBRATION AND/OR DEFORMATION TEST MODULE         1
  2         PLCE-BS2           TEMPERATURE TEST MODULE                          1
  3         PLCE-BS3           PRESSURE TEST MODULE                             1
  4         PLCE-BS4           FLOW TEST MODULE                                 1
  5         PLCE-BS5           OVENS TEST MODULE                                1
  6         PLCE-BS6           LIQUID LEVEL TEST MODULE                         1
  7         PLCE-BS7           TACHOMETERS TEST MODULE                          1
  8         PLCE-BS8           PROXIMITY TEST MODULE                            1
  9         PLCE-BS9           PNEUMATIC TEST MODULE                            1
 10         PLCE-BS10          LIGHT TEST MODULE                                1
 11         0621PARTS          COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                       1
 12         0621PA             COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
 13         0621IYPM           INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP                     1
 14         0621CAPRO          TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
 15         0621TD             TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
 16         0621MANU           DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
 Ref: 0621                                                                  2 / 2



Notes:

1) Multipost option:
     This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
     number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
      a) Technical conditions included:

             -   Laboratories adaptation.
             -   Installation of all units supplied.
             -   Starting up for all units.
             -   Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
           - Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
           the teaching techniques uses.
           - Technology transfer.
      b) Commercial conditions:
           - Packing.
           - Financing charges.
           - C.I.F. charges.
      c) Others conditions:
             - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:

                   .   Required services manual.
                   .   Assembly and installation manual.
                   .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                   .   Set in operation manual.
                   .   Safety norms manual.
                   .   Practices manual.
                   .   Maintenance manual.
                   . Calibration manual.
                       PLC Small Scale Real Applications for working with PLCE

                                               †Sensors

PLCE-BS1. Vibration and/or Deformation Test Module

                                                                                Specifications:
                                            Painted steel box.
                                            Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
                                            Real industrial elements.
                                            Extensiometric gauges:
                                                Gauges of a metallic material that vary their resistance depending on the distortion
                                                to which they are going to be subjected.
                                                They are stacked in different positions so that during the vibrant bar movement
                                                some of them suffer compressions and others extensions.
                                                Characteristics:
                                                   Resistance at 24ºC: 120 W.
                                                   Gauge factor at 24ºC: 2.120.
                                            Heating resistance and thermocouple:
                                                Resistance used to produce temperature variations in the vibrant bar and to see
                                                how this situation affects the extensiometric gauges.
                                                A K thermocouple place near the resistance measures the bar temperature.
                                                Characteristics:
                                                   Temperature range: -50ºC to 350ºC.
                                            LVDT Sensor:
                                                Linear displacement sensor, that detects the relative displacement of a
                                                ferromagnetic core between the primary and the secondary.
                                                Input Voltage range: 10 to 24VDC.
                                            D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
                                            Connection pins.
                                            Dimensions: 405 x 300 x 350 mm. approx. Weight: 10 Kg. approx.


PLCE-BS2. Temperature Test Module

                                                                              Specifications:
                                            Painted steel box.
                                            Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
                                            Real industrial elements.
                                            Bimetallic switch sensor:
                                                 Bimetallic contact thermal switch.
                                                 Opening temperature: 50ºC.
                                                 Closing temperature: 30ºC.
                                            Adjustable bimetallic thermostat, with heater resistor that allows minimizing the
                                            differential cycles and preventing overpeaks.
                                            Temperature range: 0ºC to 30ºC.
                                            Relay AC:
                                                 It allows to turn on and off the heater light bulbs placed over the temperature
                                                 sensors.
                                                 Voltage and current (nominal): 250V-10A.
                                                 3 sockets.
                                                 Switching voltage: 12 V.
                                            Capillary thermostat:
                                                 Temperature range: 0ºC-90ºC.
                                                 Max. bulb temperature: 150ºC.
                                                 Socket current: 15A, 250V AC.
                                            Thermocouples:
                                                 3 Cromel-Alumel thermocouples type K.
                                                 One of them is placed near the capillary thermostat and the bimetallic sensor,
                                                 another on the adjustable bimetallic thermostat and the third one inside the
                                                 magnetic collection.
                                                 Each one of them is used to measure the temperature that each one of the sensor
                                                 are controlling.
                                                 Temperature range: -50 ºC to 250 ºC.
                                            D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
                                            Connection pins.
                                            Dimensions: 405 x 280 x 335 mm. approx. Weight: 10 Kg. approx.


                                                    Page 25                                                           www.edibon.com
                       PLC Small Scale Real Applications for working with PLCE



PLCE-BS3. Pressure Test Module

                                                                              Specifications:

                                            Painted steel box.
                                            Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
                                            Real industrial elements.
                                            Linear positioning sensor (Potentiometer):
                                                Resistor range: 500 W to 5KW.
                                                Operation force: 200-750g.
                                            LVDT sensor:
                                                Sensibility: 780mV/mm.
                                                Power voltage: 10 to 24Vdc.
                                                Total path: 2.5mm.
                                            Differential pressure sensor:
                                                Measurement range: 0 to 30 psi.
                                                Sensibility: 3.33mV/psi.
                                                Overpressure: 60 psi.
                                                Power supply range: 10 to 16 Vdc.
                                            Extensiometric gauges:
                                                Nominal resistor @ 25ºC: 120W.
                                                Gauge factor: 2.00 to 2.1 typical.
                                                Nominal resistor tolerance: ± 0.5%.
                                            Manometric pressure sensor:
                                                Measurement range: 0 a 30 psi.
                                                Sensibility: 3.33mV/psi.
                                                Overpressure: 60 psi.
                                                Power supply range: 10 to 16 Vdc.
                                            Absolute pressure sensor:
                                                Measurement range: 2 to 30 psi.
                                                Sensibility: -11mV/psi.
                                                Overpressure: 60 psi.
                                                Power supply range: 10 to 12 Vdc.
                                            Air Compressor:
                                                Air flow: 10 l /min.
                                                Pressure: 1.83Kg/cm2.
                                                Power supply: 220V, 50/60Hz.
                                            D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
                                            Connection pins.
                                            Dimensions: 400 x 270 x 320 mm. approx.      Weight: 10 Kg. approx.




                                                    Page 26                                                        www.edibon.com
                        PLC Small Scale Real Applications for working with PLCE



PLCE-BS4. Flow Test Module

                                                                                Specifications:
                                             Painted steel box.
                                             Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
                                             Real industrial elements.
                                             Flow optical sensor:
                                                 It gives an output in pulses proportional to the liquid flow. It is made up of a paddle
                                                 wheel, placed on the fluid current that turns producing a pulse signal while passing
                                                 between the emitter and the paddle detector.
                                                 Power supply: 4.5 to 24Vdc.
                                                 Standard flow range: 0.5 to 5 GPM.
                                             High resolution optical flow sensor:
                                                 It works in the same way as the sensor just described with the difference that it is
                                                 able to measure with a good resolution very low flow. At the output of this sensor we
                                                 get a pulse signal with a frequency proportional to the flow volume that crosses the
                                                 sensor.
                                                 Power supply: 5Vdc.
                                                 Measurement range: 0.25 to 6.5 l/min.
                                                 Temperature range: -40ºC to 70ºC.
                                             Underwater pump:
                                                 The variation in the pump power supply voltage enables to change the water
                                                 volume in the test module.
                                             Level sensor by pressure:
                                                 It is a differential pressure sensor that measures the pressure practice by the water in
                                                 relation to the atmospheric pressure, so the liquid level in the tank can be calculated.
                                                 Pressure range: 0 to 1psi.
                                                 Output at scale bottom: 16.7mV.
                                                 Sensitivity: 16.7mV/psi.
                                                 Overpressure: 20psi.
                                             Differential pressure sensor (Hole board system):
                                                 This sensor is connected to a hole-board system to measure the pressure difference
                                                 caused by the volume narrowing of the conduct through which the water flows.
                                                 On this way, with the measurement of the pressure difference between the hole
                                                 board water output and input, it is possible to calculate the water volume that
                                                 crosses the board.
                                                 Measurement range: 0 to 30 psi.
                                                 Sensitivity: 3.33mV/psi.
                                                 Overpressure: 60 psi.
                                             Changeable flow meter:
                                                 Using a small floating buoy that is inside the tube calibrated in liter/minute, it can
                                                 be read the volume measure flowing through the pipe.
                                                 Range: 0-2 l/min.
                                             V narrowing:
                                                 The connection between the main and the secondary tank, a dam, includes a "V"
                                                 narrowing. The altitude of the water level above the dam bottom is a very precise
                                                 measure of the flow relation. The ruler fixed on the right end of the tank will show
                                                 this height. Main and secondary tanks.
                                             D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
                                             Connection pins.
                                             Dimensions: 405 x 280 x 400 mm. approx.         Weight: 10 Kg. approx.




                                                     Page 27                                                              www.edibon.com
                       PLC Small Scale Real Applications for working with PLCE



PLCE-BS5. Ovens Test Module

                                                                              Specifications:
                                            Painted steel box.
                                            Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
                                            Real industrial elements.
                                            Oven chamber.
                                            Heating resistance:
                                                Oven heating resistance made up of two parallel resistances with a maximum
                                                dissipation power of 500W.
                                                The heating element power supply is of 0-30V AC.
                                                Inside the heating element there is a temperature sensor element.
                                            Fan:
                                                Fan with changeable speed that can be operated varying the fan energy supply
                                                voltage.
                                                Energy supply voltage: +12 Vdc (max).
                                                Maximum power: 0.96 W.
                                                Maximum air flow: 2.5 l/s.
                                            Thermocouples:
                                                4 thermocouples placed inside the oven, each one of them at a different height.
                                                Temperature range:-184ºC to 400ºC.
                                            Platinum resistance thermometer:
                                                Platinum resistance temperature detector, suitable for measuring air and gas
                                                temperatures.
                                                Temperature range: -70ºC to 600ºC.
                                                Resistance (0ºC): 100+/-0.1W.
                                            Thermistor:
                                                NTC thermistor for temperature measurement and control, with great sensitivity
                                                and stability.
                                                Resistence at 25ºC: 5.8 KW.
                                                Temperature range: -40ºC to 125ºC.
                                            Semiconductor temperature sensor:
                                                Reverse polarized diode. The current through the diode depends on the
                                                temperature at which balance with the surrounding environment is achieved.
                                                Therefore it needs a conditioning circuit able to transform this current variation in
                                                voltage proportional to temperature.
                                            D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
                                            Connection pins.
                                            Dimensions: 405 x 300 x 470 mm. approx.       Weight: 10 Kg. approx.




                                                    Page 28                                                            www.edibon.com
                        PLC Small Scale Real Applications for working with PLCE



PLCE-BS6. Liquid Level Test Module

                                                                                Specifications:
                                             Painted steel box.
                                             Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
                                             Real industrial elements.
                                             Water tanks.
                                             Capacitative level sensor:
                                                 Level sensor immersed in the tank.
                                                 Power supply: 24 Vdc (max).
                                                 Output: 11-20mAdc.
                                             Pressure level sensor.
                                                 It is a differential pressure sensor that measures the pressure practiced by the water
                                                 compared to the atmospheric pressure.
                                                 Pressure range: 0-1psi.
                                                 Sensibility: 16.7mV/psi.
                                                 Excitation Voltage: 10-16 Vdc.
                                             Level gauge changeable resistance with path end and beginning switches:
                                                 It is a resistance fixed to a float arm that will vary its position compared to the water
                                                 level. This system complements itself with two end and beginning path switches
                                                 respectively.
                                                 Nominal value: 250V-10A.
                                                 Switching current of the path end and beginning switches: 5 A/220Vac.
                                             Conduction sensor:
                                                 This sensor works with two electrodes immersed in one of the tanks. As the water
                                                 level rises and covers the electrodes its resistance will decrease until it arrives to KW
                                                 unit values, as long as the water does not touch the electrodes, the resistance
                                                 between them will be very big and will behave like an open circuit.
                                             Magnetic float level sensor:
                                                 Sensor formed by a small float that has inside a magnetic element, the float base
                                                 has a Hall effect element that detects when the float has gone up due to the effect of
                                                 the water.
                                                 Switching voltage: 240Vac, 110Vac.
                                                 Max. switching current: 0.6Amp.
                                             Optical level sensor:
                                                 It is a photodiode and phototransistor, which in presence of water changes its
                                                 refraction properties and make the output state approximately change from 3Vdc
                                                 to 0Vdc.
                                                 Power supply: 5Vdc.
                                                 Load current: 20mA max. at 125ºC.
                                             2 Minipumps:
                                                 The volume supplied by these pumps can be regulated varying the dc voltage value
                                                 with which they are supplied.
                                                 Power supply: 12Vdc (max. Voltage).
                                                 Nominal volume: 1 l/minute.
                                                 Nominal current: 1 A DC.
                                             D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
                                             Connection pins.
                                             Dimensions: 400 x 300 x 400 mm. approx.          Weight: 10 Kg. approx.




                                                     Page 29                                                               www.edibon.com
                       PLC Small Scale Real Applications for working with PLCE



PLCE-BS7. Tachometers Test Module

                                                                               Specifications:
                                            Painted steel box.
                                            Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
                                            Real industrial elements.
                                            Inductive Sensor:
                                                Output voltage: up to 10 Vpp.
                                                Body-housing material: Steel.
                                                Operating temp. range: -40ºC to +60ºC.
                                            DC Motor:
                                                Nominal voltage: 12V.
                                                Resistance: 9,7 Oh.
                                                Max. vacuum speed: 8500 r.p.m.
                                                Max. load speed: approx. 3500 r.p.m.
                                                Start voltage: 210mV.
                                            DC Tachometer:
                                                Voltage rating: 1.5V(dc).
                                                Power rating: 1.21W.
                                            Refractive Infrared Sensor:
                                                Sensor where an infrared emitting diode and an NPN silicon phototransistor
                                                encased side-by-side on coverging optical axes in a black thermoplastic housing.
                                                Vo in output bornes of the module: 0.0-400mV for Vs=12VDC.
                                            Slot Sensor:
                                                Slotted optical switch where an input LED and an output phototransistor are
                                                capsulated.
                                                Vo in output bornes of the module: 0.0-5V for Vs=5VDC.
                                            Hall Effect:
                                                Hall-effect position sensor where exist a relationship between supply voltage and
                                                the combined effects of a change in sensitivity (gain) and null voltage output at
                                                room temperature.
                                                Supply Voltage: 4 to 10V.
                                                Supply Current: 3.5mA.
                                                Output type: Differential.
                                                Output voltage: 0 to 0.25V at 5V, 0 gauss.
                                                Sensitivity: (-400 to +400 gauss); 0.75 to 1.06 mV/gauss.
                                                Vo in output bornes of the module: 0.0-1V for Vs=5VDC.
                                            Encoder:
                                                This optical encoder contains a lensed LED source, an integrated circuit with
                                                detectors and output circuit, and a codewheel which rotates between the emitter
                                                and the detector IC.
                                                Operating temperature: -40 to 100ºC.
                                                Supply voltage: -0.5 to 7 V.
                                                Output voltage: -0.5 to Vdc.
                                                Output current per channnel voltage: -1 to 5 mA.
                                                Vibration: 20 g, 5 to 1000 Hz.
                                                Velocity: 30000 r.p.m.
                                            D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
                                            Connection pins.
                                            Dimensions: 300 x 200 x 200 mm. approx.       Weight: 10 Kg. approx.



                                                    Page 30                                                        www.edibon.com
                        PLC Small Scale Real Applications for working with PLCE



PLCE-BS8. Proximity Test Module

                                                                                   Specifications:
                                             Painted steel box.
                                             Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
                                             Real industrial elements.
                                             DC Motor:
                                                 Nominal power supply: 12Vdc.
                                             Proximity capacitative sensor:
                                                 It can detect metallic objects.
                                                 Detection distance: 10 mm.
                                                 Output: 10-60V Imax = 200mA.
                                                 Power supply voltage: 10-60V.
                                             Hall effect sensor:
                                                 Proximity switch using the Hall effect, switching when there is a magnetic field.
                                                 Power supply voltage: 5Vdc.
                                                 Magnetic flux density: works at 22mT (35mT max), output voltage: low: 85mV.,
                                                 high: Vdc.
                                             Infrared sensor by reflection:
                                                 Emission narrow beam GaAs IR Emitter. Detection narrow beam IR Photodetector.
                                                 Emitter: VF(max): 1.7, VR (min): 3V., radiation power: 4.8mW, peak wavelength:
                                                 935nm.
                                                 Receiver: Vc (max): 12Vdc., Ic (min): 8mA., Darkness current: 100nA.
                                             Transmission infrared sensor:
                                                 Emission narrow beam GaAs IR Emitter. Detection narrow beam IR Photodetector.
                                                 Emitter: VF (max): 1.7, VR (min): 3V., radiation power: 4.8mW., peak wavelength:
                                                 935nm.
                                                 Receiver: Vc (max): 30V., Ic (min): 8mA., Darkness current: 100nA.
                                             Conduction sensor:
                                                 Proximity sensor with plate sensible to magnetic fields. Contact material: Rhode.
                                                 Output: NO-NC.
                                                 Breaking voltage: 400V.
                                                 DC or AC current (max) 0.6Amp.
                                             Inductive sensor:
                                                 Sensor that gives variations in the output voltage as a variation of the magnetic
                                                 field, caused by the near ferromagnetic material movement.
                                                 Inductance: 12mH.
                                                 Winding Resistance: 130 Oh.
                                                 Detection distance: 2mm.
                                             Ultrasound sensor:
                                                 Transmitter sensibility: 106 dB.
                                                 Receiver sensibility: -65 dB.
                                                 Resonance frequency: 40kHz.
                                                 Operation distance: 40 cm.
                                                 Output voltage: 20V rms.
                                             D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
                                             Connection pins.
                                             Dimensions: 400 x 270 x 200 mm. approx.          Weight: 10 Kg. approx.




                                                     Page 31                                                             www.edibon.com
                                   PLC Small Scale Real Applications for working with PLCE



PLCE-BS9. Pneumatic Test Module

                                                                                                      Specifications:
                                                                  Painted steel box.
                                                                  Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
                                                                  Real industrial elements.
                                                                  Proportional valve 1 and 2:
                                                                      Nominal voltage: 24Vdc.
                                                                      Pressure range: 8 bar maximum, 0 to 6 bar control.
                                                                      Linearity: 1% full scale.
                                                                  Differential pressure sensor:
                                                                      Measurement range: 0 to 30 psi.
                                                                      Sensitivity: 3.33mV/psi.
                                                                      Power supply range: 10 to 16 Vdc.
                                                                  Pneumatic switch:
                                                                      Activation: 20 to 24Vdc.
                                                                      Positions: 2.
                                                                      Maximum pressure: 6 bars.
                                                                  LVDT Sensor:
                                                                      Power-supply voltage: 9 to 24Vdc.
                                                                      Sensitivity: 60mV/mm/10Vdc.
                                                                  Regulation filter:
                                                                      Manual drainage.
                                                                      Maximum input pressure: 8 bars.
                                                                      Flux: 14.5 dm3/s.
                                                                  D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
                                                                  Connection pins.
                                                                  Dimensions: 300 x 300 x 300 mm. approx. Weight: 10 Kg. approx.
PLCE-BS10. Light Test Module
                                                                                                      Specifications:
                                                                   Painted steel box.
                                                                   Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
                                                                   Photodiode:
                                                                       This sensor converts light into either current or voltage, depending upon the mode
                                                                       of operation.
                                                                   Phototransistor:
                                                                       It also consists of a photodiode with internal gain.
                                                                   Light Dependent Resistor:
                                                                       A LDR is a resistor whose resistance decreases with increasing incident light
                                                                       intensity.
                                                                   Photovoltaic Cell:
                                                                       A photovoltaic cell converts solar radiation into direct current electricity.
                                                                   Infrared emitter-receiver:
                                                                       This element consists of a IR emitter LED and IR phototransistor.
                                                                   D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
                                                                   Connection pins.
                                                                   Dimensions: 405 x 300 x 350 mm. approx. Weight: 10 Kg. approx.



*Specifications subject to change without previous notice, due to the convenience of improvements of the product.
                                                                                       REPRESENTATIVE:




  C/ Del Agua, 14. Polígono Industrial San José de Valderas.
  28918 LEGANÉS. (Madrid). SPAIN.
  Phone: 34-91-6199363 FAX: 34-91-6198647
  E-mail: edibon@edibon.com WEB site: www.edibon.com
   Issue: ED01/11
   Date: March/2011


                                                                           Page 32
                                                                               issue:01/11




                            INDUSTRIAL PLC (ANY) (10 CAI + CAL)

Ref: 0633/10S                                                                      1 / 2

ITEM            REFERENCE                          DESCRIPTION               QTY.
  1      PLC-IN               PLC INDUSTRIAL CONTROL SYSTEM                    1
  2      PLC-IN-1             MOTOR CONTROL APPLICATION                        1
  3      PLC-IN-2             SERVO MOTOR CONTROL APPLICATION                  1
  4      PLC-IN/CAL           COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR PLC        10
                              INDUSTRIAL CONTROL SYSTEM (RESULTS
                              CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
  5      PLC-IN/SOF*          COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR PLC     10
                              INDUSTRIAL CONTROL SYSTEM
  6      INS/SOF              CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE            1
                              (TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
  7      0631PARTS            COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                       1
  8      0631PA               COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
  9      0631IYPM             INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP                     1
 10      0631CAPRO            TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
 11      0631TD               TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
 12      0631MANU             DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
Ref: 0633/10S                                                                  2 / 2



* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.

Notes:
1) Multipost option:
     This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
     units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.

2)Supply conditions included:
     a) Technical conditions:

           - Laboratories adaptation.
           - Installation of all units supplied.
           - Starting up for all units.
           - Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
           - Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
           teaching techniques uses.
           - Technology transfer.
     b) Commercial conditions:

           - Packing.
           - Financing charges.
           - C.I.F. charges.
     c) Others conditions:


           - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit

                .   Required services manual.
                .   Assembly and installation manual.
                .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                .   Set in operation manual.
                .   Safety norms manual.
                .   Practices manual.
                .   Maintenance manual.
                .   Calibration manual.




           See Catalogues in next pages
                                                                                           6.2- Automation (PLC Small Scale Real Applications)
                                                                                       www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=automationsystems&subarea=plcrealapplications&lang=en

                           PLCE. PLC Trainer




                                                                                                                            2                3
                                                                                                                          PLC              PLCE
                                                                                                                      Programming       Touch Screen
                                                                                                                        Software    Programming Software




                                                                     1   Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer


                                                                                                                                                            NE
                                                              PLC Small Scale Real Applications for working with PLCE:                                        W
6.- Automation & Systems




                             †Sensors




                                         PLCE-BS1.                          PLCE-BS2.                                           PLCE-BS3.                                    PLCE-BS4.
                               Vibration and/or Deformation     Temperature Test Module                               Pressure Test Module                              Flow Test Module
                                        Test Module




                                         PLCE-BS5.                         PLCE-BS6.                                            PLCE-BS7.                                    PLCE-BS8.
                                    Ovens Test Module           Liquid Level Test Module                           Tachometers Test Module                            Proximity Test Module




                                                                                                                                                                                 NE
                                                                                                                                                 Other available Applications:     W
                                                                                                                                    †Conveyors
                                                                                                                                    †Elevators

                                         PLCE-BS9.                       PLCE-BS10.
                                  Pneumatic Test Module           Light Test Module


                                                                                                           6.3- Automation (Industrial PLC Applications)
                                                                                                   www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=automationsystems&subarea=plcindustrial&lang=en

                           PLC-IN. PLC Industrial Control System NEW




                                                                                                                                    Available Industrial PLC Applications:

                                                                                                                     - PLC-IN-1. Motor Control Application
                                                                                                                     - PLC-IN-2. Servo Motor Control Application
                                                                                                                     Etc.




                    www.edibon.com                                                                       Page 36
                                                                             issue:01/11



                          AUTOMATION AND SYSTEMS MODULE

Ref: 0650                                                                        1 / 2

ITEM          REFERENCE                        DESCRIPTION                 QTY.
  1         SCE             COMPUTER CONTROLLED GENERATIONS STATIONS         1
                            CONTROL AND REGULATION SIMULATOR, FORMED BY:
            SCE.Unit        GENERATIONS STATIONS CONTROL AND REGULATION      1
                            SIMULATOR
            DAB             DATA ACQUISITION BOARD                           1
            SCE/CCSOF       COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA       1
                            MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR GENERATIONS
                            STATIONS CONTROL AND REGULATION SIMULATOR
  2         SCE/CAL         COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR             1
                            GENERATING STATIONS CONTROL SIMULATOR
                            (SYSTEMS ENGINEERING) (RESULTS CALCULATION
                            AND ANALYSIS)
  3         SBB             BALL-BEAM SYSTEM                                 1
  4         SBB/CAL         COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR BALL-       1
                            BEAM SYSTEM (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
                            ANALYSIS)
  5         CPVM            POSITION CONTROL ANS "DC" MOTOR                  1
  6         CPVM/CAL        COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR             1
                            POSITION CONTROL AND DC MOTOR (RESULTS
                            CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
  7         0650PARTS       COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                       1
  8         0650PA          COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
  9         0650IYPM        INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP                     1
 10         0650CAPRO       TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
 11         0650TD          TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
 12         0650MANU        DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
 Ref: 0650                                                                  2 / 2



Notes:

1) Multipost option:
     This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
     number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
      a) Technical conditions included:

             -   Laboratories adaptation.
             -   Installation of all units supplied.
             -   Starting up for all units.
             -   Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
           - Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
           the teaching techniques uses.
           - Technology transfer.
      b) Commercial conditions:
           - Packing.
           - Financing charges.
           - C.I.F. charges.
      c) Others conditions:
             - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:

                   .   Required services manual.
                   .   Assembly and installation manual.
                   .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                   .   Set in operation manual.
                   .   Safety norms manual.
                   .   Practices manual.
                   .   Maintenance manual.
                   . Calibration manual.




             See Catalogues in next pages
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    6.1- Systems
                           SCE. Computer Controlled Generating Stations Control and Regulation Simulator (Systems Engineering)


                                                                                                                   Always included
                                                                                                                    in the supply:

                                                                                                                                                      Teaching
                                                                                                                                                     Technique
                                                                                                                                                        used

                                                                                                  SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System




                                                                                                                   2                        3
                                                                                                                 Data                Software for:
                                                                                                                                     - Computer Control
                                                                                                               Acquisition           - Data Acquisition
                                                                                                                 Board               - Data Management
                                                                                                4 Cables and Accessories
                                                                                                5 Manuals
                               1   Unit: SCE. Generating Stations Control and Regulation
                                                                                               OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
                                              Simulator (System Engineering), including
                                              control interface


                                                                                           SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                                                           Items supplied as standard
                                                                                                                                                                 1.- Modelization of the motor               11.- Comparative analysis of    the
                           1 SCE Unit:
                                                                                                                                                                     as a standard motor.                         transient response of      the
                              Unit designed to simulate the regulation behaviour of a hydroelectric generating station ,as
                              a didactic application with different aspects of regulation, control and simulation.                                               2.- Modelization of the motor                    turbine real motor vs     the
                              Anodized aluminum structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the of                                          with the constants corrections               transient response of      the
                              the elements in the real unit. Main metallic elements in stainless steel.                                                              of the mathematical model.                   simulated motor           for
                              It is possible to work with this unit in 2 ways:                                                                                                                                    inductive load.
                                                                                                                                                                 3.- Calculation of the dynamos
                                     REAL mode (continuous or transient analysis).                                                                                                                           12.- Comparative analysis of
                                     SIMULATED mode.                                                                                                                 speed constant.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                  the response response of
                              The unit consists mainly of an interface for the conditioning of input and output signals.                                         4.- Obtaining of the transient                   the gate real motor vs the
                              For its part, this one will be connected to the computer (through a SCSI wire and a data                                               responses of the gate                        response of the gate
                              acquisition board) and to the two subsystems that we try to control:                                                                   motor.                                       simulated motor for
                                     Gate subsystem.
                                                                                                                                                                 5.- Obtaining of the transient                   continuous control signals.
                                     Turbine-generator subsystem.
                              The unit has (in the interface) some switches to establish different loads to the generator output                                     response of the turbine                 13.- Comparative analysis of the
                              and different conditions of the real system.                                                                                           motor.                                       response of the gate real
                              Gate subsystem:                                                                                                                                                                     motor vs the response of the
                                                                                                                                                                 6.- Obtaining of the transient
                                     It consists of a motor that controls the gate opening, and some mechanisms that                                                                                              gate simulated motor for
                                                                                                                                                                     response of the gate
                                     emulate it.                                                                                                                                                                  sinusoidal control signals.
                              Turbine-generator system:                                                                                                              simulated motor.
                                     This subsystem will be analyzed separately or linked up with the                                                                                                        14.- Comparative analysis of the
                                                                                                                                                                 7.- Obtaining of the transient                   response of the gate real
6.- Systems & Automatics




                                     previous one, achieving that the motor that simulates the turbine turns according to the
                                                                                                                                                                     response of the turbine                      motor vs the response
                                     gate opening percentage.
                                                                                                                                                                     simulated motor.
                                     This turbine is connected with a generator system and with a system that simulates different                                                                                of the gate simulated motor
                                     loads (inductive, capacitive or resistive).                                                                                 8.- C o m p a r a t i v e a n a l y s i s       for square control signals.
                                     Three loads in parallel are connected at the generator output, that simulate the                                                between the responses
                                     consumption of the energy distribution system: Variable resistance. Capacitance.                                                of the practices 4,5,6,                 15.- Comparative analysis of the
                                     Inductance.                                                                                                                     and 7.                                       response of the gate real
                              Control interface.                                                                                                                                                                  motor vs the response of the
                           2 SCE/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
                                                                                                                                                                 9.- Comparative analysis              of         gate simulated motor for
                              Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage                                               the transient response            of         triangular control signals.
                              of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second guaranteed. It allows the                                                     the turbine real motor            vs
                              registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.                                                          the transient response            of
                              This Software has got 2 operating modes:                                                                                               the simulated motor              for
                                    REAL mode: through motors, actuators and sensors that the unit includes (Continuous,                                             resistive load.
                                                  transient).                                                                                                    10.-Comparative analysis of
                                    SIMULATED mode: through the mathematical modelization of the motors, previously                                                  the transient response of the
                                                  mentioned.
                                                                                                                                                                     turbine real motor v s t h e
                           3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.                                                                                           transient response of the
                           4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
                           Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 500x450x200 mm. Weight: 25 Kg.                                                                                  simulated motor for
                                                                                                                                                                     capacitive load.
                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/automationsystems/
                           systems/SCE.pdf


                                                                                                                               SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                        PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           SBB. Ball and Beam System
                                                                                               Unit for the study of the stabilization of a naturally unstable system, and
                                                                                               control of the position of the ball.
                                                                                               The system allows to place a ball moving along a guide, oscillating from the
                                                                                               central point, at any desired point of the guide.
                                                                                               Self-contained unit with direct connection to the main, and with interface
                                                                                               with other systems through terminals, to connect the inputs and outputs.
                                                                                               All power and electronics measurements inside de unit.
                                                                                               Possibility to use an analogical or digital controller.
                                                                                               The unit includes:
                                                                                               DC motor with gear box, and armature controlled, that alllows the
                                                                                               oscillating movement of the guide adjusted to the motor axis.
                                                                                               Rod with guide for ball displacement and Ball.
                                                                                               Ball position sensor in the guide, rod inclination angle (potentiometer) and
                                                                                               motor speed (tachometric dynamo).
                                                                                                More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
                                                                                                units/automationsystems/systems/SBB.pdf


                           CPVM. DC Motor Position and Speed Control



                                                                                                                                          Page 84
                                                                                      issue:01/11



                             AUTOMATION (REGULATION AND CONTROL) MODULE

 Ref: 0651                                                                                1 / 1

 ITEM             REFERENCE                           DESCRIPTION                   QTY.
   1         RYC                     TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF REGULATION       1
                                     AND CONTROL, COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
             RYC.Unit                TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF REGULATION       1
                                     AND CONTROL INCLUDING THE CONTROL INTERFACE
             DAB                     DATA ACQUISITION BOARD                           1
             RYC/CCSOF               COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA       1
                                     MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR TEACHING EQUIPMENT
                                     FOR STUDY OF REGULATION AND CONTROL
   2         RYC/CAL                 COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR             1
                                     REGULATION AND CONTROL (RESULTS CALCULATION
                                     AND ANALYSIS)
   3         0651PARTS               COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                       1
   4         0651PA                  COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
   5         0651IYPM                INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP                     1
   6         0651CAPRO               TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
   7         0651TD                  TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
   8         0651MANU                DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
Notes:

1) Multipost option:
     This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
     number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
       a) Technical conditions included:

              -    Laboratories adaptation.
              -    Installation of all units supplied.
              -    Starting up for all units.
              -    Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
              - Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
              the teaching techniques uses.
            - Technology transfer.
       b) Commercial conditions:
            - Packing.
            - Financing charges.
            - C.I.F. charges.
       c) Others conditions:
              - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:

                      .   Required services manual.
                      .   Assembly and installation manual.
                      .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                      .   Set in operation manual.
                      .   Safety norms manual.
                      .   Practices manual.
                      .   Maintenance manual.
                      . Calibration manual.

               See Catalogues in next pages
                                                                                                                                                   6.3- Regulation and Control

                           RYC. Computer Controlled Teaching Unit for the Study of Regulation and Control




                                                                                                        Always included
                                                                                                         in the supply:

                                                                                                                                        Teaching
                                                                                                                                       Technique
                                                                                                                                          used
                                                                                         RTC. EDIBON Real Time Control System

                                                                                            Control
                                                                                           Interface
                                                                                           included
                                                                                          in the unit
                                                                                                                  2               3
                                                                                                               Data       Software for:
                                                                                                           Acquisition    - Computer Control
                                                                                                              Board       - Data Acquisition
                                                                                       4 Cables and Accessories           - Data Management
                            1   Unit: RYC. Teaching Unit for the Study of Regulation   5 Manuals
                                      and Control, including Control Interface




                                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                 PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                                                           Items supplied as standard

                           1 RYC Unit:                                                                                                                     1.- S t u d y i n o p e n l o o p N º 1 :
                              Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.                                         Proportional Block.
                              Steel box.                                                                                                                   2.- Study in open loop Nº2: Integrative
                                                                                                                                                               Block.
                              3 Modules of Controller of 1st Order. 3 Modules of Integrator.
                                                                                                                                                           3.- Study in open loop Nº3: Simple
                              2 Modules of Inverter Amplifier. Module of Inverter Reductor.
                                                                                                                                                               pole.
                              Module of Negative Zero. Module of Positive Zero.
                                                                                                                                                           4.- Study in open loop Nº4: Second
                              Module of Hysteresis. Module of Limiter.                                                                                         order plants.
                              Module of Controller of 2nd Order. Module of Adding.                                                                         5.- Study in open loop Nº5: Non-linear
                              14 Capacitors from 1mF to 100mF. 6 Diodes.
                              34 Operational Amplifiers. 33 Potentiometers.                                                                                6.- Study in open loop Nº6: Blocks
                              186 Resistances. 2 Transistors.                                                                                                  Composition: Negative Zero and
                              On/Off switch. Fuse.                                                                                                             Negative Pole.
                              Connector to PC. Control Interface.                                                                                          7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by
                           2 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
                                                                                                                                                               means of Quantitative Optimum 1st
                                                                                                                                                               order system.
                              PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs.
                                                                                                                                                           8.- Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by
                              Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
6.- Systems & Automatics




                                                                                                                                                               means of Quantitative Optimum 2nd
                           3 RYC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
                                                                                                                                                               order system
                              Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible, open and           Other practical possibilities:
                              multicontrol software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously on all process parameters.
                                                                                                                                                           Analog regulators procedure: (9-11):
                              Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second.
                                                                                                                                                           9.- First order filter.
                              Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the process and modification of the conditions during the process.
                                                                                                                                                           10.-Integral regulator.
                           4 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
                                                                                                                                                           11.-Regulating I+P with phase advance
                           5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
                                                                                                                                                               in the feedback.
                           Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
                                                                                                                                                           12.-Potentiometer adjustment.
                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/automationsystems/automationregulation/RYC.pdf




                                                                                                                                Page 88
                                                                             issue:01/11



                            AUTOMATION (CONTROL) MODULE

Ref: 0652                                                                        1 / 2

ITEM            REFERENCE                     DESCRIPTION                  QTY.
  1         UCP              COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM      1
                             (WITH ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
                             CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
                             PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL
                             DISOLVED SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
            UCP-UB           BASE UNIT. (COMMON FOR ALL SETS FOR PROCESS     1
                             CONTROL TYPE "UCP")
            UCP/CIB          CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PROCESS CONTROL       1
                             UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
                             LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
                             TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
            DAB              DATA ACQUISITION BOARD                          1
            UCP/CCSOF        COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA      1
                             MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
                             UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
                             LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
                             TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
            ,                SETS (SENSOR, ELEMENTS AND COMPUTER CONTROL
                             SOFTWARE) USED IN BASE UNIT:
            UCP-T            SET FOR TEMPERATURE PROCESS CONTROL             1
            UCP-C            SET FOR FLOW PROCESS CONTROL                    1
            UCP-N              SET FOR LEVEL PROCESS CONTROL                 1
            UCP-PA           SET FOR WATER PRESSURE PROCESS CONTROL          1
            UCP-pH           SET FOR pH PROCESS CONTROL                      1
            UCP-CT           SET FOR CONDUCTIVITY AND TDS (TOTAL             1
                             DISSOLVED SOLIDS) PROCESS CONTROL
  2         UCP/CAL          COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR            1
                             PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
                             TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
                             AND CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
  3         UCP-P            PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF           1
                             PRESSURE (AIR), COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED
                             BY:
            UCP-P.Unit       PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF           1
                             PRESSURE (AIR)
            UCP-P/CIB        CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PROCESS CONTROL       1
                             UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF PRESSURE (AIR)
            DAB              DATA ACQUISITION BOARD                          1
            UCP-P/CCSOF      COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA      1
                             MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
                             UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF PRESSURE (AIR)
  4         UCP-P/CAL        COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR            1
                             PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
                             PRESSURE (AIR) (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
                             ANALYSIS)
  5         CECI             INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS TRAINER                  1
  6         CECI/CAL         COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR            1
                             INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS TRAINER (RESULTS
                             CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
  7         CRCI             INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS NETWORKING               1
  8         CRCI/CAL         COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR            1
                             INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS NETWORKING (RESULTS
                             CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
  9         CEAB             TRAINER FOR FIELDS BUS APPLICATION              1
 Ref: 0652                                                                                2 / 2

 ITEM             REFERENCE                          DESCRIPTION                    QTY.
  10         CEAB/CAL                COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR             1
                                     TRAINER FOR FIELD BUS APPLICATION (RESULTS
                                     CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
  11         CEAC                    CONTROLLER TURNING TRAINER                       1
  12         CEAC/CAL                COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR             1
                                     CONTROLLER TURNING TRAINER (RESULTS
                                     CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
  13         EPID/T                  INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS NETWORKING                1
  14         EPID/T/CAL              COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR             1
                                     INDUSTRIAL REGULATION TRAINER, PID TYPE
                                     (TEMPERATURE) (RESULTS AND CALCULATION AND
                                     ANALYSIS)
  15         0652PARTS               COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                       1
  16         0652PA                  COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
  17         0652IYPM                INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP                     1
  18         0652CAPRO               TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
  19         0652TD                  TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
  20         0652MANU                DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
Notes:

1) Multipost option:
     This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
     number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
       a) Technical conditions included:

              -   Laboratories adaptation.
              -   Installation of all units supplied.
              -   Starting up for all units.
              -   Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
            - Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
            the teaching techniques uses.
            - Technology transfer.
       b) Commercial conditions:
            - Packing.
            - Financing charges.
            - C.I.F. charges.
       c) Others conditions:
              - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:

                      .   Required services manual.
                      .   Assembly and installation manual.
                      .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                      .   Set in operation manual.
                      .   Safety norms manual.
                      .   Practices manual.
                      .   Maintenance manual.
                      . Calibration manual.


              See Catalogues in next pages
                                                                                                                                                        10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
                           .
                        UCP Computer Controlled Process Control System (with electronic control valve):


                                                                                                                                                                    Teaching
                                                                                                                                                                   Technique
                                                                                                                                                                      used
                                                                                                           SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System




                                                                                      1                              2                      3               ( )
                                                                                                                                Data Acquisition Computer Control
                                                                                                            Control Interface Box
                                                                              UCP-UB. Base Unit                                     Board        Software for each
                                                                                                                                                  Set for Process
                                                                                                       5 Cables and Accessories                       Control
                                                                                                       6 Manuals

                                                                                                         OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL


                                                          4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:




                        Sensor and elements   Sensor and elements         Sensor and elements          Sensor and elements          Sensor and elements            Sensor and elements
                               +                     +                           +                            +                             +                               +

                         Computer Control     Computer Control             Computer Control             Computer Control             Computer Control                Computer Control
                           Software for       Software for Flow            Software for Level              Software for               Software for pH             Software for Conductivity
                        Temperature Process    Process Control ( )          Process Control ( )          Pressure Process             Process Control ( )                 and TDS
                             Control ( )                                                                     Control ( )                                               Process Control ( )
                           4.1 UCP-T.          4.2 UCP-C.                   4.3 UCP-N.                  4.4 UCP-PA.                   4.5UCP-PH.                  4.6 UCP-CT.
                       Set for Temperature       Set for Flow                 Set for Level             Set for Pressure                 Set for PH             Set for Conductivity
                         Process Control       Process Control              Process Control             Process Control               Process Control         and TDS( Total Dissolved
                                                                                                                                                               Solids)Process Control

                                                          SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                                                              PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                         Common items for all Process Control parameters:                                                             Temperature Process Control:
                       1 UCP-UB. Unit:                                                                                                                 1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
                             This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCP” and can work with one                                     2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
                             or several sets.                                                                                                          3.- Temperature control loops (P).
                             Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that                                   4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
                                                                                                                                                       5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
                             the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central                                     6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
                             dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank                                            7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
                             (2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the                                     8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
                             dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.                                     9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
                                                                                                                                                      Flow Process Control:
                             Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and                                        10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
                             with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage                                    11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
                             valves of the upper tank. Proportional valve: motorized control valve.                                                   12.- Flow control loops (P).
                        2 UCP/CIB. Control Interface Box :                                                                                            13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
                                                                                                                                                      14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
                             This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCP” and can work with one or                                      15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
                             several sets.                                                                                                            16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
                             With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently                                       17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
                             computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in                                  18.- Flow sensor calibration.
                                                                                                                                                      Level Process Control:
                             the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves                                        19.- Level control loops (Manual).
                             representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the                                            20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
10.- Process Control




                             keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID                                     21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
                             control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at                                 22.- Level control loops (P+I).
                                                                                                                                                      23.- Level control loops (P+D).
                             any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time                                          24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
                             and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in                                25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                             the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.                                    26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
                       3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:                                                                                                 27.- Level sensor calibration.
                             PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16                                      Pressure Process Control:
                                                                                                                                                      28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
                             Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital                                              29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
                             Inputs/Outputs.                                                                                                          30.- Pressure control loops (P).
                       4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:                                                31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
                             (These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)                                       32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
                                                                                                                                                      33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
                         4.1
                             UCP-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:                                                                              34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                                 Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level                                35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
                                 switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).                                                   36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
                                 Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:                                                           pH Process Control:
                                                                                                                                                      37.- pH control loops (Manual).
                                (#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison                                       38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
                                     and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows                                  39.- pH control loops (P).
                                     the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.                                40.- pH control loops (P+I).
                         4.2
                             UCP-C. Set for Flow Process Control:                                                                                     41.- pH control loops (P+D).
                                                                                                                                                      42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
                                Turbine type flow sensor.                                                                                             43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                                Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)                                                               44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
                         4.3
                             UCP-N. Set for Level Process Control:                                                                                    45.- pH sensor calibration.
                                0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).                                                               Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
                                                                                                                                                      46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
                                Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).                                                             47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
                         4.4
                             UCP-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:                                                                                48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
                                Pressure sensor.                                                                                                      49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
                                Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).                                                          50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
                         4.5 UCP-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
                                                                                                                                                      51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
                                                                                                                                                      52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                                pH sensor. Helix agitator.                                                                                            53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
                                Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).                                                                54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
                         4.6 UCP-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:                                           55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
                                Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.                                                                 56.- TDS control loops (P).
                                                                                                                                                      57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
                                Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).                                               58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
                        5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.                                                                               59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
                        6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                                                              60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                       Dimensions(approx.)=UCP-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.                                                                61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
                                                                                                                                                      62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
                                                    Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.                                                  63-81.- Practices with PLC.
                       More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
                       processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP.pdf

                                                                                                                                     Page 90
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals                                                            (continuation)

 UCPCN. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with pneumatic control valve):


                                                                                                                                               Teaching
                                                                                                                                              Technique
                                                                                                                                                 used

                                                                                      SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System




                                                                     1                          2                       3               ( )
                                                               UCPCN-UB.               Control Interface BoxData Acquisition Computer Control
                                                                                                                Board        Software for each
                                                                Base Unit                                                     Set for Process
                                                                                   5 Cables and Accessories                       Control
                                                                                   6 Manuals

                                                                                     OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL


                                      4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:




    Sensor and elements    Sensor and elements         Sensor and elements          Sensor and elements          Sensor and elements           Sensor and elements
           +                       +                          +                           +                                 +                           +

     Computer Control       Computer Control            Computer Control             Computer Control            Computer Control                Computer Control
       Software for         Software for Flow           Software for Level              Software for              Software for pH             Software for Conductivity
    Temperature Process      Process Control ( )         Process Control ( )          Pressure Process            Process Control ( )                 and TDS
         Control ( )                                                                      Control ( )                                              Process Control ( )
      4.1 UCPCN-T.          4.2UCPCN-C.                 4.3UCPCN-N.                 4.4 UCPCN-PA.                4.5 UCPCN-PH.              4.6 UCPCN-CT.
    Set for Temperature        Set for Flow               Set for Level              Set for Pressure                 Set for PH            Set for Conductivity
       Process Control       Process Control             Process Control              Process Control              Process Control        and TDS( Total Dissolved
                                                                                                                                           Solids)Process Control


                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                  Common items for all Process Control parameters:                                                          Temperature Process Control:
1 UCPCN-UB. Unit:                                                                                                            1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
      This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with                                    2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
      one or several sets.                                                                                                   3.- Temperature control loops (P).
      Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that                                4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
      the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central                                  5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
                                                                                                                             6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
      dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank                                         7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
      (2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the                                  8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
      dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.                                  9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
      Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and                                     Flow Process Control:
                                                                                                                            10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
      with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage                                 11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
      valves of the upper tank. Pneumatic Control Valve.                                                                    12.- Flow control loops (P).
2 UCPCN/CIB. Control Interface Box :                                                                                        13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
      This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with one                                    14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
      or several sets.                                                                                                      15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
      With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently                                    16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
                                                                                                                            17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
      computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in                               18.- Flow sensor calibration.
      the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves                                     Level Process Control:
      representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the                                         19.- Level control loops (Manual).




                                                                                                                                                                                                                 10.- Process Control
      keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID                                  20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
                                                                                                                            21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
      control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at                              22.- Level control loops (P+I).
      any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time                                       23.- Level control loops (P+D).
      and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in                             24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
      the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.                                 25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
                                                                                                                            26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
                                                                                                                            27.- Level sensor calibration.
      PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16                                   Pressure Process Control:
      Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital                                           28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
      Inputs/Outputs.                                                                                                       29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:                                             30.- Pressure control loops (P).
     (These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)                                     31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
  4.1
      UCPCN-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:                                                                         32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
                                                                                                                            33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
          Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level                             34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
          switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).                                                35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
          Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:                                                        36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
         (#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison                                    pH Process Control:
              and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows                               37.- pH control loops (Manual).
                                                                                                                            38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
              the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.                             39.- pH control loops (P).
  4.2
      UCPCN-C. Set for Flow Process Control:                                                                                40.- pH control loops (P+I).
          Turbine type flow sensor.                                                                                         41.- pH control loops (P+D).
         Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)                                                            42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
  4.3
      UCPCN-N. Set for Level Process Control:                                                                               43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
          0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).                                                           44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
                                                                                                                            45.- pH sensor calibration.
         Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).                                                          Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
  4.4 UCPCN-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
                                                                                                                            46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
         Pressure sensor.                                                                                                   47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
         Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).                                                       48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
  4.5UCPCN-PH. Set for pH Process Control:                                                                                  49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
         pH sensor. Helix agitator.                                                                                         50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
         Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).                                                             51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
  4.6 UCPCN-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
                                                                                                                            52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                                                                                                                            53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
      Control:                                                                                                              54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
         Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.                                                              55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
         Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).                                            56.- TDS control loops (P).
 5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.                                                                            57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
 6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                                                           58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
                                                                                                                            59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCN-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.                                                           60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                             Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.                                               61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/                                                           62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCN.pdf                                                                                       63-81.- Practices with PLC.
                                                                                                          Page 91                                                                          www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals                                                  (continuation)

                       UCPCV. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with speed controller):

                                                                                                                                                                         Teaching
                                                                                                                                                                        Technique
                                                                                                                                                                           used

                                                                                                                SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System




                                                                                        1                                2                    3                ( )
                                                                                                                                  Data Acquisition Computer Control
                                                                                                                Control Interface Box
                                                                                    UCPCV-UB.                                         Board        Software for each
                                                                                     Base Unit           5 Cables and Accessories                   Set for Process
                                                                                                                                                        Control
                                                                                                         6 Manuals
                                                                                                                OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL


                                                            4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:




                          Sensor and elements    Sensor and elements         Sensor and elements          Sensor and elements           Sensor and elements           Sensor and elements
                                 +                       +                          +                             +                           +                                +

                           Computer Control       Computer Control            Computer Control             Computer Control             Computer Control                Computer Control
                             Software for         Software for Flow           Software for Level              Software for               Software for pH             Software for Conductivity
                          Temperature Process      Process Control ( )         Process Control ( )          Pressure Process             Process Control ( )                 and TDS
                               Control ( )                                                                      Control ( )                                               Process Control ( )
                           4.1 UCPCV-T.          4.2  UCPCV-C.                4.3UCPCV-N.                 4.4UCPCV-PA.                  4.5UCPCV-PH.               4.6 UCPCV-CT.
                         Set for Temperature         Set for Flow               Set for Level              Set for Pressure                 Set for PH             Set for Conductivity
                            Process Control        Process Control             Process Control             Process Control               Process Control         and TDS( Total Dissolved
                                                                                                                                                                  Solids)Process Control


                                                        SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                                                      PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                         Common items for all Process Control parameters:                                                         Temperature Process Control:
                       1 UCPCV-UB. Unit:                                                                                                           1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
                             This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with                                   2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
                             one or several sets.                                                                                                  3.- Temperature control loops (P).
                             Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that                               4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
                             the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central                                 5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
                                                                                                                                                   6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
                             dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank                                        7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
                             (2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the                                 8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
                             dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.                                 9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
                             Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and                                    Flow Process Control:
                             with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage                                10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
                             valves of the upper tank. Speed controller (into the Control Interface Box).                                         11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
                                                                                                                                                  12.- Flow control loops (P).
                       2 UCPCV/CIB. Control Interface Box :                                                                                       13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
                             This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with one                                   14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
                             or several sets.                                                                                                     15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
                             With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently                                   16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
                             computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in                              17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
                             the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves                                    18.- Flow sensor calibration.
                                                                                                                                                  Level Process Control:
10.- Process Control




                             representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the                                        19.- Level control loops (Manual).
                             keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID                                 20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
                             control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at                             21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
                             any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time                                      22.- Level control loops (P+I).
                             and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in                            23.- Level control loops (P+D).
                             the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.                                24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
                       3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:                                                                                             25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                                                                                                                                                  26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
                             PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16                                  27.- Level sensor calibration.
                             Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital                                          Pressure Process Control:
                             Inputs/Outputs.                                                                                                      28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
                       4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:                                            29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
                             (These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)                                   30.- Pressure control loops (P).
                                                                                                                                                  31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
                         4.1
                             UCPCV-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:                                                                        32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
                                 Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level                            33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
                                 switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).                                               34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                                 Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:                                                       35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
                                (#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison                                   36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
                                     and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows                              pH Process Control:
                                                                                                                                                  37.- pH control loops (Manual).
                                     the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.                            38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
                         4.2
                             UCPCV-C. Set for Flow Process Control:                                                                               39.- pH control loops (P).
                                Turbine type flow sensor.                                                                                         40.- pH control loops (P+I).
                                Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)                                                           41.- pH control loops (P+D).
                         4.3
                             UCPCV-N. Set for Level Process Control:                                                                              42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
                                                                                                                                                  43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                                0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).                                                           44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
                                Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).                                                         45.- pH sensor calibration.
                         4.4
                             UCPCV-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:                                                                          Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
                                Pressure sensor.                                                                                                  46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
                                Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).                                                      47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
                         4.5 UCPCV-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
                                                                                                                                                  48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
                                                                                                                                                  49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
                                pH sensor. Helix agitator.                                                                                        50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
                                Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).                                                            51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
                         4.6
                             UCPCV-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process                                              52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                             Control:                                                                                                             53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
                                                                                                                                                  54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
                                Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.                                                             55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
                                Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).                                           56.- TDS control loops (P).
                        5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.                                                                           57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
                        6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                                                          58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
                       Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCV-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.                                                          59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
                                                                                                                                                  60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                                                    Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.                                              61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
                                                                                                                                                  62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
                       More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/                                                          63-81.- Practices with PLC.
                       processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCV.pdf

                                                                                                                                  Page 92
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals                                                                              (continuation)

 UCP/FSS. Faults Simulation System (Process Control Unit):
                                                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                                          The "FAULTS" mode consists on provoking several faults
                                                                          in the unit normal operation. The student must find them         Incorrect Calibration:
                                                                          and, if possible, solve them.                                    1.- Load the calibration error of the PH sensor.
                                                                          There are several kinds of faults that can be grouped in
                                                                          three sections:                                                  2.- Load the calibration error of the Level sensor.
                                                                              Faults affecting the sensors measure:                        3.- Load the calibration error of the Flow sensor.
                                                                                - An incorrect calibration is applied to them.
                                                                                  In this case, the student should proceed to              4.- Load the calibration error of the Temperature sensor.
                                                                                  calibrate the affected sensor through the                Non Linearity:
                                                                                  values collection.                                       5.- Non inverse linearity of the pH sensor.
                                                                                - Non-linearity.
                                                                                  When we have the measures taken by the                   6.- Non quadratic linearity of the Level sensor.
                                                                                  sensor, a quadratic or inverse function is               7.- Non quadratic linearity of the Flow sensor.
                                                                                  applied to them. Thus, the value measured will           8.- No inverse linearity of the Temperature sensor.
                                                                                  not be the real one, as in the case above
                                                                                  mentioned, but when we calibrate again, the              Interchange of actuators:
                                                                                  sensor will not operate linearly and we will not be      9.- Interchange the bombs AB-1 and AB-2 between
                                                                                  able to calibrate it by lest squares fits.                     them during the operations of the controls ON/OFF
                                                                              Faults affecting the actuators: (These do not admit                and PID. (Affected sensor: Level sensor).
                                                                              solutions. The student must just realise it and
                                                                              notify it.)                                                  Reduction of an actuator response:
                                                                                - Actuators canals interchange at any time                 10.- In the PID, the real response of the proportional valve is
                                                                                  during the program execution.                                  half the amount calculated by the PID control. Thus,
                                                                                  This error does not admit any solution.                        the maximum real opening that will be able to reach is
                                                                                - Response reduction of an actuator.
                                                                                  By the reduction of the output voltage in analog               50%. (Affected sensor: Flow sensor).
                                                                                  outputs, we can get an response with                     Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls:
                                                                                  a fraction of what it should be, either with a           11.- In the ON/OFF control, the actuation sensor of the
                                                                                  manual execution or with any control type
                                                                                  (ON/OFF, PID...).                                              AVS-1 is inverted, acting, thus, on the same way as the
                                                                              Faults in the controls execution:                                  others 2 valves (for a good control, it should operate
                                                                                - Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls.               the other way around to how the others 2 do it).
                                                                                  The state of some actuator is inverted, when it                (Affected sensor: pH).
                                                                                  should be ON            is OFF instead, and vice
                                                                                  versa. The student should provide the correct            Reduction or increase of the calculated total response:
                                                                                  operating logic.                                         12.- In the PID, the real action in the resistance is half of the
                                                                                - Reduction or increase of the calculated total                  total calculated. (Affected sensor: Temperature
                                                                                  response.                                                      sensor).
                                                                                  We multiply by a factor the total response
                                                                                  calculated by the PID, provoking, thus, the              The action of some controls is annulled:
                                                                                  reduction or increase of the action really applied       13.- The Integral control does not work. It is reduced to a PD
                                                                                  to the actuator, and the consequent                            control (Proportional-Derivative).
                                                                                  instability of the control. The student should notify    14.- The Derivative Control does not work. It is reduced to a
                                                                                  it and try to calculate this factor.
                                                                                - The action of some controls is annulled.                       PI Control (Proportional-Integral).
                                                                                                                                           15.- The Integral and Derivative controls do not work. They
                                                                          More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                                                          catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/                       are reduced to a Proportional Control.
                                                                          UCP .pdf

      .
 UCP-P Computer Controlled Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)


                                                                                        Always included
                                                                                         in the supply:
                                                                                                                                Teaching
                                                                                                                               Technique
                                                                                                                                  used

                                                                           SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System




                                                                                    2                     3              4




                                                                                                                                                                                                               10.- Process Control
                                                                                 Control             Data        Software for:
                                                                              Interface Box        Acquisition   - Computer Control
                                                                                                     Board       - Data Acquisition
                                                                            5 Cables and Accessories             - Data Management
     1 Unit: UCP-P Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
                  .                                                         6 Manuals

                                                                             OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL




                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                                             Items supplied as standard                                                         1.- Calculating the fluid flow in function
 1        .
   UCP-P Unit:                                                                                                                                                       of different pressure sensor.
    Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.                                      2.- Calibration processes.
    Pressure sensor. Differential pressure sensor. Pneumatically Operated Control Valve. On/off valves. Pressure regulators, one
                                                                                                                                                                3.- Pressure sensor calibration. Study of
    for controlling the pneumatic operated control valve and the second supplies the necessary flow and/or pressure to the circuit
                                                                                                                                                                     the hysteresis curve.
    that is to be adjusted. Storage tank. Pressure manometers. Flow meter. Intel/outlet valve. Diaphragm. Exhaust valve. I/P
                                                                                                                                                                4.- I/P converter calibration.
    Converter.
 2 UCP-P/CIB. Control Interface Box :
                                                                                                                                                                5.- Identification of the pneumatic valve
    With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous                                             type.
    visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real                                 6.- Determination of the influence of the
    time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered                                          flow rate of the conduction.
    signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the                                7.- Pressure control in conduction using
    PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,                                           a PID controller.
    of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, other electronic in control interface, and                                  8.- Proportional control (P)characteristics.
    the third one in the control software.                                                                                                                      9.- Characteristics of a proportional
 3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:                                                                                                                                      and integral control (P+I).
    PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:                                     10.- Characteristics of a proportional
    250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.                                                                                                           and derivative control (P+D).
 4 UCP-P/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
                                                                                                                                                                11.- Optimization of the variables of a
    Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
                                                                                                                                                                     PID controller.
    to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real
                                                                                                                                                                12.-Optimization of the variables of the
    time.
 5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
                                                                                                                                                                    PID controller, flow control.
 6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
                                                                                                                                                                13- Flow rate control in conduction with
                                                                                                                                                                     a PID controller.
 Dimensions (approx.)=Unit: 600x500x1000 mm. Weight: 15Kg.             Control Interface: 490x330x175 mm. Weight: 5 Kg.
                                                                                                                                                                14-32.- Practices with PLC.
 More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP-P.pdf

                                                                                                                             Page 93                                                      www.edibon.com
                                                                                             10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals                                              (continuation)

                       CECI. Industrial Controllers Trainer
                                                                                     SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                              PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                              Trainer for industrial process controllers. This trainer allows students the
                                                              study and familiarisation with the function and operation of a industrial           To study methods and terminology of
                                                              process controller.                                                                 process control:
                                                              Steel box.                                                                           1.-Closed loop control.
                                                              Configurable digital controller:
                                                                   2 inputs, 1 output. Configurable as P, PI or PID controller.                    2.-Static and dynamic transfer function.
                                                                   Proportional gain Xp: 0 -999.9%. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s.              3.-To study the step response.
                                                                   Derivative time Tv: 0-1200s. RS232 interface for configuration on               4.-Reference variable step.
                                                                   computer (PC).
                                                              Digital voltmeter: 0 -20V.                                                          To learn and to familiarise with a process
                                                              Signal generator with potentiometer. Reference variables generator: 2               controller:
                                                              voltages selectable. Output voltage: 0-10V.                                          5.-Configuration level.
                                                              Controlled system simulator:
                                                                   Controlled system type: First order lag . Time constant: 20s. Process           6.-Parameter level.
                                                                   variables as analogue signals: 0-10V. System gain: 1...10.                      7.-Operation control levels.
                                                              All variables accessible as analog signals at lab jacks .                           Control parameters:
                                                              Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for
                                                              example:line recorder, plotter, oscilloscope...).                                    8.-Setting input channels.
                                                              Configuration software CD. Interface cable. Set of lab cables.                       9.-Setting output channels.
                                                              Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                      10.-To use computer (PC) - based
                                                              Dimensions (approx.)= 490x330x310 mm.              Weight : 8 Kg.                        configuration tools.
                                                              More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/                         11.- Scaling displays.
                                                              units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CECI.pdf

                       CRCI. Industrial Controllers Networking
                                                                                     SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                              PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                              This trainer enables to take the first steps in process automation using field
                                                              buses. This trainer demonstrates the operation of a process control system           1.- Function of a digital industrial
                                                              based on a simple application.                                                           controller.
                                                              This trainer allows student the familiarisation with the function and operation      2.- Layout of a field bus system.
                                                              of a industrial process controller.                                                  To learn and to familiarise with the
                                                              Steel box.                                                                           operation and structure of a process
                                                              2 Digital process controllers, with field bus interface:                             control system under Profibus DP:
                                                                                     ,
                                                                  Configurable as P PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp : 0-999.9%.         3.- Controller parameter setting via field
                                                                  Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s.                    bus system.
                                                                  Controller parameter setting via field bus system.
                                                              2 Signal generators: 0-10V. Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC).            4.- Profibus DP field bus system.
                                                              Process variables as analog signals: 0-10V. All variables accessible as              5.- OPC (OLE for Process Control)
                                                              analog signals at lab jacks .                                                            server function.
                                                              Software CD with driver software, OPC server and process control software.           6.- Online controller parameters
                                                              Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example:            setting.
                                                              line recorder, oscilloscope, etc).                                                   7.- Master / slave assignment.
                                                              Set of cables.                                                                       8.- To configure and display alarms.
                                                              Manuals:This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                        9.- Reading control variables and
                                                              Dimensions (approx.)=490x330x310 mm.                 Weight : 12 Kg.
                                                                                                                                                       displaying them online.
                                                              More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/                         10.- Scaling displays.
                                                              units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CRCI.pdf                                          11.- Bus configuration.

                       CEAB. Trainer for Field Bus Application
                                                                                    SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                              PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                              This Trainer is used to teach the initial or first steps in field bus tecnology
                                                              based on Profibus DP   .                                                             1.- Operation and function of a digital
                                                              The field bus permits networking terminal devices (controllers, actuators or             industrial controller.
                                                              sensors) in the plant system (field level) with the control room (control level).
                                                              Several devices (slaves) are activated and read by a computer (PC) with a            2.- Function of an analog input/outputs
                                                              Profibus DP interface (master).                                                          module.
                                                              Different subjects or topics can be covered and studied: bus topology,               3.- Function of a digital input/output
                                                              system configurator with Device Master File “DMF”, communication
                                                              protocols, tags, OPC server, output and input process data, etc.                         module.
                                                              Steel box.                                                                           4.- Layout of a field bus system.
                                                              Digital process controller, with Profibus DP interface:                              5.- Familiarisation with the field bus
                                                                                     ,
                                                                 Configurable as P PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp:0-999.9%.
10.- Process Control




                                                                 Derivative time Tv:0-1200s. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s.                         stations.
                                                              Signal generators: 0-10V. Digital voltmeter: 0-20V.                                  6.- Defining the bus technology with the
                                                              Digital Profibus DP I module. Digital Profibus DP O module. Four digital                 stations.
                                                              inputs. Four digital outputs.
                                                              Analog Profibus DP I module. Analog Profibus DP O module. Four analog                7.- Reading out and in, and online
                                                              inputs: 0-10V. Two analog outputs: 0-10V.                                                displaying of analog and digital
                                                              Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC).                                            process variables.
                                                              Process variables as analog signals at lab jacks: 0-10V.
                                                              Software CD with driver software, system configurator, OPC server and                8.- Communication protocols.
                                                              process control software.                                                            9.- To define tags.
                                                              Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example:       10.- Familiarisation with the device
                                                              chart recorder, oscilloscope, etc).
                                                              Set of cables.                                                                           master file “DMF”.
                                                              Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                      11.- OPC server.
                                                              Dimensions (approx.)= 490x330x310 mm.                Weight : 12 Kg.                12.- Access to the OPC database from
                                                              More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/                              the process control program.
                                                              units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CEAB.pdf

                       CEAC. Controller Tuning Trainer
                                                                                     SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
                                                                                                                                                        PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                              Trainer for controller tuning.This unit permits the interaction between
                                                              controller and controlled system. The objective is that the closed control           1.- To use commonly applied tuning
                                                              loop, formed by the controller and the controlled system, to show the desired
                                                              optimum response.                                                                        rules, such as Ziegler-Nichols.
                                                              With a simulation software the setting of controller parameters can be               2.- To study the difference between
                                                              practised safely. Closed an open loop control, step response, stability,                 open and closed loop control.
                                                              disturbance and control response are demonstrated.                                   3.- Control loop comprising controller
                                                              This trainer no needs real controlled systems, the controlled system is                  and controlled system.
                                                              simulated on a computer (PC) by the simulation program. In this program
                                                              the most important types of controlled systems can be selected . We can              4.- To determine the system parameters.
                                                              recorder and analyse the time response using the software.                           5.- Closed-loop control system
                                                              The process controller used can be easily configured from the computer                   response.
                                                              (PC).The controller and the computer (PC) are connected by a data                    6.- Choice of optimum controller
                                                              acquisition card with AD and DA converters.
                                                              Steel box.                                                                               parameters.
                                                              Configurable digital process controller, with interface:                             7.- Stability, steady state and transient
                                                                                     ,
                                                                  Configurable as P PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp: 0-999.9%.              response.
                                                                  Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s.                8.- Study and investigation of control
                                                              Interface for computer (PC). Data acquisition card for computer (PC).                    and disturbance response.
                                                              Simulation Software for controlled system models, such as 1st and 2nd order
                                                              lags, time-delayed systems etc. Controlled system simulation models with             9.- Study of the stability of the closed
                                                              proportional, integral, 1st order lag, 2nd order lag, time-delayed response,             control loop.
                                                              non-linearity and limitation.                                                       10.- Learning methods and terminology
                                                              Configuration software for process controller. Recording and evaluation of               involved in process control.
                                                              time response on computer (PC).                                                     11.- To adapt the process controller to
                                                              Set of cables.
                                                              Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                           different controlled systems.
                                                              Dimensions (approx.)= 330x330x145 mm. Weight : 5 Kg.                                12.- Use and practices with the
                                                              More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/                              simulation software.
                                                              units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CEAC.pdf
                                                                                              Page 94
                                                                      Advanced Automation and Systems Laboratory
                                                                                         (6AD)




List of modules and teaching units included plus
            Summarised Catalogues

                         Priority 2
               1000. Process Control
               1010: Process Control. Basic Module.
               1010/PLC: PLC's Module
               1011: Process Control. Medium Module
               1011/PLC: PLC's Module
               1020: Industrial Process Module
               1020/PLC: PLC's Module
               1000/ESN: EDIBON Scada-Net for Process Control units




                                                                                                                   Ref.:6AD-pre(01/11)
                                                                              issue:01/11



                            PROCESS CONTROL.BASIC MODULE

Ref: 1010                                                                         1 / 2

ITEM            REFERENCE                     DESCRIPTION                   QTY.
  1         UCP              COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM       1
                             (WITH ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
                             CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
                             PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL
                             DISOLVED SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
            UCP-UB           BASE UNIT. (COMMON FOR ALL SETS FOR PROCESS      1
                             CONTROL TYPE "UCP")
            UCP/CIB          CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PROCESS CONTROL        1
                             UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
                             LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
                             TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
            DAB              DATA ACQUISITION BOARD                           1
            UCP/CCSOF        COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA       1
                             MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
                             UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
                             LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
                             TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
            ,                SETS (SENSOR, ELEMENTS AND COMPUTER CONTROL
                             SOFTWARE) USED IN BASE UNIT:
            UCP-T            SET FOR TEMPERATURE PROCESS CONTROL              1
            UCP-C            SET FOR FLOW PROCESS CONTROL                     1
            UCP-N              SET FOR LEVEL PROCESS CONTROL                  1
            UCP-PA           SET FOR WATER PRESSURE PROCESS CONTROL           1
            UCP-pH           SET FOR pH PROCESS CONTROL                       1
            UCP-CT           SET FOR CONDUCTIVITY AND TDS (TOTAL              1
                             DISSOLVED SOLIDS) PROCESS CONTROL
  2         UCP/CAL          COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR             1
                             PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
                             TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
                             AND CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
  3         1010PARTS        COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                       1
  4         1010PA           COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
  5         1010IYPM         INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP                     1
  6         1010CAPRO        TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
  7         1010TD           TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
  8         1010MANU         DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
 Ref: 1010                                                                  2 / 2



Notes:

1) Multipost option:
     This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
     number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
      a) Technical conditions included:

             -   Laboratories adaptation.
             -   Installation of all units supplied.
             -   Starting up for all units.
             -   Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
           - Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
           the teaching techniques uses.
           - Technology transfer.
      b) Commercial conditions:
           - Packing.
           - Financing charges.
           - C.I.F. charges.
      c) Others conditions:
             - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:

                   .   Required services manual.
                   .   Assembly and installation manual.
                   .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                   .   Set in operation manual.
                   .   Safety norms manual.
                   .   Practices manual.
                   .   Maintenance manual.
                   . Calibration manual.




             See Catalogues in next pages
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
     .
  UCP Computer Controlled Process Control System (with electronic control valve):


                                                                                                                                              Teaching
                                                                                                                                             Technique
                                                                                                                                                used
                                                                                     SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System




                                                                1                              2                      3               ( )
                                                                                                          Data Acquisition Computer Control
                                                                                      Control Interface Box
                                                        UCP-UB. Base Unit                                     Board        Software for each
                                                                                                                            Set for Process
                                                                                 5 Cables and Accessories                       Control
                                                                                 6 Manuals

                                                                                   OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL


                                    4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:




  Sensor and elements   Sensor and elements         Sensor and elements          Sensor and elements          Sensor and elements            Sensor and elements
         +                     +                           +                            +                             +                               +

   Computer Control     Computer Control             Computer Control             Computer Control             Computer Control                Computer Control
     Software for       Software for Flow            Software for Level              Software for               Software for pH             Software for Conductivity
  Temperature Process    Process Control ( )          Process Control ( )          Pressure Process             Process Control ( )                 and TDS
       Control ( )                                                                     Control ( )                                               Process Control ( )
     4.1 UCP-T.          4.2 UCP-C.                   4.3 UCP-N.                  4.4 UCP-PA.                   4.5UCP-PH.                  4.6 UCP-CT.
 Set for Temperature       Set for Flow                 Set for Level             Set for Pressure                 Set for PH             Set for Conductivity
   Process Control       Process Control              Process Control             Process Control               Process Control         and TDS( Total Dissolved
                                                                                                                                         Solids)Process Control

                                    SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                                                              PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                   Common items for all Process Control parameters:                                                             Temperature Process Control:
 1 UCP-UB. Unit:                                                                                                                 1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
       This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCP” and can work with one                                     2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
       or several sets.                                                                                                          3.- Temperature control loops (P).
       Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that                                   4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
                                                                                                                                 5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
       the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central                                     6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
       dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank                                            7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
       (2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the                                     8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
       dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.                                     9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
                                                                                                                                Flow Process Control:
       Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and                                        10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
       with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage                                    11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
       valves of the upper tank. Proportional valve: motorized control valve.                                                   12.- Flow control loops (P).
  2 UCP/CIB. Control Interface Box :                                                                                            13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
                                                                                                                                14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
       This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCP” and can work with one or                                      15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
       several sets.                                                                                                            16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
       With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently                                       17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
       computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in                                  18.- Flow sensor calibration.
                                                                                                                                Level Process Control:
       the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves                                        19.- Level control loops (Manual).
       representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the                                            20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
       keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID                                     21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
       control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at                                 22.- Level control loops (P+I).




                                                                                                                                                                                                                     10.- Process Control
                                                                                                                                23.- Level control loops (P+D).
       any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time                                          24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
       and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in                                25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
       the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.                                    26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
 3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:                                                                                                 27.- Level sensor calibration.
       PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16                                      Pressure Process Control:
                                                                                                                                28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
       Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital                                              29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
       Inputs/Outputs.                                                                                                          30.- Pressure control loops (P).
 4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:                                                31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
       (These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)                                       32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
                                                                                                                                33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
   4.1
       UCP-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:                                                                              34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
           Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level                                35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
           switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).                                                   36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
           Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:                                                           pH Process Control:
                                                                                                                                37.- pH control loops (Manual).
          (#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison                                       38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
               and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows                                  39.- pH control loops (P).
               the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.                                40.- pH control loops (P+I).
   4.2
       UCP-C. Set for Flow Process Control:                                                                                     41.- pH control loops (P+D).
                                                                                                                                42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
          Turbine type flow sensor.                                                                                             43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
          Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)                                                               44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
   4.3
       UCP-N. Set for Level Process Control:                                                                                    45.- pH sensor calibration.
          0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).                                                               Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
                                                                                                                                46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
          Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).                                                             47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
   4.4
       UCP-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:                                                                                48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
          Pressure sensor.                                                                                                      49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
          Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).                                                          50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
   4.5 UCP-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
                                                                                                                                51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
                                                                                                                                52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
          pH sensor. Helix agitator.                                                                                            53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
          Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).                                                                54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
   4.6 UCP-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:                                           55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
          Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.                                                                 56.- TDS control loops (P).
                                                                                                                                57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
          Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).                                               58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
  5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.                                                                               59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
  6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                                                              60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
 Dimensions(approx.)=UCP-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.                                                                61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
                                                                                                                                62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
                              Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.                                                  63-81.- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP.pdf

                                                                                                               Page 61                                                                            www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals                                                   (continuation)

                       UCPCN. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with pneumatic control valve):


                                                                                                                                                                      Teaching
                                                                                                                                                                     Technique
                                                                                                                                                                        used

                                                                                                             SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System




                                                                                            1                          2                       3               ( )
                                                                                      UCPCN-UB.               Control Interface BoxData Acquisition Computer Control
                                                                                                                                       Board        Software for each
                                                                                       Base Unit                                                     Set for Process
                                                                                                          5 Cables and Accessories                       Control
                                                                                                          6 Manuals

                                                                                                            OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL


                                                             4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:




                           Sensor and elements    Sensor and elements         Sensor and elements          Sensor and elements          Sensor and elements           Sensor and elements
                                  +                       +                          +                           +                                 +                           +

                            Computer Control       Computer Control            Computer Control             Computer Control            Computer Control                Computer Control
                              Software for         Software for Flow           Software for Level              Software for              Software for pH             Software for Conductivity
                           Temperature Process      Process Control ( )         Process Control ( )          Pressure Process            Process Control ( )                 and TDS
                                Control ( )                                                                      Control ( )                                              Process Control ( )
                             4.1 UCPCN-T.          4.2UCPCN-C.                 4.3UCPCN-N.                 4.4 UCPCN-PA.                4.5 UCPCN-PH.              4.6 UCPCN-CT.
                           Set for Temperature        Set for Flow               Set for Level              Set for Pressure                 Set for PH            Set for Conductivity
                              Process Control       Process Control             Process Control              Process Control              Process Control        and TDS( Total Dissolved
                                                                                                                                                                  Solids)Process Control


                                                         SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                         Common items for all Process Control parameters:                                                          Temperature Process Control:
                       1 UCPCN-UB. Unit:                                                                                                            1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
                             This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with                                    2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
                             one or several sets.                                                                                                   3.- Temperature control loops (P).
                             Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that                                4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
                             the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central                                  5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
                                                                                                                                                    6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
                             dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank                                         7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
                             (2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the                                  8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
                             dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.                                  9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
                             Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and                                     Flow Process Control:
                                                                                                                                                   10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
                             with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage                                 11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
                             valves of the upper tank. Pneumatic Control Valve.                                                                    12.- Flow control loops (P).
                       2 UCPCN/CIB. Control Interface Box :                                                                                        13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
                             This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with one                                    14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
                             or several sets.                                                                                                      15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
                             With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently                                    16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
                                                                                                                                                   17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
                             computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in                               18.- Flow sensor calibration.
                             the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves                                     Level Process Control:
                             representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the                                         19.- Level control loops (Manual).
10.- Process Control




                             keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID                                  20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
                                                                                                                                                   21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
                             control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at                              22.- Level control loops (P+I).
                             any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time                                       23.- Level control loops (P+D).
                             and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in                             24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
                             the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.                                 25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                       3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
                                                                                                                                                   26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
                                                                                                                                                   27.- Level sensor calibration.
                             PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16                                   Pressure Process Control:
                             Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital                                           28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
                             Inputs/Outputs.                                                                                                       29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
                       4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:                                             30.- Pressure control loops (P).
                            (These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)                                     31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
                         4.1
                             UCPCN-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:                                                                         32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
                                                                                                                                                   33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
                                 Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level                             34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                                 switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).                                                35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
                                 Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:                                                        36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
                                (#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison                                    pH Process Control:
                                     and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows                               37.- pH control loops (Manual).
                                                                                                                                                   38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
                                     the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.                             39.- pH control loops (P).
                         4.2
                             UCPCN-C. Set for Flow Process Control:                                                                                40.- pH control loops (P+I).
                                 Turbine type flow sensor.                                                                                         41.- pH control loops (P+D).
                                Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)                                                            42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
                         4.3
                             UCPCN-N. Set for Level Process Control:                                                                               43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                                 0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).                                                           44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
                                                                                                                                                   45.- pH sensor calibration.
                                Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).                                                          Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
                         4.4 UCPCN-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
                                                                                                                                                   46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
                                Pressure sensor.                                                                                                   47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
                                Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).                                                       48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
                         4.5UCPCN-PH. Set for pH Process Control:                                                                                  49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
                                pH sensor. Helix agitator.                                                                                         50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
                                Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).                                                             51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
                         4.6 UCPCN-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
                                                                                                                                                   52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                                                                                                                                                   53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
                             Control:                                                                                                              54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
                                Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.                                                              55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
                                Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).                                            56.- TDS control loops (P).
                        5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.                                                                            57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
                        6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                                                           58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
                                                                                                                                                   59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
                       Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCN-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.                                                           60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                                                    Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.                                               61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
                       More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/                                                           62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
                       processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCN.pdf                                                                                       63-81.- Practices with PLC.
                                                                                                                                 Page 62
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals                                                               (continuation)

UCPCV. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with speed controller):

                                                                                                                                                   Teaching
                                                                                                                                                  Technique
                                                                                                                                                     used

                                                                                          SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System




                                                                  1                                2                    3                ( )
                                                                                                            Data Acquisition Computer Control
                                                                                          Control Interface Box
                                                              UCPCV-UB.                                         Board        Software for each
                                                               Base Unit           5 Cables and Accessories                   Set for Process
                                                                                                                                  Control
                                                                                   6 Manuals
                                                                                          OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL


                                      4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:




    Sensor and elements    Sensor and elements         Sensor and elements          Sensor and elements           Sensor and elements           Sensor and elements
           +                       +                          +                             +                           +                                +

     Computer Control       Computer Control            Computer Control             Computer Control             Computer Control                Computer Control
       Software for         Software for Flow           Software for Level              Software for               Software for pH             Software for Conductivity
    Temperature Process      Process Control ( )         Process Control ( )          Pressure Process             Process Control ( )                 and TDS
         Control ( )                                                                      Control ( )                                               Process Control ( )
     4.1 UCPCV-T.          4.2  UCPCV-C.                4.3UCPCV-N.                 4.4UCPCV-PA.                  4.5UCPCV-PH.               4.6 UCPCV-CT.
   Set for Temperature         Set for Flow               Set for Level              Set for Pressure                 Set for PH             Set for Conductivity
      Process Control        Process Control             Process Control             Process Control               Process Control         and TDS( Total Dissolved
                                                                                                                                            Solids)Process Control


                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                                                      PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                   Common items for all Process Control parameters:                                                         Temperature Process Control:
 1 UCPCV-UB. Unit:                                                                                                           1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
       This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with                                   2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
       one or several sets.                                                                                                  3.- Temperature control loops (P).
       Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that                               4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
       the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central                                 5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
                                                                                                                             6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
       dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank                                        7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
       (2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the                                 8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
       dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.                                 9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
       Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and                                    Flow Process Control:
       with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage                                10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
       valves of the upper tank. Speed controller (into the Control Interface Box).                                         11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
                                                                                                                            12.- Flow control loops (P).
 2 UCPCV/CIB. Control Interface Box :                                                                                       13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
       This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with one                                   14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
       or several sets.                                                                                                     15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
       With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently                                   16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
       computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in                              17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
       the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves                                    18.- Flow sensor calibration.
                                                                                                                            Level Process Control:
       representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the                                        19.- Level control loops (Manual).
       keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID                                 20.- Level control loops (On/Off).




                                                                                                                                                                                                                 10.- Process Control
       control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at                             21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
       any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time                                      22.- Level control loops (P+I).
       and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in                            23.- Level control loops (P+D).
       the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.                                24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
 3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:                                                                                             25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                                                                                                                            26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
       PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16                                  27.- Level sensor calibration.
       Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital                                          Pressure Process Control:
       Inputs/Outputs.                                                                                                      28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
 4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:                                            29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
       (These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)                                   30.- Pressure control loops (P).
                                                                                                                            31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
   4.1
       UCPCV-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:                                                                        32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
           Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level                            33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
           switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).                                               34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
           Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:                                                       35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
          (#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison                                   36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
               and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows                              pH Process Control:
                                                                                                                            37.- pH control loops (Manual).
               the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.                            38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
   4.2
       UCPCV-C. Set for Flow Process Control:                                                                               39.- pH control loops (P).
          Turbine type flow sensor.                                                                                         40.- pH control loops (P+I).
          Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)                                                           41.- pH control loops (P+D).
   4.3
       UCPCV-N. Set for Level Process Control:                                                                              42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
                                                                                                                            43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
          0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).                                                           44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
          Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).                                                         45.- pH sensor calibration.
   4.4
       UCPCV-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:                                                                          Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
          Pressure sensor.                                                                                                  46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
          Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).                                                      47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
   4.5 UCPCV-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
                                                                                                                            48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
                                                                                                                            49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
          pH sensor. Helix agitator.                                                                                        50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
          Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).                                                            51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
   4.6
       UCPCV-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process                                              52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
       Control:                                                                                                             53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
                                                                                                                            54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
          Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.                                                             55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
          Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).                                           56.- TDS control loops (P).
  5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.                                                                           57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
  6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                                                          58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
 Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCV-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.                                                          59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
                                                                                                                            60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                              Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.                                              61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
                                                                                                                            62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/                                                           63-81.- Practices with PLC.
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCV.pdf

                                                                                                            Page 63                                                                        www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                               10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals                                 (continuation)

                       UCP/FSS. Faults Simulation System (Process Control Unit):
                                                                                                                         SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                                                                The "FAULTS" mode consists on provoking several faults
                                                                                                in the unit normal operation. The student must find them         Incorrect Calibration:
                                                                                                and, if possible, solve them.                                    1.- Load the calibration error of the PH sensor.
                                                                                                There are several kinds of faults that can be grouped in
                                                                                                three sections:                                                  2.- Load the calibration error of the Level sensor.
                                                                                                    Faults affecting the sensors measure:                        3.- Load the calibration error of the Flow sensor.
                                                                                                      - An incorrect calibration is applied to them.
                                                                                                        In this case, the student should proceed to              4.- Load the calibration error of the Temperature sensor.
                                                                                                        calibrate the affected sensor through the                Non Linearity:
                                                                                                        values collection.                                       5.- Non inverse linearity of the pH sensor.
                                                                                                      - Non-linearity.
                                                                                                        When we have the measures taken by the                   6.- Non quadratic linearity of the Level sensor.
                                                                                                        sensor, a quadratic or inverse function is               7.- Non quadratic linearity of the Flow sensor.
                                                                                                        applied to them. Thus, the value measured will           8.- No inverse linearity of the Temperature sensor.
                                                                                                        not be the real one, as in the case above
                                                                                                        mentioned, but when we calibrate again, the              Interchange of actuators:
                                                                                                        sensor will not operate linearly and we will not be      9.- Interchange the bombs AB-1 and AB-2 between
                                                                                                        able to calibrate it by lest squares fits.                     them during the operations of the controls ON/OFF
                                                                                                    Faults affecting the actuators: (These do not admit                and PID. (Affected sensor: Level sensor).
                                                                                                    solutions. The student must just realise it and
                                                                                                    notify it.)                                                  Reduction of an actuator response:
                                                                                                      - Actuators canals interchange at any time                 10.- In the PID, the real response of the proportional valve is
                                                                                                        during the program execution.                                  half the amount calculated by the PID control. Thus,
                                                                                                        This error does not admit any solution.                        the maximum real opening that will be able to reach is
                                                                                                      - Response reduction of an actuator.
                                                                                                        By the reduction of the output voltage in analog               50%. (Affected sensor: Flow sensor).
                                                                                                        outputs, we can get an response with                     Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls:
                                                                                                        a fraction of what it should be, either with a           11.- In the ON/OFF control, the actuation sensor of the
                                                                                                        manual execution or with any control type
                                                                                                        (ON/OFF, PID...).                                              AVS-1 is inverted, acting, thus, on the same way as the
                                                                                                    Faults in the controls execution:                                  others 2 valves (for a good control, it should operate
                                                                                                      - Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls.               the other way around to how the others 2 do it).
                                                                                                        The state of some actuator is inverted, when it                (Affected sensor: pH).
                                                                                                        should be ON            is OFF instead, and vice
                                                                                                        versa. The student should provide the correct            Reduction or increase of the calculated total response:
                                                                                                        operating logic.                                         12.- In the PID, the real action in the resistance is half of the
                                                                                                      - Reduction or increase of the calculated total                  total calculated. (Affected sensor: Temperature
                                                                                                        response.                                                      sensor).
                                                                                                        We multiply by a factor the total response
                                                                                                        calculated by the PID, provoking, thus, the              The action of some controls is annulled:
                                                                                                        reduction or increase of the action really applied       13.- The Integral control does not work. It is reduced to a PD
                                                                                                        to the actuator, and the consequent                            control (Proportional-Derivative).
                                                                                                        instability of the control. The student should notify    14.- The Derivative Control does not work. It is reduced to a
                                                                                                        it and try to calculate this factor.
                                                                                                      - The action of some controls is annulled.                       PI Control (Proportional-Integral).
                                                                                                                                                                 15.- The Integral and Derivative controls do not work. They
                                                                                                More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                                                                                catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/                       are reduced to a Proportional Control.
                                                                                                UCP .pdf

                            .
                       UCP-P Computer Controlled Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)


                                                                                                              Always included
                                                                                                               in the supply:
                                                                                                                                                      Teaching
                                                                                                                                                     Technique
                                                                                                                                                        used

                                                                                                 SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System




                                                                                                                                3              4
10.- Process Control




                                                                                                          2
                                                                                                       Control             Data        Software for:
                                                                                                    Interface Box        Acquisition   - Computer Control
                                                                                                                           Board       - Data Acquisition
                                                                                                  5 Cables and Accessories             - Data Management
                           1 Unit: UCP-P Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
                                        .                                                         6 Manuals

                                                                                                   OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL




                                                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                                                                   Items supplied as standard                                                         1.- Calculating the fluid flow in function
                       1        .
                         UCP-P Unit:                                                                                                                                                       of different pressure sensor.
                          Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.                                      2.- Calibration processes.
                          Pressure sensor. Differential pressure sensor. Pneumatically Operated Control Valve. On/off valves. Pressure regulators, one
                                                                                                                                                                                      3.- Pressure sensor calibration. Study of
                          for controlling the pneumatic operated control valve and the second supplies the necessary flow and/or pressure to the circuit
                                                                                                                                                                                           the hysteresis curve.
                          that is to be adjusted. Storage tank. Pressure manometers. Flow meter. Intel/outlet valve. Diaphragm. Exhaust valve. I/P
                                                                                                                                                                                      4.- I/P converter calibration.
                          Converter.
                       2 UCP-P/CIB. Control Interface Box :
                                                                                                                                                                                      5.- Identification of the pneumatic valve
                          With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous                                             type.
                          visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real                                 6.- Determination of the influence of the
                          time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered                                          flow rate of the conduction.
                          signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the                                7.- Pressure control in conduction using
                          PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,                                           a PID controller.
                          of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, other electronic in control interface, and                                  8.- Proportional control (P)characteristics.
                          the third one in the control software.                                                                                                                      9.- Characteristics of a proportional
                       3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:                                                                                                                                      and integral control (P+I).
                          PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:                                     10.- Characteristics of a proportional
                          250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.                                                                                                           and derivative control (P+D).
                       4 UCP-P/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
                                                                                                                                                                                      11.- Optimization of the variables of a
                          Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
                                                                                                                                                                                           PID controller.
                          to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real
                                                                                                                                                                                      12.-Optimization of the variables of the
                          time.
                       5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
                                                                                                                                                                                          PID controller, flow control.
                       6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
                                                                                                                                                                                      13- Flow rate control in conduction with
                                                                                                                                                                                           a PID controller.
                       Dimensions (approx.)=Unit: 600x500x1000 mm. Weight: 15Kg.             Control Interface: 490x330x175 mm. Weight: 15 Kg.
                                                                                                                                                                                      14-32.- Practices with PLC.
                       More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP-P.pdf

                                                                                                                                                   Page 64
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals                              (continuation)

 CECI. Industrial Controllers Trainer
                                                               SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                              PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                        Trainer for industrial process controllers. This trainer allows students the
                                        study and familiarisation with the function and operation of a industrial           To study methods and terminology of
                                        process controller.                                                                 process control:
                                        Steel box.                                                                           1.-Closed loop control.
                                        Configurable digital controller:
                                             2 inputs, 1 output. Configurable as P, PI or PID controller.                    2.-Static and dynamic transfer function.
                                             Proportional gain Xp: 0 -999.9%. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s.              3.-To study the step response.
                                             Derivative time Tv: 0-1200s. RS232 interface for configuration on               4.-Reference variable step.
                                             computer (PC).
                                        Digital voltmeter: 0 -20V.                                                          To learn and to familiarise with a process
                                        Signal generator with potentiometer. Reference variables generator: 2               controller:
                                        voltages selectable. Output voltage: 0-10V.                                          5.-Configuration level.
                                        Controlled system simulator:
                                             Controlled system type: First order lag . Time constant: 20s. Process           6.-Parameter level.
                                             variables as analogue signals: 0-10V. System gain: 1...10.                      7.-Operation control levels.
                                        All variables accessible as analog signals at lab jacks .                           Control parameters:
                                        Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for
                                        example:line recorder, plotter, oscilloscope...).                                    8.-Setting input channels.
                                        Configuration software CD. Interface cable. Set of lab cables.                       9.-Setting output channels.
                                        Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                      10.-To use computer (PC) - based
                                        Dimensions (approx.)= 490x330x310 mm.              Weight : 8 Kg.                        configuration tools.
                                        More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/                         11.- Scaling displays.
                                        units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CECI.pdf

 CRCI. Industrial Controllers Networking
                                                               SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                              PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                        This trainer enables to take the first steps in process automation using field
                                        buses. This trainer demonstrates the operation of a process control system           1.- Function of a digital industrial
                                        based on a simple application.                                                           controller.
                                        This trainer allows student the familiarisation with the function and operation      2.- Layout of a field bus system.
                                        of a industrial process controller.                                                  To learn and to familiarise with the
                                        Steel box.                                                                           operation and structure of a process
                                        2 Digital process controllers, with field bus interface:                             control system under Profibus DP:
                                                               ,
                                            Configurable as P PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp : 0-999.9%.         3.- Controller parameter setting via field
                                            Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s.                    bus system.
                                            Controller parameter setting via field bus system.
                                        2 Signal generators: 0-10V. Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC).            4.- Profibus DP field bus system.
                                        Process variables as analog signals: 0-10V. All variables accessible as              5.- OPC (OLE for Process Control)
                                        analog signals at lab jacks .                                                            server function.
                                        Software CD with driver software, OPC server and process control software.           6.- Online controller parameters
                                        Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example:            setting.
                                        line recorder, oscilloscope, etc).                                                   7.- Master / slave assignment.
                                        Set of cables.                                                                       8.- To configure and display alarms.
                                        Manuals:This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                        9.- Reading control variables and
                                        Dimensions (approx.)=490x330x310 mm.                 Weight : 12 Kg.
                                                                                                                                 displaying them online.
                                        More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/                         10.- Scaling displays.
                                        units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CRCI.pdf                                          11.- Bus configuration.

 CEAB. Trainer for Field Bus Application
                                                              SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                              PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                        This Trainer is used to teach the initial or first steps in field bus tecnology
                                        based on Profibus DP   .                                                             1.- Operation and function of a digital
                                        The field bus permits networking terminal devices (controllers, actuators or             industrial controller.
                                        sensors) in the plant system (field level) with the control room (control level).
                                        Several devices (slaves) are activated and read by a computer (PC) with a            2.- Function of an analog input/outputs
                                        Profibus DP interface (master).                                                          module.
                                        Different subjects or topics can be covered and studied: bus topology,               3.- Function of a digital input/output
                                        system configurator with Device Master File “DMF”, communication
                                        protocols, tags, OPC server, output and input process data, etc.                         module.
                                        Steel box.                                                                           4.- Layout of a field bus system.
                                        Digital process controller, with Profibus DP interface:                              5.- Familiarisation with the field bus
                                                               ,
                                           Configurable as P PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp:0-999.9%.
                                           Derivative time Tv:0-1200s. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s.                         stations.
                                        Signal generators: 0-10V. Digital voltmeter: 0-20V.                                  6.- Defining the bus technology with the




                                                                                                                                                                          10.- Process Control
                                        Digital Profibus DP I module. Digital Profibus DP O module. Four digital                 stations.
                                        inputs. Four digital outputs.
                                        Analog Profibus DP I module. Analog Profibus DP O module. Four analog                7.- Reading out and in, and online
                                        inputs: 0-10V. Two analog outputs: 0-10V.                                                displaying of analog and digital
                                        Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC).                                            process variables.
                                        Process variables as analog signals at lab jacks: 0-10V.
                                        Software CD with driver software, system configurator, OPC server and                8.- Communication protocols.
                                        process control software.                                                            9.- To define tags.
                                        Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example:       10.- Familiarisation with the device
                                        chart recorder, oscilloscope, etc).
                                        Set of cables.                                                                           master file “DMF”.
                                        Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                      11.- OPC server.
                                        Dimensions (approx.)= 490x330x310 mm.                Weight : 12 Kg.                12.- Access to the OPC database from
                                        More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/                              the process control program.
                                        units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CEAB.pdf

 CEAC. Controller Tuning Trainer
                                                               SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
                                                                                                                                  PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                        Trainer for controller tuning.This unit permits the interaction between
                                        controller and controlled system. The objective is that the closed control           1.- To use commonly applied tuning
                                        loop, formed by the controller and the controlled system, to show the desired
                                        optimum response.                                                                        rules, such as Ziegler-Nichols.
                                        With a simulation software the setting of controller parameters can be               2.- To study the difference between
                                        practised safely. Closed an open loop control, step response, stability,                 open and closed loop control.
                                        disturbance and control response are demonstrated.                                   3.- Control loop comprising controller
                                        This trainer no needs real controlled systems, the controlled system is                  and controlled system.
                                        simulated on a computer (PC) by the simulation program. In this program
                                        the most important types of controlled systems can be selected . We can              4.- To determine the system parameters.
                                        recorder and analyse the time response using the software.                           5.- Closed-loop control system
                                        The process controller used can be easily configured from the computer                   response.
                                        (PC).The controller and the computer (PC) are connected by a data                    6.- Choice of optimum controller
                                        acquisition card with AD and DA converters.
                                        Steel box.                                                                               parameters.
                                        Configurable digital process controller, with interface:                             7.- Stability, steady state and transient
                                                               ,
                                            Configurable as P PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp: 0-999.9%.              response.
                                            Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s.                8.- Study and investigation of control
                                        Interface for computer (PC). Data acquisition card for computer (PC).                    and disturbance response.
                                        Simulation Software for controlled system models, such as 1st and 2nd order
                                        lags, time-delayed systems etc. Controlled system simulation models with             9.- Study of the stability of the closed
                                        proportional, integral, 1st order lag, 2nd order lag, time-delayed response,             control loop.
                                        non-linearity and limitation.                                                       10.- Learning methods and terminology
                                        Configuration software for process controller. Recording and evaluation of               involved in process control.
                                        time response on computer (PC).                                                     11.- To adapt the process controller to
                                        Set of cables.
                                        Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                           different controlled systems.
                                        Dimensions (approx.)= 330x330x145 mm. Weight : 5 Kg.                                12.- Use and practices with the
                                        More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/                              simulation software.
                                        units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CEAC.pdf
                                                                        Page 65                                                                     www.edibon.com
                                                                                   issue:01/11



                                        PLC´s MODULE

 Ref: 1010/PLC                                                                         1 / 1

 ITEM           REFERENCE                         DESCRIPTION                    QTY.
   1      PLC-PI                  PLC MODULE                                       1
          UCP/PLC-SOF             PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL         1
                                  UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
                                  LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
                                  TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
   2      1010PARTS               COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                       1
   3      1010PA                  COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
   4      1010IYPM                INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP                     1
   5      1010CAPRO               TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
   6      1010TD                  TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
   7      1010MANU                DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
Notes:

1) Multipost option:
     This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
     number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
       a) Technical conditions included:

            -    Laboratories adaptation.
            -    Installation of all units supplied.
            -    Starting up for all units.
            -    Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
            - Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
            the teaching techniques uses.
            - Technology transfer.
       b) Commercial conditions:
            - Packing.
            - Financing charges.
            - C.I.F. charges.
       c) Others conditions:
            - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:

                   .   Required services manual.
                   .   Assembly and installation manual.
                   .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                   .   Set in operation manual.
                   .   Safety norms manual.
                   .   Practices manual.
                   .   Maintenance manual.
                   . Calibration manual.




            See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
 PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
                                                                                                   Always included
                                                                                                    in the supply:




                                                                                                          2
                                                                                          PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
                                                                                              each particular EDIBON
                                                                                             Computerized Teaching Unit



     1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
           (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                           PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                                             Items supplied as standard
 1 PLC-PI Unit:                                                                                                               1.- Control of theparticular unit       9.- PLC process application for the
                                                                                                                                  process through the control              particular unit.
     This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a                                     interface box without the           10.- PLC structure.
     simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,                                          computer.                           11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
     additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the                                    2.- PID control.                             configuration.
     proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON                                               3.- Visualization of all the sensors    12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
     Computerized Teaching Unit).                                                                                                 values used in the particular       13.- PLC program languages.
     Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.                                                                               unit process.                       14.- PLC different programming
     Front panel:                                                                                                             4.- Calibration of all sensors               standard languages (ladder
        Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.                                   included in the particular unit          diagram (LD), structured text
                                                                                                                                  process.                                 (ST), instructions list (IL),
        Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.                                        5.- Hand on of all the actuators             sequential function chart
        Touch screen.                                                                                                             involved in the particular unit          (SFC), function block diagram
      Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC                                                         process.                                 (FBD)).
      Inside:                                                                                                                 6.- Realization of different            15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
        Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.                                                           experiments, in automatic way,           development of new process.
        Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program                                              without having in front the         16.- Hand on an established process.
                                                                                                                                  particular unit. (These             17.- To visualize and see the results
        capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.                                           experiments can be decided
        Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.                                                       previously).                             and to make comparisons with
                                                                                                                                                                           the particular unit process.
      Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).                                                                             7.- Simulation of outside actions,      18.- Possibility of creating new
 2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:                                                                                                 in the cases do not exist                process in relation with the
    For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.                                                                        hardware elements. (Example:             particular unit.
 3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
                                                                                                                                  test of complementary tanks,        19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
                                                                                                                                  complementary i n d u s t r i a l
 4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                                                                 environment to the process to       20.- Own PLC applications in
 Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.          Weight: 30 Kg.                                                          be studied, etc).                        accordance with teacher and
                                                                                                                              8.- PLC hardware general use.                student requirements.
 More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
 automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf

 PLCE. PLC Trainer
                                                                                              Always included
                                                                                               in the supply:




                                                                                                                                                                                                                   6.- Systems & Automatics
                                                                                          2                     3
                                                                                         PLC                PLCE
                                                                                     Programming         Touch Screen
                                                                                       Software      Programming Software

                           1   Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer

                                                              SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                  PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                             Items supplied as standard                                       Using the PLC Programing Software:
 1  PLCE. Unit:
     This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple                            1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
     and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,                                                  The programs can be written in several programming languages:
     additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.                                                                            Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
                                                                                                                                        Sequential function chart. (SFC).
     Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.                                                                                     Function block diagram. (FBD).
     Front panel:                                                                                                             2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
         Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push                                  3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
        button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of                                  4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
        the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital                               5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
        outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass                                          6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
        connections (GND). Touch screen.                                                                                           established in a variable.
     Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).                                          7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
     Inside:                                                                                                                  8.- How to use analog inputs.
         Power supply 100... 240V (AC).                                                                                       9.- How to use analog outputs.
         Panasonic PLC:                                                                                                       10.- Use of temporizers.
           High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32                                       11.- Logic functions implementation.
           Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.                               12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
         Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.                                                  13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
     Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.                                                       14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
  2 PLC Programming Software:                                                                                                 15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
     Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages                                          16.- Functions library.
     can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential                               17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
     function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,                                    18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
     programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,                                        * Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
     function blocks, inputs/outputs...                                                                                       Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
     Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal                                 19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
     relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,                            20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
     file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC                                      21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
     addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software                                         words).
     provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions                                  22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
     Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse                                   23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
     of programs is easy.                                                                                                     24.- Switching from one screen to another.
  3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:                                                                                   * Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
     Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy                                Other practical possibilities:
     Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps                                   -It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
     Editor.                                                                                                                       causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
    Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.                                                                                  happens in the outputs.
 4                                                                                                                                -It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
 5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
                                                                                                                                   transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
 Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.                                                                     (for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
 More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/                                                                 output, (for example: a pump).
 automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
                                                                                                                Page 85                                                                     www.edibon.com
                                                                              issue:01/11



                            PROCESS CONTROL.MEDIUM MODULE

Ref: 1011                                                                         1 / 3

ITEM            REFERENCE                      DESCRIPTION                  QTY.
  1         UCP-P             PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF           1
                              PRESSURE (AIR), COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED
                              BY:
            UCP-P.Unit        PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF           1
                              PRESSURE (AIR)
            UCP-P/CIB         CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PROCESS CONTROL       1
                              UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF PRESSURE (AIR)
            DAB               DATA ACQUISITION BOARD                          1
            UCP-P/CCSOF       COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA      1
                              MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
                              UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF PRESSURE (AIR)
  2         UCP-P/CAL         COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR            1
                              PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
                              PRESSURE (AIR) (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
                              ANALYSIS)
  3         UCPCN             COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM      1
                              (WITH PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
                              CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
                              PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
                              SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
            UCPCN-UB          BASE UNIT (COMMON FOR ALLA SETS FOR CONTROL     1
                              TYPE "UCPCN"
            UCPCN/CIB         CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR COMPUTER              1
                              CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH
                              PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
                              CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
                              PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
                              SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
            DAB               DATA ACQUISITION BOARD                          1
            UCPCN/CCSOF       COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA      1
                              MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR COMPUTER CONTROLLED
                              PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH PNEUMATIC
                              CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS CONTROL OF
                              TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
                              CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS,
                              FORMED BY:
            ,                 SETS (SENSOR, ELEMENTS AND COMPUTER CONTROL     1
                              SOFTWARE) USED IN BASE UNIT:
            UCPCN-T           SET FOR TEMPERATURE PROCESS CONTROL             1
            UCPCN-C           SET FOR FLOW PROCESS CONTROL                    1
            UCPCN-N           SET FOR LEVEL PROCESS CONTROL                   1
            UCPCN-PA          SET FOR WATER PRESSURE PROCESS CONTROL          1
            UCPCN-PH          SET FOR PH PROCESS CONTROL                      1
            UCPCN-CT          SET FOR CONDUCTIVITY AND TDS (TOTAL             1
                              DISSOLVED SOLIDS) PROCESS CONTROL
  4         UCPCV             COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM      1
                              (WITH SPEED CONTROLLER) FOR PROCESS CONTROL
                              OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
                              PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
                              SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
            UCPCV-UB          BASE UNIT (COMMON FOR ALL SETS FOR PROCESS      1
                              CONTROL TYPE"UCPCV"
Ref: 1011                                                                        2 / 3

ITEM            REFERENCE                   DESCRIPTION                    QTY.
  4         UCPCV/CIB       CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR COMPUTER               1
                            CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH
                            SPEED CONTROLLER) FOR PROCESS CONTROL OF
                            TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
                            CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS,
                            FORMED BY:
            DAB             DATA ACQUISITION BOARD                           1
            UCPCV/CCSOF     COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA       1
                            MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR COMPUTER CONTROLLED
                            PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH SPEED
                            CONTROLLER)FOR PROCESS CONTROL OF
                            TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
                            CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS,
                            FORMED BY:
            ,               SETS (SENSOR, ELEMENTS AND COMPUTER CONTROL      1
                            SOFTWARE) USED IN BASE UNIT:
            UCPCV-T         SET FOR TEMPERATURE PROCESS CONTROL              1
            UCPCV-C         SET FOR FLOW PROCESS CONTROL                     1
            UCPCV-N         SET FOR LEVEL PROCESS CONTROL                    1
            UCPCV-PA        SET FOR WATER PRESSURE PROCESS CONTROL           1
            UCPCV-PH        SET FOR PH PROCESS CONTROL                       1
            UCPCV-CT        SET FOR CONDUCTIVITY AND TDS (TOTAL              1
                            DISSOLVED SOLIDS) PROCESS CONTROL
  5         UCPCV/CAL       COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR             1
                            COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
                            (WITH SPEED CONTROLLER)FOR PROCESS CONTROL
                            OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
                            PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
                            SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
  6         1011PARTS       COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                       1
  7         1011PA          COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
  8         1011IYPM        INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP                     1
  9         1011CAPRO       TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
 10         1011TD          TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
 11         1011MANU        DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
 Ref: 1011                                                                  3 / 3



Notes:

1) Multipost option:
     This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
     number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
      a) Technical conditions included:

             -   Laboratories adaptation.
             -   Installation of all units supplied.
             -   Starting up for all units.
             -   Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
           - Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
           the teaching techniques uses.
           - Technology transfer.
      b) Commercial conditions:
           - Packing.
           - Financing charges.
           - C.I.F. charges.
      c) Others conditions:
             - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:

                   .   Required services manual.
                   .   Assembly and installation manual.
                   .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                   .   Set in operation manual.
                   .   Safety norms manual.
                   .   Practices manual.
                   .   Maintenance manual.
                   . Calibration manual.




             See Catalogues in next pages
                                                                                                                                               10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals                                 (continuation)

                       UCP/FSS. Faults Simulation System (Process Control Unit):
                                                                                                                         SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                                                                The "FAULTS" mode consists on provoking several faults
                                                                                                in the unit normal operation. The student must find them         Incorrect Calibration:
                                                                                                and, if possible, solve them.                                    1.- Load the calibration error of the PH sensor.
                                                                                                There are several kinds of faults that can be grouped in
                                                                                                three sections:                                                  2.- Load the calibration error of the Level sensor.
                                                                                                    Faults affecting the sensors measure:                        3.- Load the calibration error of the Flow sensor.
                                                                                                      - An incorrect calibration is applied to them.
                                                                                                        In this case, the student should proceed to              4.- Load the calibration error of the Temperature sensor.
                                                                                                        calibrate the affected sensor through the                Non Linearity:
                                                                                                        values collection.                                       5.- Non inverse linearity of the pH sensor.
                                                                                                      - Non-linearity.
                                                                                                        When we have the measures taken by the                   6.- Non quadratic linearity of the Level sensor.
                                                                                                        sensor, a quadratic or inverse function is               7.- Non quadratic linearity of the Flow sensor.
                                                                                                        applied to them. Thus, the value measured will           8.- No inverse linearity of the Temperature sensor.
                                                                                                        not be the real one, as in the case above
                                                                                                        mentioned, but when we calibrate again, the              Interchange of actuators:
                                                                                                        sensor will not operate linearly and we will not be      9.- Interchange the bombs AB-1 and AB-2 between
                                                                                                        able to calibrate it by lest squares fits.                     them during the operations of the controls ON/OFF
                                                                                                    Faults affecting the actuators: (These do not admit                and PID. (Affected sensor: Level sensor).
                                                                                                    solutions. The student must just realise it and
                                                                                                    notify it.)                                                  Reduction of an actuator response:
                                                                                                      - Actuators canals interchange at any time                 10.- In the PID, the real response of the proportional valve is
                                                                                                        during the program execution.                                  half the amount calculated by the PID control. Thus,
                                                                                                        This error does not admit any solution.                        the maximum real opening that will be able to reach is
                                                                                                      - Response reduction of an actuator.
                                                                                                        By the reduction of the output voltage in analog               50%. (Affected sensor: Flow sensor).
                                                                                                        outputs, we can get an response with                     Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls:
                                                                                                        a fraction of what it should be, either with a           11.- In the ON/OFF control, the actuation sensor of the
                                                                                                        manual execution or with any control type
                                                                                                        (ON/OFF, PID...).                                              AVS-1 is inverted, acting, thus, on the same way as the
                                                                                                    Faults in the controls execution:                                  others 2 valves (for a good control, it should operate
                                                                                                      - Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls.               the other way around to how the others 2 do it).
                                                                                                        The state of some actuator is inverted, when it                (Affected sensor: pH).
                                                                                                        should be ON            is OFF instead, and vice
                                                                                                        versa. The student should provide the correct            Reduction or increase of the calculated total response:
                                                                                                        operating logic.                                         12.- In the PID, the real action in the resistance is half of the
                                                                                                      - Reduction or increase of the calculated total                  total calculated. (Affected sensor: Temperature
                                                                                                        response.                                                      sensor).
                                                                                                        We multiply by a factor the total response
                                                                                                        calculated by the PID, provoking, thus, the              The action of some controls is annulled:
                                                                                                        reduction or increase of the action really applied       13.- The Integral control does not work. It is reduced to a PD
                                                                                                        to the actuator, and the consequent                            control (Proportional-Derivative).
                                                                                                        instability of the control. The student should notify    14.- The Derivative Control does not work. It is reduced to a
                                                                                                        it and try to calculate this factor.
                                                                                                      - The action of some controls is annulled.                       PI Control (Proportional-Integral).
                                                                                                                                                                 15.- The Integral and Derivative controls do not work. They
                                                                                                More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                                                                                catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/                       are reduced to a Proportional Control.
                                                                                                UCP .pdf

                            .
                       UCP-P Computer Controlled Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)


                                                                                                              Always included
                                                                                                               in the supply:
                                                                                                                                                      Teaching
                                                                                                                                                     Technique
                                                                                                                                                        used

                                                                                                 SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System




                                                                                                                                3              4
10.- Process Control




                                                                                                          2
                                                                                                       Control             Data        Software for:
                                                                                                    Interface Box        Acquisition   - Computer Control
                                                                                                                           Board       - Data Acquisition
                                                                                                  5 Cables and Accessories             - Data Management
                           1 Unit: UCP-P Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
                                        .                                                         6 Manuals

                                                                                                   OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL




                                                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                                                                   Items supplied as standard                                                         1.- Calculating the fluid flow in function
                       1        .
                         UCP-P Unit:                                                                                                                                                       of different pressure sensor.
                          Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.                                      2.- Calibration processes.
                          Pressure sensor. Differential pressure sensor. Pneumatically Operated Control Valve. On/off valves. Pressure regulators, one
                                                                                                                                                                                      3.- Pressure sensor calibration. Study of
                          for controlling the pneumatic operated control valve and the second supplies the necessary flow and/or pressure to the circuit
                                                                                                                                                                                           the hysteresis curve.
                          that is to be adjusted. Storage tank. Pressure manometers. Flow meter. Intel/outlet valve. Diaphragm. Exhaust valve. I/P
                                                                                                                                                                                      4.- I/P converter calibration.
                          Converter.
                       2 UCP-P/CIB. Control Interface Box :
                                                                                                                                                                                      5.- Identification of the pneumatic valve
                          With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous                                             type.
                          visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real                                 6.- Determination of the influence of the
                          time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered                                          flow rate of the conduction.
                          signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the                                7.- Pressure control in conduction using
                          PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,                                           a PID controller.
                          of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, other electronic in control interface, and                                  8.- Proportional control (P)characteristics.
                          the third one in the control software.                                                                                                                      9.- Characteristics of a proportional
                       3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:                                                                                                                                      and integral control (P+I).
                          PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:                                     10.- Characteristics of a proportional
                          250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.                                                                                                           and derivative control (P+D).
                       4 UCP-P/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
                                                                                                                                                                                      11.- Optimization of the variables of a
                          Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
                                                                                                                                                                                           PID controller.
                          to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real
                                                                                                                                                                                      12.-Optimization of the variables of the
                          time.
                       5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
                                                                                                                                                                                          PID controller, flow control.
                       6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
                                                                                                                                                                                      13- Flow rate control in conduction with
                                                                                                                                                                                           a PID controller.
                       Dimensions (approx.)=Unit: 600x500x1000 mm. Weight: 15Kg.             Control Interface: 490x330x175 mm. Weight: 15 Kg.
                                                                                                                                                                                      14-32.- Practices with PLC.
                       More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP-P.pdf

                                                                                                                                                   Page 64
                                                                                                                                10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals                                                   (continuation)

                       UCPCN. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with pneumatic control valve):


                                                                                                                                                                      Teaching
                                                                                                                                                                     Technique
                                                                                                                                                                        used

                                                                                                             SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System




                                                                                            1                          2                       3               ( )
                                                                                      UCPCN-UB.               Control Interface BoxData Acquisition Computer Control
                                                                                                                                       Board        Software for each
                                                                                       Base Unit                                                     Set for Process
                                                                                                          5 Cables and Accessories                       Control
                                                                                                          6 Manuals

                                                                                                            OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL


                                                             4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:




                           Sensor and elements    Sensor and elements         Sensor and elements          Sensor and elements          Sensor and elements           Sensor and elements
                                  +                       +                          +                           +                                 +                           +

                            Computer Control       Computer Control            Computer Control             Computer Control            Computer Control                Computer Control
                              Software for         Software for Flow           Software for Level              Software for              Software for pH             Software for Conductivity
                           Temperature Process      Process Control ( )         Process Control ( )          Pressure Process            Process Control ( )                 and TDS
                                Control ( )                                                                      Control ( )                                              Process Control ( )
                             4.1 UCPCN-T.          4.2UCPCN-C.                 4.3UCPCN-N.                 4.4 UCPCN-PA.                4.5 UCPCN-PH.              4.6 UCPCN-CT.
                           Set for Temperature        Set for Flow               Set for Level              Set for Pressure                 Set for PH            Set for Conductivity
                              Process Control       Process Control             Process Control              Process Control              Process Control        and TDS( Total Dissolved
                                                                                                                                                                  Solids)Process Control


                                                         SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                         Common items for all Process Control parameters:                                                          Temperature Process Control:
                       1 UCPCN-UB. Unit:                                                                                                            1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
                             This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with                                    2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
                             one or several sets.                                                                                                   3.- Temperature control loops (P).
                             Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that                                4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
                             the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central                                  5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
                                                                                                                                                    6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
                             dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank                                         7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
                             (2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the                                  8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
                             dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.                                  9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
                             Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and                                     Flow Process Control:
                                                                                                                                                   10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
                             with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage                                 11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
                             valves of the upper tank. Pneumatic Control Valve.                                                                    12.- Flow control loops (P).
                       2 UCPCN/CIB. Control Interface Box :                                                                                        13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
                             This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with one                                    14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
                             or several sets.                                                                                                      15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
                             With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently                                    16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
                                                                                                                                                   17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
                             computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in                               18.- Flow sensor calibration.
                             the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves                                     Level Process Control:
                             representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the                                         19.- Level control loops (Manual).
10.- Process Control




                             keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID                                  20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
                                                                                                                                                   21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
                             control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at                              22.- Level control loops (P+I).
                             any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time                                       23.- Level control loops (P+D).
                             and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in                             24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
                             the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.                                 25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                       3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
                                                                                                                                                   26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
                                                                                                                                                   27.- Level sensor calibration.
                             PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16                                   Pressure Process Control:
                             Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital                                           28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
                             Inputs/Outputs.                                                                                                       29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
                       4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:                                             30.- Pressure control loops (P).
                            (These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)                                     31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
                         4.1
                             UCPCN-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:                                                                         32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
                                                                                                                                                   33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
                                 Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level                             34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                                 switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).                                                35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
                                 Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:                                                        36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
                                (#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison                                    pH Process Control:
                                     and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows                               37.- pH control loops (Manual).
                                                                                                                                                   38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
                                     the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.                             39.- pH control loops (P).
                         4.2
                             UCPCN-C. Set for Flow Process Control:                                                                                40.- pH control loops (P+I).
                                 Turbine type flow sensor.                                                                                         41.- pH control loops (P+D).
                                Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)                                                            42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
                         4.3
                             UCPCN-N. Set for Level Process Control:                                                                               43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                                 0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).                                                           44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
                                                                                                                                                   45.- pH sensor calibration.
                                Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).                                                          Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
                         4.4 UCPCN-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
                                                                                                                                                   46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
                                Pressure sensor.                                                                                                   47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
                                Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).                                                       48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
                         4.5UCPCN-PH. Set for pH Process Control:                                                                                  49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
                                pH sensor. Helix agitator.                                                                                         50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
                                Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).                                                             51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
                         4.6 UCPCN-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
                                                                                                                                                   52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                                                                                                                                                   53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
                             Control:                                                                                                              54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
                                Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.                                                              55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
                                Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).                                            56.- TDS control loops (P).
                        5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.                                                                            57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
                        6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                                                           58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
                                                                                                                                                   59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
                       Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCN-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.                                                           60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                                                    Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.                                               61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
                       More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/                                                           62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
                       processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCN.pdf                                                                                       63-81.- Practices with PLC.
                                                                                                                                 Page 62
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals                                                               (continuation)

UCPCV. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with speed controller):

                                                                                                                                                   Teaching
                                                                                                                                                  Technique
                                                                                                                                                     used

                                                                                          SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System




                                                                  1                                2                    3                ( )
                                                                                                            Data Acquisition Computer Control
                                                                                          Control Interface Box
                                                              UCPCV-UB.                                         Board        Software for each
                                                               Base Unit           5 Cables and Accessories                   Set for Process
                                                                                                                                  Control
                                                                                   6 Manuals
                                                                                          OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL


                                      4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:




    Sensor and elements    Sensor and elements         Sensor and elements          Sensor and elements           Sensor and elements           Sensor and elements
           +                       +                          +                             +                           +                                +

     Computer Control       Computer Control            Computer Control             Computer Control             Computer Control                Computer Control
       Software for         Software for Flow           Software for Level              Software for               Software for pH             Software for Conductivity
    Temperature Process      Process Control ( )         Process Control ( )          Pressure Process             Process Control ( )                 and TDS
         Control ( )                                                                      Control ( )                                               Process Control ( )
     4.1 UCPCV-T.          4.2  UCPCV-C.                4.3UCPCV-N.                 4.4UCPCV-PA.                  4.5UCPCV-PH.               4.6 UCPCV-CT.
   Set for Temperature         Set for Flow               Set for Level              Set for Pressure                 Set for PH             Set for Conductivity
      Process Control        Process Control             Process Control             Process Control               Process Control         and TDS( Total Dissolved
                                                                                                                                            Solids)Process Control


                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                                                      PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                   Common items for all Process Control parameters:                                                         Temperature Process Control:
 1 UCPCV-UB. Unit:                                                                                                           1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
       This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with                                   2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
       one or several sets.                                                                                                  3.- Temperature control loops (P).
       Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that                               4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
       the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central                                 5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
                                                                                                                             6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
       dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank                                        7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
       (2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the                                 8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
       dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.                                 9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
       Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and                                    Flow Process Control:
       with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage                                10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
       valves of the upper tank. Speed controller (into the Control Interface Box).                                         11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
                                                                                                                            12.- Flow control loops (P).
 2 UCPCV/CIB. Control Interface Box :                                                                                       13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
       This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with one                                   14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
       or several sets.                                                                                                     15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
       With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently                                   16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
       computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in                              17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
       the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves                                    18.- Flow sensor calibration.
                                                                                                                            Level Process Control:
       representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the                                        19.- Level control loops (Manual).
       keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID                                 20.- Level control loops (On/Off).




                                                                                                                                                                                                                 10.- Process Control
       control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at                             21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
       any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time                                      22.- Level control loops (P+I).
       and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in                            23.- Level control loops (P+D).
       the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.                                24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
 3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:                                                                                             25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                                                                                                                            26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
       PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16                                  27.- Level sensor calibration.
       Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital                                          Pressure Process Control:
       Inputs/Outputs.                                                                                                      28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
 4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:                                            29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
       (These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)                                   30.- Pressure control loops (P).
                                                                                                                            31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
   4.1
       UCPCV-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:                                                                        32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
           Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level                            33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
           switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).                                               34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
           Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:                                                       35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
          (#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison                                   36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
               and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows                              pH Process Control:
                                                                                                                            37.- pH control loops (Manual).
               the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.                            38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
   4.2
       UCPCV-C. Set for Flow Process Control:                                                                               39.- pH control loops (P).
          Turbine type flow sensor.                                                                                         40.- pH control loops (P+I).
          Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)                                                           41.- pH control loops (P+D).
   4.3
       UCPCV-N. Set for Level Process Control:                                                                              42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
                                                                                                                            43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
          0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).                                                           44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
          Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).                                                         45.- pH sensor calibration.
   4.4
       UCPCV-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:                                                                          Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
          Pressure sensor.                                                                                                  46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
          Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).                                                      47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
   4.5 UCPCV-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
                                                                                                                            48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
                                                                                                                            49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
          pH sensor. Helix agitator.                                                                                        50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
          Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).                                                            51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
   4.6
       UCPCV-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process                                              52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
       Control:                                                                                                             53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
                                                                                                                            54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
          Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.                                                             55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
          Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).                                           56.- TDS control loops (P).
  5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.                                                                           57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
  6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                                                          58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
 Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCV-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.                                                          59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
                                                                                                                            60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
                              Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.                                              61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
                                                                                                                            62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/                                                           63-81.- Practices with PLC.
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCV.pdf

                                                                                                            Page 63                                                                        www.edibon.com
                                                                          issue:01/11



                               PLC´s MODULE

Ref: 1011/PLC                                                                 1 / 2

ITEM        REFERENCE                    DESCRIPTION                    QTY.
  1      PLC-PI          PLC MODULE                                       1
         UCP-P/PLC-SOF   PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL         1
                         UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF PRESSURE (AIR)
  2      PLC-PI          PLC MODULE                                       1
         UCPCN/PLC-SOF   PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR COMPUTER                1
                         CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH
                         PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
                         CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
                         PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
                         SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
  3      PLC-PI          PLC MODULE                                       1
         UCPCV/PLC-SOF   PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR COMPUTER                1
                         CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH
                         SPEED CONTROLLER) FOR PROCESS CONTROL OF
                         TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
                         CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS,
                         FORMED BY:
  4      1011PARTS       COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                       1
  5      1011PA          COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
  6      1011IYPM        INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP                     1
  7      1011CAPRO       TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
  8      1011TD          TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
  9      1011MANU        DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
 Ref: 1011/PLC                                                              2 / 2



Notes:

1) Multipost option:
     This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
     number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
     a) Technical conditions included:

            -    Laboratories adaptation.
            -    Installation of all units supplied.
            -    Starting up for all units.
            -    Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
          - Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
          the teaching techniques uses.
          - Technology transfer.
     b) Commercial conditions:
          - Packing.
          - Financing charges.
          - C.I.F. charges.
     c) Others conditions:
            - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:

                   .   Required services manual.
                   .   Assembly and installation manual.
                   .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                   .   Set in operation manual.
                   .   Safety norms manual.
                   .   Practices manual.
                   .   Maintenance manual.
                   . Calibration manual.




            See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
 PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
                                                                                                   Always included
                                                                                                    in the supply:




                                                                                                          2
                                                                                          PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
                                                                                              each particular EDIBON
                                                                                             Computerized Teaching Unit



     1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
           (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                           PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                                             Items supplied as standard
 1 PLC-PI Unit:                                                                                                               1.- Control of theparticular unit       9.- PLC process application for the
                                                                                                                                  process through the control              particular unit.
     This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a                                     interface box without the           10.- PLC structure.
     simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,                                          computer.                           11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
     additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the                                    2.- PID control.                             configuration.
     proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON                                               3.- Visualization of all the sensors    12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
     Computerized Teaching Unit).                                                                                                 values used in the particular       13.- PLC program languages.
     Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.                                                                               unit process.                       14.- PLC different programming
     Front panel:                                                                                                             4.- Calibration of all sensors               standard languages (ladder
        Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.                                   included in the particular unit          diagram (LD), structured text
                                                                                                                                  process.                                 (ST), instructions list (IL),
        Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.                                        5.- Hand on of all the actuators             sequential function chart
        Touch screen.                                                                                                             involved in the particular unit          (SFC), function block diagram
      Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC                                                         process.                                 (FBD)).
      Inside:                                                                                                                 6.- Realization of different            15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
        Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.                                                           experiments, in automatic way,           development of new process.
        Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program                                              without having in front the         16.- Hand on an established process.
                                                                                                                                  particular unit. (These             17.- To visualize and see the results
        capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.                                           experiments can be decided
        Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.                                                       previously).                             and to make comparisons with
                                                                                                                                                                           the particular unit process.
      Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).                                                                             7.- Simulation of outside actions,      18.- Possibility of creating new
 2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:                                                                                                 in the cases do not exist                process in relation with the
    For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.                                                                        hardware elements. (Example:             particular unit.
 3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
                                                                                                                                  test of complementary tanks,        19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
                                                                                                                                  complementary i n d u s t r i a l
 4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                                                                 environment to the process to       20.- Own PLC applications in
 Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.          Weight: 30 Kg.                                                          be studied, etc).                        accordance with teacher and
                                                                                                                              8.- PLC hardware general use.                student requirements.
 More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
 automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf

 PLCE. PLC Trainer
                                                                                              Always included
                                                                                               in the supply:




                                                                                                                                                                                                                   6.- Systems & Automatics
                                                                                          2                     3
                                                                                         PLC                PLCE
                                                                                     Programming         Touch Screen
                                                                                       Software      Programming Software

                           1   Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer

                                                              SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                  PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                             Items supplied as standard                                       Using the PLC Programing Software:
 1  PLCE. Unit:
     This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple                            1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
     and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,                                                  The programs can be written in several programming languages:
     additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.                                                                            Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
                                                                                                                                        Sequential function chart. (SFC).
     Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.                                                                                     Function block diagram. (FBD).
     Front panel:                                                                                                             2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
         Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push                                  3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
        button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of                                  4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
        the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital                               5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
        outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass                                          6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
        connections (GND). Touch screen.                                                                                           established in a variable.
     Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).                                          7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
     Inside:                                                                                                                  8.- How to use analog inputs.
         Power supply 100... 240V (AC).                                                                                       9.- How to use analog outputs.
         Panasonic PLC:                                                                                                       10.- Use of temporizers.
           High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32                                       11.- Logic functions implementation.
           Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.                               12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
         Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.                                                  13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
     Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.                                                       14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
  2 PLC Programming Software:                                                                                                 15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
     Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages                                          16.- Functions library.
     can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential                               17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
     function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,                                    18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
     programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,                                        * Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
     function blocks, inputs/outputs...                                                                                       Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
     Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal                                 19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
     relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,                            20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
     file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC                                      21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
     addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software                                         words).
     provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions                                  22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
     Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse                                   23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
     of programs is easy.                                                                                                     24.- Switching from one screen to another.
  3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:                                                                                   * Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
     Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy                                Other practical possibilities:
     Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps                                   -It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
     Editor.                                                                                                                       causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
    Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.                                                                                  happens in the outputs.
 4                                                                                                                                -It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
 5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
                                                                                                                                   transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
 Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.                                                                     (for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
 More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/                                                                 output, (for example: a pump).
 automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
                                                                                                                Page 85                                                                     www.edibon.com
                                                                           issue:01/11



                          INDUSTRIAL PROCESS MODULE

Ref: 1020                                                                      1 / 2

ITEM          REFERENCE                    DESCRIPTION                   QTY.
  1         CPIC          PROCESS CONTROL PLANT WITH INDUSTRIAL            1
                          INSTRUMENTATION AND SERVICE MODULE,
                          COMPUTER CONTROLLED (FLOW, TEMPERATURE,
                          LEVEL AND PRESSURE). FORMED BY:
            CPIC.Unit     PROCESS CONTROL PLANT WITH INDUSTRIAL            1
                          INSTRUMENTATION AND SERVICE MODULE
            CPIC/CIB      CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PROCESS CONTROL        1
                          PLANT WITH INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION AND
                          SERVICE MODULE (FLOW, TEMPERATURE, LEVEL
                          AND PRESSURE)
            DAB           DATA ACQUISITION BOARD                           1
            CPIC/CCSOF    COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA       1
                          MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
                          PLANT WITH INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION AND
                          SERVICE MODULE (FLOW, TEMPERATURE, LEVEL
                          AND PRESSURE)
  2         CPIC/CAL      COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR             1
                          PROCESS CONTROL PLANT (RESULTS CALCULATION
                          AND ANALYSIS)
  3         SCD           DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM                       1
  4         1020PARTS     COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                       1
  5         1020PA        COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
  6         1020IYPM      INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP                     1
  7         1020CAPRO     TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
  8         1020MANU      DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
  9         1020TD        TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
 Ref: 1020                                                                  2 / 2



Notes:

1) Multipost option:
     This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
     number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
      a) Technical conditions included:

             -   Laboratories adaptation.
             -   Installation of all units supplied.
             -   Starting up for all units.
             -   Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
           - Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
           the teaching techniques uses.
           - Technology transfer.
      b) Commercial conditions:
           - Packing.
           - Financing charges.
           - C.I.F. charges.
      c) Others conditions:
             - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:

                   .   Required services manual.
                   .   Assembly and installation manual.
                   .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                   .   Set in operation manual.
                   .   Safety norms manual.
                   .   Practices manual.
                   .   Maintenance manual.
                   . Calibration manual.




             See Catalogues in next pages
                                                                                                                                                                          10.2- Industrial Process Control
                        CPIC. Computer Controlled Process Control Plant with Industrial Instrumentation and Service Module
                              (Flow, Temperature, Level and Pressure)


                                                                                                                        Always included
                                    Main Unit                                                                            in the supply:

                                                                                                                                                               Teaching
                                                                                                                                                              Technique
                                Service Module                                                                                                                   used
                                                                                                         SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System




                                                                                                              2                     3               4
                                                                                                           Control                 Data      Software for:
                                                                                                        Interface Box            Acquisition - Computer Control
                                                                                                                                   Board     - Data Acquisition
                                                                                                                                             - Data Management

                                                                                                      5 Cables and Accessories
                                                                                                      6 Manuals

                          1   Unit: CPIC. Process Control Plant with Industrial Instrumentation and    OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
                                    Service Module. (Flow, Temperature, Level and Pressure).




                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                                      PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                                    Items supplied as standard
                         1CPIC. Unit:                                                                                                     1.- Familiarisation with the different            29.- Level control loop (P+D).
                           Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar                                               components of the system and                 30.- Level control loop (P+I+D).
                           distribution that the elements in the real unit. Main metallic elements in                                          their symbolic representation.               31.- Adjust of level controller constants
                                                                                                                                               Identification of components and                  (minimum area or reduction rate).
                           stainless steel.
                                                                                                                                               description of their functions.              32.- Adjust of level controller constants
                           Main Unit contains the following elements:
                                                                                                                                          2.- The auxiliary systems: air and hot                 (minimum disturbance criterion).
                             2 pneumatics valves with Cv : 0.25. I/P actuator of 0.2 to 1.0 bar
                                                                                                                                               water supply.                                33.- Adjust of level controller constants
                             for one electric signal of 4 to 20 mA. 2 motorised valves with                                               3.- Flow Sensors calibration.                          (minimum width criterion)
                             2000N. 12 solenoid valves, normally closed. 2 solenoid                                                       4.- Temperature sensors calibration.              34.- Search of simple shortcomings in level
                             valves, normally opened.                                                                                     5.- Level sensors calibration.                         control loop.
                             3 differential pressure sensors; 2 of them with range of 0-1000 mm                                           6.- Pressure sensors calibration.                 35.- Pressure control loop (on/off).
                             H2O,      and the other one with 0-10 bar. 5 temperature sensors.                                            7.- Flow control loop (on/off).                   36.- Pressure control loop (proportional).
                             1 level sensor. 4 level switches. 1 water pump, with 7 bar of                                                8.- Flow control loop (proportional).             37.- Pressure control loop (P+I).
                             maximum pressure and 106 l/min. of maximum water flow.                                                       9.- Flow control loop (P+I).                      38.- Pressure control loop (P+D).
                           Service Module contains the following elements:                                                                10. Flow control loop (P+D).                      39.- Pressure control loop (P+I+D).
                             Compressor unit with 10 bar as maximum pressure. Water heater with                                           11.- Flow control loop (P+I+D).                   40.- Adjust of pressure controller constants
                             80 l. as maximum capacity. Electrical resistance of 1.2 KW. Water                                            12.- Adjust of flow controller constants               (minimum area or reduction rate).
                             supply system: Water tank with capacity for 400 litres, water pump with                                           (Ziegler-Nichols).                           41.- Adjust of pressure controller constants
                             3.0 bar and 2500 l/h.                                                                                        13.- Adjust of flow controller constants               (minimum disturbance criterion).
                        2 CPIC/CIB. Control Interface Box :                                                                                    (reaction curves).                           42.- Adjust of pressure controller constants
                           With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are                                         14.- Search of simple shortcomings in the              (minimum width criterion).
                           permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of                                            loop of flow control.                        43.- Search of simple shortcomings in the
                           all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in                                 15.- Temperature control loop (on/off).                pressure control loop.
                           the process. Real time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can                                    16.- Tem p e r a t u r e c o n t r o l l o o p    44.- The use of the controllers in cascade,
                           be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to                                            (proportional).                                   exemplified with the level/flow control
                           avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of                                        17.- Temperature control loop (P+I).                   loop.
                           modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at any moment                                        18.- Temperature control loop (P+D).              45.- Adjust of cascade control constants
10.- Process Control




                           during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and                                       19.- Te m p e r a t u r e c o n t r o l l o o p        (minimum area or reduction rate).
                           in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels:                                             (P+I+D).                                     46.- Adjust of cascade control constants
                           mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface and the third one in the                               20.- Adjust of temperature controller                  (minimum disturbance criterion).
                           control software.                                                                                                   constants (minimum area or                   47.- Adjust of cascade control constants
                                                                                                                                               reduction rate).                                  (minimum width criterion).
                        3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
                                                                                                                                          21.- Adjust of temperature controller             48.- Search of simple shortcomings in
                           PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a
                                                                                                                                               constants (minimum disturbance                    cascade control loop.
                           computer slot. 16 analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog
                                                                                                                                               criterion ).                                 49.- Practical operation of the control plant
                           outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
                                                                                                                                          22.- Adjust of temperature controller                  to some wanted specific values:
                        4 C P I C / C C S O F. C o m p u t e r C o n t r o l + D a t a A c q u i s i t i o n + D a t a
                                                                                                                                               constants (minimum width                          transfers without interferences.
                                               Management Software:                                                                            criterion).                                  50.- Starting-up and operation of the plant
                           Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,                                              23.- S t u d y o f t h e r e t a r d s f o r           WITHOUT supervision.
                           comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000                                                     speed/distance, exemplified                  51-69.- Practices with PLC.
                           data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state                                                     through the temperature control
                          and the graphic representation in real time.                                                                         loop.
                        5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.                                                                   24.- Study of the energy lost in the
                        6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                                                       temperature control loop.
                        Dimensions (approx.)=                                                                                             25.- Search of simple shortcomings in
                                  -Main Unit:          5000x1500x2500 mm.               Weight:1000 Kg.                                        temperature control loop.
                                  -Service Module: 2000x1500x2000 mm.                   Weight:200 Kg.                                    26.- Level control loop (on/off).
                                  -Control Interface: 490x450x470 mm.                   Weight: 20 Kg.                                    27.- Level control loop (proportional).
                                                                                                                                          28.- Level control loop (P+I).
                        More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
                        processcontrol/industrial/CPIC.pdf

                                                                                                                                 Other available units
                       CPIC-C. Computer Controlled Process Control Plant with Industrial Instrumentation and Service Module (only Flow).

                       CPIC-T.       Computer Controlled Process Control Plant with Industrial Instrumentation and Service Module (only Temperature).

                       CPIC-N. Computer Controlled Process Control Plant with Industrial Instrumentation and Service Module (only Level).

                       CPIC-P.       Computer Controlled Process Control Plant with Industrial Instrumentation and Service Module (only Pressure).


                                                                                                                                        Page 66
                                                                                   issue:01/11



                                        PLC´s MODULE

 Ref: 1020/PLC                                                                         1 / 1

 ITEM           REFERENCE                         DESCRIPTION                    QTY.
   1      PLC-PI                  PLC MODULE                                       1
          CPIC/PLC-SOF            PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR FOR PROCESS             1
                                  CONTROL PLANT WITH INDUSTRIAL
                                  INSTRUMENTATION AND SERVICE MODULE (FLOW,
                                  TEMPERATURE, LEVEL AND PRESSURE).
   2      1020PARTS               COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                       1
   3      1020PA                  COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
   4      1020IYPM                INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP                     1
   5      1020CAPRO               TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
   6      1020MANU                DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
   7      1020TD                  TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
Notes:

1) Multipost option:
     This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
     number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
       a) Technical conditions included:

            -    Laboratories adaptation.
            -    Installation of all units supplied.
            -    Starting up for all units.
            -    Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
            - Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
            the teaching techniques uses.
            - Technology transfer.
       b) Commercial conditions:
            - Packing.
            - Financing charges.
            - C.I.F. charges.
       c) Others conditions:
            - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:

                   .   Required services manual.
                   .   Assembly and installation manual.
                   .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                   .   Set in operation manual.
                   .   Safety norms manual.
                   .   Practices manual.
                   .   Maintenance manual.
                   . Calibration manual.




            See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
 PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
                                                                                                   Always included
                                                                                                    in the supply:




                                                                                                          2
                                                                                          PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
                                                                                              each particular EDIBON
                                                                                             Computerized Teaching Unit



     1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
           (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                           PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                                             Items supplied as standard
 1 PLC-PI Unit:                                                                                                               1.- Control of theparticular unit       9.- PLC process application for the
                                                                                                                                  process through the control              particular unit.
     This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a                                     interface box without the           10.- PLC structure.
     simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,                                          computer.                           11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
     additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the                                    2.- PID control.                             configuration.
     proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON                                               3.- Visualization of all the sensors    12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
     Computerized Teaching Unit).                                                                                                 values used in the particular       13.- PLC program languages.
     Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.                                                                               unit process.                       14.- PLC different programming
     Front panel:                                                                                                             4.- Calibration of all sensors               standard languages (ladder
        Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.                                   included in the particular unit          diagram (LD), structured text
                                                                                                                                  process.                                 (ST), instructions list (IL),
        Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.                                        5.- Hand on of all the actuators             sequential function chart
        Touch screen.                                                                                                             involved in the particular unit          (SFC), function block diagram
      Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC                                                         process.                                 (FBD)).
      Inside:                                                                                                                 6.- Realization of different            15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
        Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.                                                           experiments, in automatic way,           development of new process.
        Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program                                              without having in front the         16.- Hand on an established process.
                                                                                                                                  particular unit. (These             17.- To visualize and see the results
        capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.                                           experiments can be decided
        Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.                                                       previously).                             and to make comparisons with
                                                                                                                                                                           the particular unit process.
      Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).                                                                             7.- Simulation of outside actions,      18.- Possibility of creating new
 2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:                                                                                                 in the cases do not exist                process in relation with the
    For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.                                                                        hardware elements. (Example:             particular unit.
 3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
                                                                                                                                  test of complementary tanks,        19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
                                                                                                                                  complementary i n d u s t r i a l
 4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                                                                 environment to the process to       20.- Own PLC applications in
 Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.          Weight: 30 Kg.                                                          be studied, etc).                        accordance with teacher and
                                                                                                                              8.- PLC hardware general use.                student requirements.
 More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
 automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf

 PLCE. PLC Trainer
                                                                                              Always included
                                                                                               in the supply:




                                                                                                                                                                                                                   6.- Systems & Automatics
                                                                                          2                     3
                                                                                         PLC                PLCE
                                                                                     Programming         Touch Screen
                                                                                       Software      Programming Software

                           1   Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer

                                                              SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                  PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                             Items supplied as standard                                       Using the PLC Programing Software:
 1  PLCE. Unit:
     This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple                            1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
     and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,                                                  The programs can be written in several programming languages:
     additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.                                                                            Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
                                                                                                                                        Sequential function chart. (SFC).
     Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.                                                                                     Function block diagram. (FBD).
     Front panel:                                                                                                             2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
         Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push                                  3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
        button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of                                  4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
        the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital                               5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
        outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass                                          6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
        connections (GND). Touch screen.                                                                                           established in a variable.
     Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).                                          7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
     Inside:                                                                                                                  8.- How to use analog inputs.
         Power supply 100... 240V (AC).                                                                                       9.- How to use analog outputs.
         Panasonic PLC:                                                                                                       10.- Use of temporizers.
           High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32                                       11.- Logic functions implementation.
           Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.                               12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
         Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.                                                  13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
     Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.                                                       14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
  2 PLC Programming Software:                                                                                                 15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
     Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages                                          16.- Functions library.
     can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential                               17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
     function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,                                    18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
     programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,                                        * Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
     function blocks, inputs/outputs...                                                                                       Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
     Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal                                 19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
     relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,                            20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
     file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC                                      21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
     addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software                                         words).
     provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions                                  22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
     Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse                                   23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
     of programs is easy.                                                                                                     24.- Switching from one screen to another.
  3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:                                                                                   * Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
     Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy                                Other practical possibilities:
     Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps                                   -It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
     Editor.                                                                                                                       causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
    Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.                                                                                  happens in the outputs.
 4                                                                                                                                -It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
 5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
                                                                                                                                   transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
 Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.                                                                     (for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
 More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/                                                                 output, (for example: a pump).
 automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
                                                                                                                Page 85                                                                     www.edibon.com
                                                                               Advanced Automation and Systems Laboratory
                                                                                                  (6AD)




List of modules and teaching units included plus
            Summarised Catalogues

                       Priority 3
                0200. Electronics
                0213-210/10S: Elementary Electronics (10 CAI + CAL)
                0213-211/10S: Elementary Electronics (10 CAI + CAL).
                0230: Transducers and Sensors Module
                0231: Sensors Instrumentation
                0240: Control Electronics Module
                0400. Electricity
                0413-410/10S: Domestic Electric Installations (10 CAI + CAL)
                0413-411/10S: Domestic Electric Installations (10 CAI + CAL)




                                                                                                                            Ref.:6AD-pre(01/11)
                                                                               issue:01/11




                          ELEMENTARY ELECTRONICS (10 CAI + CAL)

Ref: 0213-210/10S                                                                  1 / 2

ITEM          REFERENCE                          DESCRIPTION                 QTY.
         LIEBA                 BASIC ELECTRONICS AND ELECTRICITY
                               INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
  1      EBC-100               BASE UNIT, WITH BUILT IN POWER SUPPLY           1
  2      M1                    D. C. CIRCUITS MODULE                           1
  3      M1/SOF*               COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF D.C     10
                               CIRCUITS
  4      M1/CAL                COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR D.C.      10
                               CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
  5      M2                    A. C. CIRCUITS MODULE                           1
  6      M2/SOF*               COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF A.C.    10
                               CIRCUITS
  7      M2/CAL                COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR A.C.      10
                               CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
  8      M16                   ELECTRICS NETWORKS MODULE                       1
  9      M16/SOF*              COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF         10
                               ELECTRIC NETWORKS
 10      M16/CAL               COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR           10
                               ELECTRICS NETWORKS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
                               ANALYSIS)
 11      M17                   ELECTROMAGNETISM MODULE                         1
 12      M17/SOF*              COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF         10
                               ELECTROMAGNETISM
 13      M17/CAL               COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR           10
                               ELECTROMAGNETISM (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
                               ANALYSIS)
 14      M3                    SEMICONDUCTORS I MODULE                         1
 15      M3/SOF*               COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF         10
                               SEMICONDUCTORS I
 16      M3/CAL                COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR           10
                               SEMICONDUCTORS I (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
                               ANALYSIS)
 17      M5                    POWER SUPPLIES MODULE                           1
 18      M5/SOF*               COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF         10
                               POWER SUPPLIES
 19      M5/CAL                COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR POWER     10
                               SUPPLIES (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
 21      INS/SOF               CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE           1
                               (TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
 22      EDAS/VIS-0.25         EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL          1
                               INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (250.000 samples per
                               second), FORMED BY:
         VIS                   VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope,          1
                               Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
                               Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
                               and Logic Generator)
         DAIB                  DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX                  1
         DAB                   DATA ACQUISITION BOARD                          1
Ref: 0213-210/10S                                                                       2 / 2

 ITEM        REFERENCE                             DESCRIPTION                    QTY.
  22      EDAS/SOF                 DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE                        1
  23      0210PARTS                COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                       1
  24      0210PA                   COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
  25      0210IYPM                 INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP                     1
  26      0210CAPRO                TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
  27      0210TD                   TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
  28      0210MANU                 DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.

Notes:
1) Multipost option:
       This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
       units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.

2)Supply conditions included:
       a) Technical conditions:

           - Laboratories adaptation.
           - Installation of all units supplied.
           - Starting up for all units.
           - Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
           - Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
           teaching techniques uses.
           - Technology transfer.
       b) Commercial conditions:

           - Packing.
           - Financing charges.
           - C.I.F. charges.
       c) Others conditions:


           - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit

                    .   Required services manual.
                    .   Assembly and installation manual.
                    .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                    .   Set in operation manual.
                    .   Safety norms manual.
                    .   Practices manual.
                    .   Maintenance manual.
                    .   Calibration manual.




            See Catalogues in next pages
2.1- Basic Electronics




                                                                                                                                                               2.- Electronics
 LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:

                                                                Laboratory structure

               2   Modules                                        1   Power Supply                                                2   Modules
           (power supply needed)                         FA-CO                                                                 (power supply needed)
                                   (M1)                                                                                (M9)




  (M2)                                                                                                                                                 (M10)
                                                                          or
                                                         EBC-100




                              (M16)                                                                                   (M11)

                                          3   CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
                                                                                                  Used
                                                                                                Teaching
 (M17)                                                                                         Technique                                               (M12)

                                                         INS/SOF.     Instructor Software
                                                                          +
                               (M3)                                                                                    (M13)
                                                                         M../SOF.
                                                          Student/Module Software


 (M4)                                     4   LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software                                                              (M14)
                                                               (Results Calculation and Analysis)
                                                                                                   Used
                                                                                                 Teaching
                                                                                                Technique



                                   (M5)                                                                               (M15)




                                                                                                                                                       (M31)
 (M6)

                                          5    EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
                                                        Virtual Instrumentation System
                                                                                                  Used                 (M60)
                                (M7)                                                            Teaching
                                                                                               Technique
                                                      DAIB.   Data acquisition interface box
 (M8)                                                                                                                                                  (M65)

                                                         DAB. Data acquisition board



                                                        EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and
                                                              Virtual Instrumentation
            Other modules                                             Software                                          Expansion Board       (M99)




The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Power supply + Module/s is the
minimum supply).

                                                         Some available Modules
 Basic Electricity:                            " M14. Optoelectronics.                              Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities:
   " M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits.       " M15. Development Module.                             " M99. Expansion Board.
   " M2. Alternating Current (A.C.)Circuits. Basic Electronics: Transducers:                             Some electronic sub-boards available:
   " M16. Electric Networks.                   " M41. Resistance Transducers.                               "M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
   " M17. Electromagnetism.                    " M43. Applications of Temperature.                          "M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
 Basic Electronics:                            " M44. Applications of Light.                                "M99-3. Function Generator.
   " M3. Semiconductors I.                     " M45. Linear Position and Force.                            "M99-4. AM Modulator.
   " M4. Semiconductors II.                    " M46. Environmental Measurements.                           "M99-5. AM Demodulator.
   " M5. Power Supplies.                       " M47. Rotational Speed & Position
   " M6. Oscillators.                                 Control.                                              * We can develop any electronic sub-board
   " M7. Operational Amplifiers.               " M48. Sounds Measurements.                                    according to the application required by
   " M8. Filters.                              " M49. Applications of Temperature and                         the customer.
   " M9. Power Electronics.                           Pressure.
   " M10. Digital Systems & Converters.      Basic Electronics: Control Electronics:
   " M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.    " M60. Analog/Digital Converters.
   " M12. Basic Combinational Circuits.        " M61. Digital/Analog Converters.
   " M13. Basic Sequential Circuits.           " M65. Control and Regulation.

 More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf

                                                                          Page 5                                                              www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                                2.1- Basic Electronics                         (continuation)

                         LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
       2.- Electronics
                                                                                1 Power Supply
Electronics

                         There are two choices for suppling the modules:
                         FA-CO. Power Supply
                                                                                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
                                                             Fixed outputs: + 5 V, ± 12 V, 1 A. Variable outputs: ± 12 V, 0.5 A. AC output: 12V. Outputs through either 2mm. contact terminals, or
                                                             through 25 pin CENTRONICS connectors. LED’s voltage indicators. Supply: 110/220V A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
                                                             This power supply FA-CO includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
                                                             Dimensions: 225x205x200mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
                                     or
                         EBC-100. Base Unit
                                                                                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
                                                             Hardware support and power supply. Modules supporting unit.
                                                             Variable outputs ± 12 V. Fixed outputs + 5V, + 12V, -12V, -5V. Supply: 110/220 V. A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz. Power through
                                                             CENTRONICS connector. This base unit EBC-100 includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
                                                             Dimensions: 410x298x107mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.


                                                                                                          2    Modules
                         These Modules have been designed for making practices using either the FA-CO Power Supply or the EBC-100 Base Unit. The Modules consist in a series of different circuits
                         which shall allow performing the corresponding exercises separately. All circuits are serigraphed on the surface of each module, thus permitting vision of their REAL components.
                         Almost all exercises/practices have special switches so that the teacher may SIMULATE CIRCUITRY FAILURE (faults), to be found by the Student. We provide eight manuals per
                         module. Connectors and cables for completing the exercises and practices are included. Dimensions (approx.) of each module: 300 x 210 x 45 mm. Weight: 300 gr.
                                                                                                       Basic Electricity
                         M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                             Measurement managing and checking                      10.-Study of Fault F2 in Resistors circuit.    18.- Study of Fault F2 in Wheatstone
                                                             instruments:                                           11.-Theoretical / practical exercises.              Bridge circuit.
                                                                 1.-Electronic instrumentation operation.       Resistors association and the Wheatstone           19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                                                    Use of multimeter.                          Bridge:                                           Kirchoff's laws:
                                                                 2.-Study of fault F1 in Resistance circuit.        12.-Voltage and current measurement            20.- Kirchoff's first law.
                                                                 3.-Study of fault F2 in Resistance circuit.             in a circuit with resistors connected     21.- Kirchoff's second law.
                                                                 4.-Theoretical / practical exercises.                   in series.                                22.- Fault study using Kirchoff's law.
                                                             Ohm's Law:                                             13.-Series/Parallel configuration study.       23.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                                                 5.-Ohm's Law verification.                         14.-The Wheatstone Bridge.                    Additional Possibilities:
                                                                 6.-Power calculation.                              15.-Study of Fault in Series Resistors            Voltage/Current dividers.
                                                                 7.-Theoretical / practical exercises.                   circuit.                                     Batteries and Switches.
                                                             Resistors: characteristics and types:                  16.-Study of Fault in Parallel Resistors          Power source in series and parallel.
                                                                 8.-Resistor measurements. Color code.                   circuit.                                     The Rheostat and Potentiometer.
                                                                    Ohmmeter.                                       17.-Study of Fault F1 in Wheatstone
                                                                 9.-Study of Fault F1 in Resistors circuit.              Bridge circuit.

                         M2. Alternating Current (A.C.) Circuits
                                                                                                                        PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                             Alternating signal characteristics.                       with the frequency.                        RLC Circuits:
                                                             Instruments:                                          14.-Study of faults in capacitors.              30.- Resistance-Capacitance Filters.
                                                                  1.- Waveforms study in A.C.                      15.-Reactive capacitance variations with        31.- Filters inductive resistance. Low Pass
                                                                  2.- Introduction of anomalies in the                 the capacitance.                                  and High- Pass filters.
                                                                      Wave form circuit.                           16.-A.C. capacitors in parallel.                32.- Exercises.
                                                                  3.- Study of Faults in the Waveform              17.-A.C. capacitors in series.                 Resonance:
                                                                      circuit.                                     18.-A.C. capacitors as voltage dividers.        33.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with low
                                                                  4.- Relation between peak values and             19.-Inductance in an A.C circuit.                     impedance source.
                                                                      RMS for sinusoidal waves.                    20.-Inductive reactance variations with         34.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
                                                                                                                                                                         circuit.
                                                                  5.- Resistance in a sinusoidal                       the inductance.                             35.- Study of Fault 2 in the resonance
                                                                      alternating current.                         21.-Inductors in series in an A.C. circuit.           Circuit.
                                                                  6.-Measurements using the                        22.-Exercises.                                  36.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with high
                                                                      oscilloscope.                            Basic theorems and capacitance and                        impedance source.
                                                                  7.- Voltage and current phase angles         inductance circuits:                                37.- Circuit frequency response and
                                                                      for resistors in sinusoidal                  23.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in               bandwidth.
                                                                      alternating current.                             series.                                     38.- A.C. R-L-C Circuits in series.
                                                                  8.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in series.         24.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in         39.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
                                                                  9.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in parallel.           parallel.                                         circuit.
                                                                10.- Exercises.                                    25.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in          40.- Exercises.
                                                             Behaviour of A.C. capacitors and inductors:               series.                                    The transformer:
                                                                11.- Capacitance with square waveform              26.-Study of Fault 1 in the Circuit #3.         41.- The transformer.
                                                                      and sinusoidal input current.                27.-Study of Fault 2 in the Circuit #3.         42.- The transformer with load.
                                                                12.- Inductance with square waveform               28.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in          43.- Current measurement in the
                                                                                                                                                                         secondary Transformer with Charge.
                                                                      and a sinusoidal input voltage.                  parallel.                                   44.- Exercises.
                                                                13.- Reactive reactance, Xc, variations            29.-Exercises.

                          M16. Electric Networks                                                                        PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                             Ohm’s law:                                           9.- Error study in the circuit, assembly.       Star-triangle transformation:
                                                               1.-Calculation of the internal resistance          10.-DC+AC assembly.                              17.- Resistance measurement between
                                                                   of a continuous source.                        11.-Theoretical/practical exercises.                    terminals. Delta| Y configurations.
                                                               2.-Error study in an internal resistance.        Thévenin’s and Norton’s theorems:                  18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                                               3.-Internal resistance calculation of an           12.-Thévenin and Norton equivalent              Wheatstone bridge:
                                                                   alternating source.                                circuits. Conversion. Kirchoff’s laws.       19.- Calibration of a Wheatstone bridge
                                                               4.-Theoretical/practical exercises.                                                                        fed by a DC source.
                                                             Electrical power:                                    13.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                                               5.-Power transferred by a DC source to           Superposition theorem:                             20.- Error study in the Wheatstone bridge
                                                                   load.                                          14.-Application of the Superposition                    circuit.
                                                               6.-Power transferred to a load by an AC                theorem.                                     21.- Wheatstone bridge calibration fed
                                                                   source.                                        15.-Error study in the Superposition                    by an AC source.
                                                               7.-Theoretical/practical exercises.                    circuit. Component values                    22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                                             Power supplies combination:                              modifications.                              Additional Possibilities:
                                                               8.-DC+DC assembly.                                 16.-Theoretical/practical exercises.               Millman’s Theorem.

                          M17. Electromagnetism                                                                         PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                              1.-Magnetic fields measurement.                     8.- Basic operation of the solenoid.                  continuous current motor.
                                                              2.-Induced electromotive force. Coil                9.- Fault study in the Solenoid circuit.         15.- Motor used as DC generator.
                                                                  Reactance calculation.                          10.-Basic operation of a relay.                  16.- Cemf.
                                                              3.-Exercises.                                       11.-Self-holding of the position of the          17.- Exercises.
                                                             Electromagnetic applications:                             contacts.                                  Stepping Motor:
                                                              4.-Mutual Inductance.                               12.-Fault study in the Relay circuit.            18.- Stepper motor working.
                                                              5.-Basic operation of the transformer               13.-Exercises.                                   19.- Fault study in Stepping motor circuit.
                                                              6.-Core effect in a transformer response.         Direct current motor:                              20.- Exercises.
                                                              7.-Fault study in the Transformer.                 14.-Characteristic Speed/Voltage of a

                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
                                                                                                               Page 6
2.1- Basic Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics                 (continuation)

LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:                               (continuation)




                                                                                                                                                                                       2.- Electronics
                                                                            2   Modules (continuation)
                                                                            Basic Electronics
 M3. Semiconductors I
                                                                                              PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                               Characteristics of the PN junction:                   The Zener diode:                                    15.- Study of the transistor as a switch.
                                1.- Study of the diode.                                9.- Voltage regulator with a Zener diode.         16.- Exercises.
                                2.- Fault Study in Diodes.                            10.- Study of faults in Zener circuit.            Common emitter amplifier:
                                3.- Exercises.                                        11.- Exercises.                                    17.- Study of the common emitter NPN
                               The diode as a rectifier element:                     Study and characteristics of the transistor:             amplifier.
                                4.- Half wave rectifier.                              12.- Study of the transistor.                      18.- Fault Study in Amplifier circuit.
                                5.- Study of faults in Rectifier circuit.             13.- Study of the fault in the transistor.         19.- Study of the common emitter PNP
                                6.- Bridge rectifier.                                14.- Exercises.                                          amplifier.
                                7.- Study of faults in bridge rectifier.             Transistor characteristics operating as a           20.- Exercises.
                                8.- Exercises.                                       switch:
 M4. Semiconductors II
                                                                                               PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                               Complementary transistors pair:                         7.- Exercises.                                   Analog switch:
                                1.- Complementary transistors pair.                  Differential amplifier:                             14.- Analog switch.
                                2.- Transistors pair with alternating signal.          8.- Differential amplifier.                       15.- Exercises.
                                3.- Fault study of the complementary                   9.- Fault study in the differential amplifier.   Multistage Amplifier. Direct coupling:
                                    Transistor pair.                                  10.- Exercises.                                    16.- Amplifier coupled directly.
                                4.- Exercises.                                       Study and characteristics of the JFET               17.- Fault study of an amplifier coupled
                               Darlington configuration:                             transistor:                                               directly.
                                5.- Darlington configuration.                         11.- JFET characteristics.                        18.- Exercises.
                                6.- Fault study of the Darlington                    12.- Fault study with the JFET transistor.
                                     configuration.                                  13.- Exercises.

 M5. Power Supplies
                                                                                       PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                               Rectification:                                          8.- Protection against overvoltages.              16.- Adjustable L200 regulator.
                                1.- Rectification.                                     9.- Study of the fault “Protection against        17.- Fault Study in adjustable L200.
                                2.- Bridge rectifier.                                      overcurrents”.                                18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                3.- Theoretical/practical exercises.                 10.- Theoretical/practical exercises.              Introduction to switched power supplies:
                               Fixed voltage sources:                                Symmetrical voltage power sources:                  19.- Switching technique.
                                4.- Power supply with the Zener diode.               11.- Symmetrical source; 78XX regulator.            20.- Switching technique. PWM.
                                5.- Stabilization through Zener and                  12.- Symmetrical source; 79XX regulator.            21.- Switching technique. Boost.
                                    Transistor.                                      13.- Theoretical/practical exercises.               22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                6.- Fault study in “Stabilization through            Voltage regulators with integrated circuits:       Additional Possibilities:
                                    Zener and Transistor”.                           14.- Adjustable regulator; LM317.                     Voltage Feedback.
                                7.- Protection against overcurrents.                 15.- Study of fault in adjustable LM317.              DC-DC converter.

 M6. Oscillators
                                                                                            PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES

                               Oscillators. RC and LC Nets:                           6.- Fault study the Wien bridge oscillator.       Astable multivibrator:
                                1.- RC net oscillator.                                7.- Exercises.                                     12.- Astable multivibrator.
                                2.- LC net oscillator.                               Colpitts oscillator. Hartley oscillator:            13.- Fault study with an Astable
                                3.- Faults study with RC and LC Net                   8.- Colpitts oscillator.                                mulltivibrator.
                                    oscillators.                                      9.- Hartley oscillator.                            14.- Exercises.
                                4.- Exercises.                                                                                          555 TIMER:
                                                                                     10.- Faults study with the Colpitts                 15.- 555 timer.
                               Wien bridge oscillator:                                    Oscillator.                                    16.- 555 timer fault study.
                                5.- Wien Bridge.                                     11.- Exercises.                                     17.- Exercises.

 M7. Operational Amplifiers
                                                                                           PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                              Operational amplifier characteristics:                   8.- Study of the non-inverting amplifier.  16.- Differential amplifier fault study.
                               1.- Operational amplifier study.                        9.- Voltage follower.                      17.- Exercises.
                               2.- Closed-loop output compensation                   10.- Fault study in the non-inverting Comparators:
                                   voltage.                                                Amplifier.                             18.- Comparator study.
                               3.- Operational amplifier fault study.                 11.- Exercises.                             19.- Comparators fault study.
                               4.- Exercises.                                        The adder amplifier:                         20.- Exercises.
                              The inverting amplifier:                                12.- Adding amplifier study.               Additional Possibilities:
                               5.- Inverting amplifier study.                         13.- Fault study in the adding amplifier.    Attenuator.
                               6.- Inverting amplifier fault study.                   14.- Exercises.                              Voltage Divider.
                               7.- Exercises.                                        The differential amplifier:                   Open-loop operation.
                              The non-inverting amplifier:                            15.- Differential amplifier study.

 M8. Filters
                                                                                            PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                              RC and LC filter responses:                           10.- Study of Error in RC filter with double T.      18.- Study of Faults in filters.
                               1.- Frequency response.                              11.- Exercises theoretical/practical.                19.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
                               2.- Low-pass filter.                                 Active filters:                                     Association of filters:
                               3.- High-pass filter.                                 12.- Low-pass filter.                               20.- Behaviour of the filter.
                               4.- LC Circuit.                                       13.- Low-pass filter with load and                  21.- Filter of distorted signal.
                               5.- Study of Error in Low-pass filter.                      operational amplifier.                        22.- Filter in cascade; low pass filter and
                                                                                     14.- High-pass filter.                                   high pass filter.
                               6.- Study of Error in High-pass filter.                                                                   23.- Filter in parallel.
                               7.- Exercises theoretical/practical.                  15.- High-pass filter with load and                 24.- Study of Error in filters.
                              T-shaped Filter:                                             operational amplifier.                        25.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
                               8.- Filter with double T link.                        16.- The attenuation is cumulative.                Additional Possibilities:
                               9.- Generator circuit of the signal S1.               17.- Use of Operational Amplifier.                   Band-Pass and Band-Stop Filters.

 M9. Power Electronics
                                                                                              PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                               The bipolar power transistor:                         The thyristor:                                      11.- Study of insulation circuits.
                                1.-Study of the power transistor.                      7.- Study of the thyristor.                       12.- Exercises.
                                2.-Study of faults in the power transistor.            8.- Study of the error of the thyristor.         The TRIAC:
                                3.-Exercises.                                          9.- Exercises.                                    13.- Study of the TRIAC.
                               The MOSFET transistor:                                The UJT transistor and trigger circuits of the      14.- Practical assembly of the TRIAC.
                                4.-Study of the MOSFET transistor.                   thyristor:                                          15.- Exercises.
                                5.-Study of faults in the MOSFET.                     10.- Study of the trigger circuits of the         Additional Possibilities:
                                6.-Exercises.                                                thyristor.                                  Half/Full wave control.
 More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
                                                                                     Page 7                                                                       www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                    2.1- Basic Electronics                         (continuation)

                  LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:                       (continuation)
2.- Electronics

                                                                                            2    Modules (continuation)
                                                                                        Basic Electronics        (continuation)

                  M10. Digital Systems and Converters
                                                                                                            PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                 Analog switching. The bistable, astable           9.- Theoretical/practical exercises.               17.- Error Study in the analog integrator.
                                                 and monostable family:                          Behaviour of Binary/BCD Counters & 7-                18.- Triangular wave generation.
                                                  1.-Characteristics of an analog switch         segments Displays:                                    19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                                     chip.                                       10.- Characteristics of Binary UP/DOWN               A/D and D/A conversion:
                                                  2.-Study of the error F1 in the Analog               Counter 74LS193 and 7-Segment                   20.- D/A Converter.
                                                     Multiplexer.                                      Display.                                        21.- A/D Converter.
                                                  3.-Study of the errors in the Analog           11.- Error Study in the binary counter.               22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                                     Multiplexer.                                12.- C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e B C D   Applications:
                                                  4.-Characteristics of an S-R type Latch              UP/DOWN counter and 7-Segment                   23.- Random number generator.
                                                     Integrated circuit.                               Display.                                        24.- Measuring the time between two
                                                  5.-Error Study in the bistable.                13.- Error Study in the BCD counter.                       events.
                                                  6.-Characteristics of an integrated            14.- Theoretical/practical exercises.                 25.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                                     astable circuit.                            Comparators and analog integrators:
                                                  7.-Error Study in the astable.                 15.- Characteristics of an analog                    Additional Possibilities:
                                                  8.-Characteristics of an integrated                  comparator.                                     Synchronous/Asynchronous Counter.
                                                     Monostable circuit.                         16.- Analog integrator.


                  M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals
                                                                                                            PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                 Numbers systems:                                10.- Fault study in TTL circuit.                     Others types of integrated gates:
                                                  1.- Voltage measurement in a circuit of        11.- Fault study in Logic Gates.                      20.- Study of simple operations with a
                                                      sources.                                   12.- Exercises.                                             Schmitt Trigger inverter.
                                                  2.- Fault study in the source circuit.         CMOS gates:                                           21.- Operation study of a three-state
                                                  3.- Exercises.                                 13.- Basic function gates.                                  buffer.
                                                 Logical circuits:                               14.- Fault study in CMOS circuit.                     22.- Study of the fault in the Circuit #7.
                                                  4.- Logical Diode.                             15.- Exercises.                                       23.- Exercises.
                                                  5.- Fault study in Sources.                    Boolean Algebra and logical functions:               Additional Possibilities:
                                                  6.- Logic with transistor and diodes.          16.- Study of use of Circuit #3.                       JK Flip-Flop.
                                                  7.- Fault study in transistor/diode circuit.   17.- Exercises.                                        Control of Data Bus.
                                                  8.- Exercises.                                 Open collector gates:
                                                 TTL gates:                                      18.- Study of the use of Circuit #5.
                                                  9.- Basic function gates.                      19.- Exercises.

                  M12. Basic Combinational Circuits
                                                                                                        PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                Encoders:                                         8.- Study of the errors in the multiplexers.        Arithmetic and logic operations:
                                                 1.- Study of an encoder.                         9.- Exercises.                                       16.- Study of an adder.
                                                 2.- Fault study in the encoder.                 Demultiplexers:                                       17.- Study of the error in the arithmetic
                                                 3.- Exercises.                                  10.- Study of a demultiplexer.                             and logic operations.
                                                Decoders:                                        11.- Study of the errors in demultiplexers.           18.- Study of a parity generator.
                                                 4.- Study of a decoder.                         12.- Exercises.                                       19.- Study of the error in the Parity
                                                 5.- Fault study in the decoder.                 Digital Comparators:                                       generator.
                                                 6.- Exercises.                                  13.- Study of a comparator.                           20.- Exercises.
                                                Multiplexers:                                    14.- Study of the errors in a comparator.
                                                 7.- Study of a multiplexer.                     15.- Exercises.

                   M13. Basic Sequential Circuits
                                                                                                           PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                Bistables:                                         7.- Study of faults of the Shift registers.        13.- Study of errors of the Synchronised
                                                 1.- Bistables.                                    8.- Exercises.                                          Sequential circuits.
                                                 2.- Bistable S-R using NAND gates.              Counters:                                            14.- Exercises.
                                                 3.- Practical performance.                        9.- Practice of the Counters.                      Memories:
                                                 4.- Study of error in the Bistables.            10.- Study of faults of the Counters.                15.- Exercises.
                                                 5.- Exercises.                                  11.- Exercises.
                                                Shift registers:                                 Synchronised sequential circuits:
                                                 6.- Shift registers.                            12.- Practice of the Synchronised.



                  M14. Optoelectronics
                                                                                                           PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                Light transmitters and liquid crystal display    Photo-conducting cells:                               11.- Fault study using fibre optics.
                                                (LCD):                                             6.- Light dependent resistors.                      12.- Exercises.
                                                 1.- Light transmitters.                           7.- Alarm.                                         Infrared:
                                                 2.- Bar graph.                                    8.- Fault study on the photo-conducting             13.- Circuit with infrared diodes.
                                                 3.- LCD display and 7-segment display.                 cell.                                          14.- Fault study of the infrared diodes.
                                                 4.- Fault Study in light transmitters and         9.- Exercises.                                      15.- Exercises.
                                                     liquid crystal display.                     Fibre optics:
                                                 5.- Exercises.                                   10.- Fibre optics practice.

                  M15. Development Module
                                                                                                        MAIN FEATURES
                                                This is a module to build and implement            Logical source.
                                                student’s own circuits, it consists on:            Set of potentiometers.
                                                 Development board.                                Pulse generator and inverters.
                                                 Power supply connector.                           Interrupter.
                                                 Digital visual display unit.                      Clock.

                  More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
                                                                                                  Page 8
2.1- Basic Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics                 (continuation)

LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:                           (continuation)




                                                                                                                                                                            2.- Electronics
                                                                              2    Modules (continuation)
                                                                     Basic Electronics:Transducers
 M41. Resistance Transducers
                                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES

                                1.- Linearly sliding potentiometer.                 3.- Rotary coil potentiometer.
                                2.- Rotary carbon-track potentiometer.              4.- Precision servo-potentiometer.




 M43. Applications of Temperature
                                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                               The integrated circuit temperature                        Temperature Dependent Resistance             used in an alarm circuit (double
                               transducer:                                               (T.D.R) transducer.                          thermistor).
                                 1.- Characteristics of an integrated              The N.T.C (Negative Temperature              The “K” type thermocouple temperature
                                     temperature circuit.                          Coefficient) thermistor:                     thermistor:
                                 2.- Construction of a digital thermometer.          4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C              6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
                               The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:                   thermistor.                                        thermopar.
                                3.- Characteristics of a platinum                    5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor



 M44. Applications of Light
                                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                1.- Photovoltaic Cell.                              4.- Characteristics of a phototransistor.    7.- Photoconductive Cell.
                                2.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell.         5.- Photodiode PIN.                          8.- Luminous intensity detector.
                                3.- Phototransistor.                                6.- Characteristics of a PIN photodiode.




 M45. Linear Position and Force

                                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                1.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable            2.- Characteristics of a Variable            3.-The characteristics of a strain gauge
                                    Differential Transformer (LVDT).                    Resistance.                                 Transducer.




 M-46. Environmental Measurements
                                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                1.- Characteristics of Air flow Sensor.              3.- Characteristics of Humidity Sensor.
                                2.- Characteristics of Air pressure
                                   Sensor.




 M-47. Rotational Speed and Position Control
                                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                1.- Characteristics of a slotted opto                3.- Characteristics of an inductive         5.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent
                                    transducer and its applications for                  transducer.                                 Magnet tachogenerator.
                                    counting and speed measurement.
                                2.- Characteristics of the reflective                4.- Characteristics of a half effect
                                    opto-transducer.                                     transducer.




 M-48. Sounds Measurements
                                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                1.- Characteristics of a Dynamic                     2.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic       3.- Theoretical/Practical questions.
                                   Microphone.                                           Receiver.



 M-49. Applications of Temperature and Pressure
                                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                The integrated circuit temperature                       Temperature Dependent Resistance The “K” type thermocouple temperature
                               transducer:                                               (T.D.R) transducer.                    thermistor:
                                 1.- Characteristics of an integrated              The N.T.C (Negative Temperature                6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
                                      temperature circuit.                         Coefficient) thermistor:                           thermocouple.
                                 2.- C o n s t r u c t i o n o f a d i g i t a l    4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C thermistor. Pressure transducer:
                                      thermometer.                                  5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor used    7.- Characteristic of a pressure
                               The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:                         in an alarm circuit (double                   transducer.
                                 3.- Characteristics of a platinum                       thermistor).


 More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf

                                                                                    Page 9                                                                www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                      2.1- Basic Electronics                     (continuation)

                         LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:                     (continuation)
       2.- Electronics
Electronics


                                                                                                  2   Modules (continuation)
                                                                                         Basic Electronics: Control Electronics

                         M60. Analog/Digital Converters

                                                                                                            PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES

                                                       1.- Binary Slope Converter.                     5.- Flash Converter.

                                                       2.- Integrated converter.

                                                       3.- Simple Slope Converter.

                                                       4.- Double Slope Converter.




                         M-61. Digital/Analog Converters

                                                                                                            PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                       1.- Weighted Resistance Converter.               5.- Pulse - Width Modulation Converter.
                                                        2.- Ladder Converter R/2R.
                                                        3.- Integrated Converter.
                                                        4.- Series Blocking Converter.




                          M-65. Control and Regulation
                                                                                                            PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                        1.- Study in open loop Nº1: Proportional       6.- Study in open loop Nº 6: Block              9.-Potentiometer adjustment.
                                                            block.                                        composition: Negative zero and
                                                        2.- Study in open loop Nº2: Integrator            Negative Pole.
                                                            block.                                     7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by
                                                        3.- Study in open loop Nº3: Simple pole.           means of Optimum Quantitative.1st
                                                        4.- Study in open loop Nº4: 2nd order              order system.
                                                            plant.                                     8.-Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by
                                                        5.- Study in open loop Nº5: Non lineal             means of Optimum Quantitative.
                                                            Plants: Limitation and Hysteresis.             2nd order system.




                                                                                     Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities

                         M-99. Expansion Board

                                                       The aim of the M99 Expansion Board is to         - Some electronic sub-boards already
                         Example of an electronic
                           sub-board put in the        provide generic support to up to 8                  developed:
                               M99 Board
                                                       electronic sub-boards, each one with its             M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
                                                       own specific functionality, customized to            M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
                                                       client necessities.
                                                                                                            M99-3. Function Generator.
                                                       The sub-boards have to be inserted in any of
                                                       the eight 32-pin female connectors                   M99-4. AM Modulator.
                                                       reserved for it on the M99 Board.                    M99-5. AM Demodulator.
                                                       There are connectors, in both the sub-               * We can design and include any
                                                       boards and on the M99, through which one               electronic circuit or application on a
                                                       can access the internal input/output data              sub-board according to customer
                                                       points, to take measures and get                       requirements. This way, any
                                                       information about the practice. Thus, the              Modules can be complemented with
                                                       student carries out the pedagogical aims.              extra circuits, in extra sub-boards.
                                                       In the upper right corner of the M99 board             The sub-boards can also be
                                                       there are 14 connectors for power supply.              purchased independently to the
                                                       Thanks to them, the sub-boards can be                  modules, thus giving total
                                                       supplied with different voltage intensities.           freedom to customers in the
                                                       Either ”FA-CO” Power Supply or “EBC-                   acquisition of circuits.
                                                       100” Base unit with built-in power supply,
                                                       are required to work with the M99
                                                       Expansion Board, like with any other
                                                       Module.




                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf

                                                                                                       Page 10
2.1- Basic Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics                         (continuation)

LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:                                   (continuation)




                                                                                                                                                                                               2.- Electronics
                                                                                           Software
                                                         3   CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:

                                                                                                With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
                                                                                                consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
             Module
        (electronic board)
                                               +                                                Student/Module Software (M../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
                                                                                                knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
                                  Instructor      Student/Module                                These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
                                   Software          Software                                   information on the subject of study.


 With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
 Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
      - Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
      - Create easily new entries or delete them.
      - Create data bases with student information.
      - Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
      - Print reports.
      - Develop own examinations.
      - Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
     ...and many other facilities.

 The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
 configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.

 M../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module
 Software).
 It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
 Each module has its own Student Software package.
       - The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
       - Each Software Package contains:
         Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
         understanding of the studied subject.
         Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
         been understood.
         Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
         showing how to complete the circuits and get the right information from
         them.
         Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
                                                        Available Student/Module Software Packages:
 Basic electricity                                            -M8/SOF. Filters.                                               -M44/SOF. Applications of light.
 -M1/SOF. Direct Current Circuits(D.C.).                      -M9/SOF. Power Electronics.                                     -M45/SOF. Linear Position and Force.
 -M2/SOF. Alternating Current Circuits(A.C.).                 -M10/SOF. Digital Systems and Converters.                       -M46/SOF. Environmental Measurement .
 -M16/SOF. Electric Networks.                                 -M11/SOF. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.                     -M47/SOF. Rotational Speed and Position Control.
 -M17/SOF. Electromagnetism.                                  -M12/SOF. Basic Combinational Circuits.                         -M48/SOF. Sound Measurements.
 Basic Electronic:                                            -M13/SOF. Basic Sequential Circuits.                            -M49/SOF. Applications of Temperature and Pressure.
 -M3/SOF. Semiconductors I.                                   -M14/SOF. Optoelectronics.                                      Basic Electronic: Control Electronics:
 -M4/SOF. Semiconductors II.                                  -M15/SOF. Development Module.                                   -M60/SOF. Analog/Digital Converters.
 -M5/SOF. Power Supplies.                                     Basic Electronic: Transducers:                                  -M61/SOF. Digital/Analog Converters.
 -M6/SOF. Oscillators.                                        -M41/SOF. Resistance transducers.                               -M65/SOF. Control and Regulation.
 -M7/SOF. Operational Amplifiers.                             -M43/SOF. Applications of Temperature.

                                        4   LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
 This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
 different areas of science: Basic Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.
 On the Basic Electronics Area, it can be used with the M1 to M17 modules. These modules cover every subject in Basic Electricity and Electronics, both analog and digital.
 CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
 With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.




  Simply insert the experimental data, with a single   Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
  click CAL will perform the calculations.             be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
                                                       set of lab. exercises.

 Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
 information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:




It provides a handy option to avoid using different            ...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
reference sources while in progress. For example: the        tables.                                                Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
values of Physical constants, their symbols and right                                                               any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
names, conversion factors...
 More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
                                                                                          Page 11                                                                       www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                                                   2.1- Basic Electronics                      (continuation)

                         LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:                                                (continuation)
       2.- Electronics

                                                                                                                            Data Acquisition
Electronics


                                                              5   EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/Virtual Instrumentation System



                                                            Data acquisition
                                                                                                                              EDAS/VIS is the perfect link between the electronic modules and the PC. With the EDAS/VIS
                            1                   Cables to
                                                interface      and virtual
                                                            instrumentation
                                                                                                                              system, information from the modules is sent to the computer. There, it can be analyzed and
                                     2
                           Connection                           software                                                      represented.




                                                                                           Data acquisition
                             points                                                                                           We easily connect the Data Acquisition Interface Box (DAIB) to the modules with the supplied
                                    3




                                                                                               board
                            4                                Data acquisition    Cable                                        cables (connection points are placed in the modules). Like any other hardware, the DAIB is
                                                              interface box        to
                                   “n”                                          computer                      Student         connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
                                                                                                                post
                                Module                                                                                        Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software (specific for every module), the student can get
                           (electronic board)
                                                                                                                              the results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with
                                                                                                                              them.



                         This EDAS/VIS System includes DAIB + DAB + EDAS/VIS-SOF:
                          5.1)Hardware:
                           5.1.1)DAIB. Data Acquisition Interface Box:
                                  Steel box. Dimensions: 310 x 220 x 145 mm. approx.
                                  Front panel:
                                    16 Analog inputs.
                                      Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
                                      Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
                                    2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital inputs/outputs, configurable as inputs or outputs.
                                    Digital signal simulator. Analog signal simulator.
                                 Inside: Internal power supply of 12 and 5 V. Potentiometer.
                                 Back panel:Power supply connector. SCSI connector (for connecting with the data acquisition board).                                                               DAIB
                                 Connecting cables.


                           5.1.2) DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
                                  PCI board (National Instruments) to be placed in a                               For EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version:
                                  computer slot.                                                                    This is a similar version to the 1.25, with t h e
                                  For EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version:                                                        only difference that for this one, the sampling
                                   Analog inputs: 16. Sampling rate up to:                                          rate to 250,000 S/s .
                                   1,250,000 S/s.                                                                                                                                                   DAB
                                   Analog outputs: 2.
                                   Digital Input/Output: 24 inputs/outputs.




                          5.2) EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software:
                                It works as:
                                   -Digital oscilloscope.                            -Function generator.                                   -Transient recorder.
                                   -Multimeter.                                      -Spectrum analyzer.                                    -Logic analyzer
                                 Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different inputs and outputs.
                                 It stores acquired data in a file (16 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs, 24 digital inputs/outputs at the same
                                 time) for further analysis. Print screens and reports of the signals at any time. Quick capture in a period of
                                 time and posterior representation. Two signal generators, independent for sinusoidal, triangular, saw and
                                 square. Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
                                 Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
                                 Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
                                 Measurement, analysis, visualization, representation and report of results. All 16 input channels could be
                                 scaled to compare signal with different voltage levels.




                          More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
                                                                                                                                 Page 12
                                                                               issue:01/11




                          ELEMENTARY ELECTRONICS (10 CAI + CAL)

Ref: 0213-211/10S                                                                  1 / 3

ITEM          REFERENCE                          DESCRIPTION                 QTY.
         LIEBA                 BASIC ELECTRONICS AND ELECTRICITY
                               INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
  1      EBC-100               BASE UNIT, WITH BUILT IN POWER SUPPLY           1
  2      M4                    SEMICONDUCTORS II    MODULE                     1
  3      M4/SOF*               COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF         10
                               SEMICONDUCTORS II
  4      M4/CAL                COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR           10
                               SEMICONDUCTORS II (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
                               ANALYSIS)
  5      M6                    OSCILATORS MODULE                               1
  6      M6/SOF*               COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF         10
                               OSCILLATORS
  7      M6/CAL                COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR           10
                               OSCILLATORS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
                               ANALYSIS)
  8      M7                    OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS I MODULE                 1
  9      M7/SOF*               COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF         10
                               OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS
 10      M7/CAL                COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR           10
                               OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS (RESULTS CALCULATION
                               AND ANALYSIS)
 11      M8                    FILTERS MODULE                                  1
 12      M8/SOF*               COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF         10
                               FILTERS
 13      M8/CAL                COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR           10
                               FILTERS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
 14      M9                    POWER ELECTRONICS MODULE                        1
 15      M9/SOF*               COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF         10
                               POWER ELCTRONICS
 16      M9/CAL                COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR POWER     10
                               ELECTRONICS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
                               ANALYSIS)
 17      M10                   DIGITAL SYSTEMS AND CONVERTERS MODULE           1
 18      M10/SOF*              COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF         10
                               DIGITAL SYSTEMS AND CONVERTERS
 19      M10/CAL               COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR           10
                               DIGITAL SYSTEMS & CONVERTERS (RESULTS
                               CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
 20      M11                   DIGITAL ELECTRONICS FUNDAMENTALS MODULE         1
 21      M11/SOF *             COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF         10
                               DIGITAL ELECTRONICS FUNDAMENTALS
 22      M11/CAL               COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR           10
                               DIGITAL ELECTRONICS FUNDAMENTALS (RESULTS
                               CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
 23      M12                   BASIC COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS MODULE             1
Ref: 0213-211/10S                                                            2 / 3

ITEM         REFERENCE                   DESCRIPTION                   QTY.
 24      M12/SOF *       COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF         10
                         BASIC COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS
 25      M12/CAL         COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR BASIC     10
                         COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION
                         AND ANALYSIS)
 26      M13             BASIC SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS MODULE                1
 27      M13/SOF*        COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF         10
                         BASIC SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS
 28      M13/CAL         COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR BASIC     10
                         SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION
                         AND ANALYSIS)
 29      M14             OPTOELECTRONICS MODULE                          1
 30      M14/SOF*        COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF         10
                         OPTOELECTRONICS
 31      M14/CAL         COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR           10
                         OPTOELECTRONICS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
                         ANALYSIS)
 32      M18             THREE-PHASE CIRCUITS MODULE                     1
 33      M18/SOF *       COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF         10
                         THREE-PHASE
 34      M18/CAL         COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THREE-    10
                         PHASE CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
                         ANALYSIS)
 35      INS/SOF         CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE           1
                         (TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
 36      EDAS/VIS-0.25   EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL          1
                         INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (250.000 samples per
                         second), FORMED BY:
         VIS             VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope,          1
                         Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
                         Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
                         and Logic Generator)
         DAIB            DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX                  1
         DAB             DATA ACQUISITION BOARD                          1
         EDAS/SOF        DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE                       1
 37      EFAC            THREE DIMENSIONS PHYSICS SYSTEM (3D),
                         FORMED BY:
         FUB             BASE STRUCTURE AND ROBOT FOR THREE              1
                         DIMENSIONS PHYSICS SYSTEM
         EFAC/CIB        CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR THREE DIMENSIONS      1
                         PHYSICS SYSTEM (3D)
         DAB             DATA ACQUISITION BOARD                          1
         EFAC/CCSOF      COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA      1
                         MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR THREE DIMENSIONS
                         PHYSICS SYSTEM
         FCE             SET FOR ELECTRICAL FIELDS (3D) APPLICATION,     1
                         FORMED BY: SENSORS + ELEMENTS + COMPUTER
                         CONTROL, DATA ACQUISITION AND DATA
                         MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
         FCM             SET FOR MAGNETIC FIELDS (3D APPLICATION,        1
                         FORMED BY: SENSORS + ELEMENTS + COMPUTER
                         CONTROL, DATA ACQUISITION AND DATA
                         MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
 38      0211PARTS       COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                      1
Ref: 0213-211/10S                                                                       3 / 3

 ITEM        REFERENCE                             DESCRIPTION                    QTY.
  39      0211PA                   COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
  40      0211IYPM                 INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP                     1
  41      0211CAPRO                TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
  42      0211MANU                 DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
  43      0211TD                   TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.

Notes:
1) Multipost option:
       This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
       units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.

2)Supply conditions included:
       a) Technical conditions:

           - Laboratories adaptation.
           - Installation of all units supplied.
           - Starting up for all units.
           - Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
           - Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
           teaching techniques uses.
           - Technology transfer.
       b) Commercial conditions:

           - Packing.
           - Financing charges.
           - C.I.F. charges.
       c) Others conditions:


           - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit

                    .   Required services manual.
                    .   Assembly and installation manual.
                    .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                    .   Set in operation manual.
                    .   Safety norms manual.
                    .   Practices manual.
                    .   Maintenance manual.
                    .   Calibration manual.




            See Catalogues in next pages
2.1- Basic Electronics




                                                                                                                                                               2.- Electronics
 LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:

                                                                Laboratory structure

               2   Modules                                        1   Power Supply                                                2   Modules
           (power supply needed)                         FA-CO                                                                 (power supply needed)
                                   (M1)                                                                                (M9)




  (M2)                                                                                                                                                 (M10)
                                                                          or
                                                         EBC-100




                              (M16)                                                                                   (M11)

                                          3   CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
                                                                                                  Used
                                                                                                Teaching
 (M17)                                                                                         Technique                                               (M12)

                                                         INS/SOF.     Instructor Software
                                                                          +
                               (M3)                                                                                    (M13)
                                                                         M../SOF.
                                                          Student/Module Software


 (M4)                                     4   LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software                                                              (M14)
                                                               (Results Calculation and Analysis)
                                                                                                   Used
                                                                                                 Teaching
                                                                                                Technique



                                   (M5)                                                                               (M15)




                                                                                                                                                       (M31)
 (M6)

                                          5    EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
                                                        Virtual Instrumentation System
                                                                                                  Used                 (M60)
                                (M7)                                                            Teaching
                                                                                               Technique
                                                      DAIB.   Data acquisition interface box
 (M8)                                                                                                                                                  (M65)

                                                         DAB. Data acquisition board



                                                        EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and
                                                              Virtual Instrumentation
            Other modules                                             Software                                          Expansion Board       (M99)




The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Power supply + Module/s is the
minimum supply).

                                                         Some available Modules
 Basic Electricity:                            " M14. Optoelectronics.                              Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities:
   " M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits.       " M15. Development Module.                             " M99. Expansion Board.
   " M2. Alternating Current (A.C.)Circuits. Basic Electronics: Transducers:                             Some electronic sub-boards available:
   " M16. Electric Networks.                   " M41. Resistance Transducers.                               "M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
   " M17. Electromagnetism.                    " M43. Applications of Temperature.                          "M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
 Basic Electronics:                            " M44. Applications of Light.                                "M99-3. Function Generator.
   " M3. Semiconductors I.                     " M45. Linear Position and Force.                            "M99-4. AM Modulator.
   " M4. Semiconductors II.                    " M46. Environmental Measurements.                           "M99-5. AM Demodulator.
   " M5. Power Supplies.                       " M47. Rotational Speed & Position
   " M6. Oscillators.                                 Control.                                              * We can develop any electronic sub-board
   " M7. Operational Amplifiers.               " M48. Sounds Measurements.                                    according to the application required by
   " M8. Filters.                              " M49. Applications of Temperature and                         the customer.
   " M9. Power Electronics.                           Pressure.
   " M10. Digital Systems & Converters.      Basic Electronics: Control Electronics:
   " M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.    " M60. Analog/Digital Converters.
   " M12. Basic Combinational Circuits.        " M61. Digital/Analog Converters.
   " M13. Basic Sequential Circuits.           " M65. Control and Regulation.

 More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf

                                                                          Page 5                                                              www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                                2.1- Basic Electronics                         (continuation)

                         LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
       2.- Electronics
                                                                                1 Power Supply
Electronics

                         There are two choices for suppling the modules:
                         FA-CO. Power Supply
                                                                                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
                                                             Fixed outputs: + 5 V, ± 12 V, 1 A. Variable outputs: ± 12 V, 0.5 A. AC output: 12V. Outputs through either 2mm. contact terminals, or
                                                             through 25 pin CENTRONICS connectors. LED’s voltage indicators. Supply: 110/220V A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
                                                             This power supply FA-CO includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
                                                             Dimensions: 225x205x200mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
                                     or
                         EBC-100. Base Unit
                                                                                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
                                                             Hardware support and power supply. Modules supporting unit.
                                                             Variable outputs ± 12 V. Fixed outputs + 5V, + 12V, -12V, -5V. Supply: 110/220 V. A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz. Power through
                                                             CENTRONICS connector. This base unit EBC-100 includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
                                                             Dimensions: 410x298x107mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.


                                                                                                          2    Modules
                         These Modules have been designed for making practices using either the FA-CO Power Supply or the EBC-100 Base Unit. The Modules consist in a series of different circuits
                         which shall allow performing the corresponding exercises separately. All circuits are serigraphed on the surface of each module, thus permitting vision of their REAL components.
                         Almost all exercises/practices have special switches so that the teacher may SIMULATE CIRCUITRY FAILURE (faults), to be found by the Student. We provide eight manuals per
                         module. Connectors and cables for completing the exercises and practices are included. Dimensions (approx.) of each module: 300 x 210 x 45 mm. Weight: 300 gr.
                                                                                                       Basic Electricity
                         M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                             Measurement managing and checking                      10.-Study of Fault F2 in Resistors circuit.    18.- Study of Fault F2 in Wheatstone
                                                             instruments:                                           11.-Theoretical / practical exercises.              Bridge circuit.
                                                                 1.-Electronic instrumentation operation.       Resistors association and the Wheatstone           19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                                                    Use of multimeter.                          Bridge:                                           Kirchoff's laws:
                                                                 2.-Study of fault F1 in Resistance circuit.        12.-Voltage and current measurement            20.- Kirchoff's first law.
                                                                 3.-Study of fault F2 in Resistance circuit.             in a circuit with resistors connected     21.- Kirchoff's second law.
                                                                 4.-Theoretical / practical exercises.                   in series.                                22.- Fault study using Kirchoff's law.
                                                             Ohm's Law:                                             13.-Series/Parallel configuration study.       23.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                                                 5.-Ohm's Law verification.                         14.-The Wheatstone Bridge.                    Additional Possibilities:
                                                                 6.-Power calculation.                              15.-Study of Fault in Series Resistors            Voltage/Current dividers.
                                                                 7.-Theoretical / practical exercises.                   circuit.                                     Batteries and Switches.
                                                             Resistors: characteristics and types:                  16.-Study of Fault in Parallel Resistors          Power source in series and parallel.
                                                                 8.-Resistor measurements. Color code.                   circuit.                                     The Rheostat and Potentiometer.
                                                                    Ohmmeter.                                       17.-Study of Fault F1 in Wheatstone
                                                                 9.-Study of Fault F1 in Resistors circuit.              Bridge circuit.

                         M2. Alternating Current (A.C.) Circuits
                                                                                                                        PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                             Alternating signal characteristics.                       with the frequency.                        RLC Circuits:
                                                             Instruments:                                          14.-Study of faults in capacitors.              30.- Resistance-Capacitance Filters.
                                                                  1.- Waveforms study in A.C.                      15.-Reactive capacitance variations with        31.- Filters inductive resistance. Low Pass
                                                                  2.- Introduction of anomalies in the                 the capacitance.                                  and High- Pass filters.
                                                                      Wave form circuit.                           16.-A.C. capacitors in parallel.                32.- Exercises.
                                                                  3.- Study of Faults in the Waveform              17.-A.C. capacitors in series.                 Resonance:
                                                                      circuit.                                     18.-A.C. capacitors as voltage dividers.        33.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with low
                                                                  4.- Relation between peak values and             19.-Inductance in an A.C circuit.                     impedance source.
                                                                      RMS for sinusoidal waves.                    20.-Inductive reactance variations with         34.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
                                                                                                                                                                         circuit.
                                                                  5.- Resistance in a sinusoidal                       the inductance.                             35.- Study of Fault 2 in the resonance
                                                                      alternating current.                         21.-Inductors in series in an A.C. circuit.           Circuit.
                                                                  6.-Measurements using the                        22.-Exercises.                                  36.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with high
                                                                      oscilloscope.                            Basic theorems and capacitance and                        impedance source.
                                                                  7.- Voltage and current phase angles         inductance circuits:                                37.- Circuit frequency response and
                                                                      for resistors in sinusoidal                  23.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in               bandwidth.
                                                                      alternating current.                             series.                                     38.- A.C. R-L-C Circuits in series.
                                                                  8.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in series.         24.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in         39.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
                                                                  9.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in parallel.           parallel.                                         circuit.
                                                                10.- Exercises.                                    25.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in          40.- Exercises.
                                                             Behaviour of A.C. capacitors and inductors:               series.                                    The transformer:
                                                                11.- Capacitance with square waveform              26.-Study of Fault 1 in the Circuit #3.         41.- The transformer.
                                                                      and sinusoidal input current.                27.-Study of Fault 2 in the Circuit #3.         42.- The transformer with load.
                                                                12.- Inductance with square waveform               28.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in          43.- Current measurement in the
                                                                                                                                                                         secondary Transformer with Charge.
                                                                      and a sinusoidal input voltage.                  parallel.                                   44.- Exercises.
                                                                13.- Reactive reactance, Xc, variations            29.-Exercises.

                          M16. Electric Networks                                                                        PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                             Ohm’s law:                                           9.- Error study in the circuit, assembly.       Star-triangle transformation:
                                                               1.-Calculation of the internal resistance          10.-DC+AC assembly.                              17.- Resistance measurement between
                                                                   of a continuous source.                        11.-Theoretical/practical exercises.                    terminals. Delta| Y configurations.
                                                               2.-Error study in an internal resistance.        Thévenin’s and Norton’s theorems:                  18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                                               3.-Internal resistance calculation of an           12.-Thévenin and Norton equivalent              Wheatstone bridge:
                                                                   alternating source.                                circuits. Conversion. Kirchoff’s laws.       19.- Calibration of a Wheatstone bridge
                                                               4.-Theoretical/practical exercises.                                                                        fed by a DC source.
                                                             Electrical power:                                    13.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                                               5.-Power transferred by a DC source to           Superposition theorem:                             20.- Error study in the Wheatstone bridge
                                                                   load.                                          14.-Application of the Superposition                    circuit.
                                                               6.-Power transferred to a load by an AC                theorem.                                     21.- Wheatstone bridge calibration fed
                                                                   source.                                        15.-Error study in the Superposition                    by an AC source.
                                                               7.-Theoretical/practical exercises.                    circuit. Component values                    22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                                             Power supplies combination:                              modifications.                              Additional Possibilities:
                                                               8.-DC+DC assembly.                                 16.-Theoretical/practical exercises.               Millman’s Theorem.

                          M17. Electromagnetism                                                                         PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                              1.-Magnetic fields measurement.                     8.- Basic operation of the solenoid.                  continuous current motor.
                                                              2.-Induced electromotive force. Coil                9.- Fault study in the Solenoid circuit.         15.- Motor used as DC generator.
                                                                  Reactance calculation.                          10.-Basic operation of a relay.                  16.- Cemf.
                                                              3.-Exercises.                                       11.-Self-holding of the position of the          17.- Exercises.
                                                             Electromagnetic applications:                             contacts.                                  Stepping Motor:
                                                              4.-Mutual Inductance.                               12.-Fault study in the Relay circuit.            18.- Stepper motor working.
                                                              5.-Basic operation of the transformer               13.-Exercises.                                   19.- Fault study in Stepping motor circuit.
                                                              6.-Core effect in a transformer response.         Direct current motor:                              20.- Exercises.
                                                              7.-Fault study in the Transformer.                 14.-Characteristic Speed/Voltage of a

                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
                                                                                                               Page 6
2.1- Basic Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics                 (continuation)

LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:                               (continuation)




                                                                                                                                                                                       2.- Electronics
                                                                            2   Modules (continuation)
                                                                            Basic Electronics
 M3. Semiconductors I
                                                                                              PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                               Characteristics of the PN junction:                   The Zener diode:                                    15.- Study of the transistor as a switch.
                                1.- Study of the diode.                                9.- Voltage regulator with a Zener diode.         16.- Exercises.
                                2.- Fault Study in Diodes.                            10.- Study of faults in Zener circuit.            Common emitter amplifier:
                                3.- Exercises.                                        11.- Exercises.                                    17.- Study of the common emitter NPN
                               The diode as a rectifier element:                     Study and characteristics of the transistor:             amplifier.
                                4.- Half wave rectifier.                              12.- Study of the transistor.                      18.- Fault Study in Amplifier circuit.
                                5.- Study of faults in Rectifier circuit.             13.- Study of the fault in the transistor.         19.- Study of the common emitter PNP
                                6.- Bridge rectifier.                                14.- Exercises.                                          amplifier.
                                7.- Study of faults in bridge rectifier.             Transistor characteristics operating as a           20.- Exercises.
                                8.- Exercises.                                       switch:
 M4. Semiconductors II
                                                                                               PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                               Complementary transistors pair:                         7.- Exercises.                                   Analog switch:
                                1.- Complementary transistors pair.                  Differential amplifier:                             14.- Analog switch.
                                2.- Transistors pair with alternating signal.          8.- Differential amplifier.                       15.- Exercises.
                                3.- Fault study of the complementary                   9.- Fault study in the differential amplifier.   Multistage Amplifier. Direct coupling:
                                    Transistor pair.                                  10.- Exercises.                                    16.- Amplifier coupled directly.
                                4.- Exercises.                                       Study and characteristics of the JFET               17.- Fault study of an amplifier coupled
                               Darlington configuration:                             transistor:                                               directly.
                                5.- Darlington configuration.                         11.- JFET characteristics.                        18.- Exercises.
                                6.- Fault study of the Darlington                    12.- Fault study with the JFET transistor.
                                     configuration.                                  13.- Exercises.

 M5. Power Supplies
                                                                                       PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                               Rectification:                                          8.- Protection against overvoltages.              16.- Adjustable L200 regulator.
                                1.- Rectification.                                     9.- Study of the fault “Protection against        17.- Fault Study in adjustable L200.
                                2.- Bridge rectifier.                                      overcurrents”.                                18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                3.- Theoretical/practical exercises.                 10.- Theoretical/practical exercises.              Introduction to switched power supplies:
                               Fixed voltage sources:                                Symmetrical voltage power sources:                  19.- Switching technique.
                                4.- Power supply with the Zener diode.               11.- Symmetrical source; 78XX regulator.            20.- Switching technique. PWM.
                                5.- Stabilization through Zener and                  12.- Symmetrical source; 79XX regulator.            21.- Switching technique. Boost.
                                    Transistor.                                      13.- Theoretical/practical exercises.               22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                6.- Fault study in “Stabilization through            Voltage regulators with integrated circuits:       Additional Possibilities:
                                    Zener and Transistor”.                           14.- Adjustable regulator; LM317.                     Voltage Feedback.
                                7.- Protection against overcurrents.                 15.- Study of fault in adjustable LM317.              DC-DC converter.

 M6. Oscillators
                                                                                            PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES

                               Oscillators. RC and LC Nets:                           6.- Fault study the Wien bridge oscillator.       Astable multivibrator:
                                1.- RC net oscillator.                                7.- Exercises.                                     12.- Astable multivibrator.
                                2.- LC net oscillator.                               Colpitts oscillator. Hartley oscillator:            13.- Fault study with an Astable
                                3.- Faults study with RC and LC Net                   8.- Colpitts oscillator.                                mulltivibrator.
                                    oscillators.                                      9.- Hartley oscillator.                            14.- Exercises.
                                4.- Exercises.                                                                                          555 TIMER:
                                                                                     10.- Faults study with the Colpitts                 15.- 555 timer.
                               Wien bridge oscillator:                                    Oscillator.                                    16.- 555 timer fault study.
                                5.- Wien Bridge.                                     11.- Exercises.                                     17.- Exercises.

 M7. Operational Amplifiers
                                                                                           PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                              Operational amplifier characteristics:                   8.- Study of the non-inverting amplifier.  16.- Differential amplifier fault study.
                               1.- Operational amplifier study.                        9.- Voltage follower.                      17.- Exercises.
                               2.- Closed-loop output compensation                   10.- Fault study in the non-inverting Comparators:
                                   voltage.                                                Amplifier.                             18.- Comparator study.
                               3.- Operational amplifier fault study.                 11.- Exercises.                             19.- Comparators fault study.
                               4.- Exercises.                                        The adder amplifier:                         20.- Exercises.
                              The inverting amplifier:                                12.- Adding amplifier study.               Additional Possibilities:
                               5.- Inverting amplifier study.                         13.- Fault study in the adding amplifier.    Attenuator.
                               6.- Inverting amplifier fault study.                   14.- Exercises.                              Voltage Divider.
                               7.- Exercises.                                        The differential amplifier:                   Open-loop operation.
                              The non-inverting amplifier:                            15.- Differential amplifier study.

 M8. Filters
                                                                                            PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                              RC and LC filter responses:                           10.- Study of Error in RC filter with double T.      18.- Study of Faults in filters.
                               1.- Frequency response.                              11.- Exercises theoretical/practical.                19.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
                               2.- Low-pass filter.                                 Active filters:                                     Association of filters:
                               3.- High-pass filter.                                 12.- Low-pass filter.                               20.- Behaviour of the filter.
                               4.- LC Circuit.                                       13.- Low-pass filter with load and                  21.- Filter of distorted signal.
                               5.- Study of Error in Low-pass filter.                      operational amplifier.                        22.- Filter in cascade; low pass filter and
                                                                                     14.- High-pass filter.                                   high pass filter.
                               6.- Study of Error in High-pass filter.                                                                   23.- Filter in parallel.
                               7.- Exercises theoretical/practical.                  15.- High-pass filter with load and                 24.- Study of Error in filters.
                              T-shaped Filter:                                             operational amplifier.                        25.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
                               8.- Filter with double T link.                        16.- The attenuation is cumulative.                Additional Possibilities:
                               9.- Generator circuit of the signal S1.               17.- Use of Operational Amplifier.                   Band-Pass and Band-Stop Filters.

 M9. Power Electronics
                                                                                              PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                               The bipolar power transistor:                         The thyristor:                                      11.- Study of insulation circuits.
                                1.-Study of the power transistor.                      7.- Study of the thyristor.                       12.- Exercises.
                                2.-Study of faults in the power transistor.            8.- Study of the error of the thyristor.         The TRIAC:
                                3.-Exercises.                                          9.- Exercises.                                    13.- Study of the TRIAC.
                               The MOSFET transistor:                                The UJT transistor and trigger circuits of the      14.- Practical assembly of the TRIAC.
                                4.-Study of the MOSFET transistor.                   thyristor:                                          15.- Exercises.
                                5.-Study of faults in the MOSFET.                     10.- Study of the trigger circuits of the         Additional Possibilities:
                                6.-Exercises.                                                thyristor.                                  Half/Full wave control.
 More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
                                                                                     Page 7                                                                       www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                    2.1- Basic Electronics                         (continuation)

                  LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:                       (continuation)
2.- Electronics

                                                                                            2    Modules (continuation)
                                                                                        Basic Electronics        (continuation)

                  M10. Digital Systems and Converters
                                                                                                            PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                 Analog switching. The bistable, astable           9.- Theoretical/practical exercises.               17.- Error Study in the analog integrator.
                                                 and monostable family:                          Behaviour of Binary/BCD Counters & 7-                18.- Triangular wave generation.
                                                  1.-Characteristics of an analog switch         segments Displays:                                    19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                                     chip.                                       10.- Characteristics of Binary UP/DOWN               A/D and D/A conversion:
                                                  2.-Study of the error F1 in the Analog               Counter 74LS193 and 7-Segment                   20.- D/A Converter.
                                                     Multiplexer.                                      Display.                                        21.- A/D Converter.
                                                  3.-Study of the errors in the Analog           11.- Error Study in the binary counter.               22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                                     Multiplexer.                                12.- C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e B C D   Applications:
                                                  4.-Characteristics of an S-R type Latch              UP/DOWN counter and 7-Segment                   23.- Random number generator.
                                                     Integrated circuit.                               Display.                                        24.- Measuring the time between two
                                                  5.-Error Study in the bistable.                13.- Error Study in the BCD counter.                       events.
                                                  6.-Characteristics of an integrated            14.- Theoretical/practical exercises.                 25.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
                                                     astable circuit.                            Comparators and analog integrators:
                                                  7.-Error Study in the astable.                 15.- Characteristics of an analog                    Additional Possibilities:
                                                  8.-Characteristics of an integrated                  comparator.                                     Synchronous/Asynchronous Counter.
                                                     Monostable circuit.                         16.- Analog integrator.


                  M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals
                                                                                                            PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                 Numbers systems:                                10.- Fault study in TTL circuit.                     Others types of integrated gates:
                                                  1.- Voltage measurement in a circuit of        11.- Fault study in Logic Gates.                      20.- Study of simple operations with a
                                                      sources.                                   12.- Exercises.                                             Schmitt Trigger inverter.
                                                  2.- Fault study in the source circuit.         CMOS gates:                                           21.- Operation study of a three-state
                                                  3.- Exercises.                                 13.- Basic function gates.                                  buffer.
                                                 Logical circuits:                               14.- Fault study in CMOS circuit.                     22.- Study of the fault in the Circuit #7.
                                                  4.- Logical Diode.                             15.- Exercises.                                       23.- Exercises.
                                                  5.- Fault study in Sources.                    Boolean Algebra and logical functions:               Additional Possibilities:
                                                  6.- Logic with transistor and diodes.          16.- Study of use of Circuit #3.                       JK Flip-Flop.
                                                  7.- Fault study in transistor/diode circuit.   17.- Exercises.                                        Control of Data Bus.
                                                  8.- Exercises.                                 Open collector gates:
                                                 TTL gates:                                      18.- Study of the use of Circuit #5.
                                                  9.- Basic function gates.                      19.- Exercises.

                  M12. Basic Combinational Circuits
                                                                                                        PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                Encoders:                                         8.- Study of the errors in the multiplexers.        Arithmetic and logic operations:
                                                 1.- Study of an encoder.                         9.- Exercises.                                       16.- Study of an adder.
                                                 2.- Fault study in the encoder.                 Demultiplexers:                                       17.- Study of the error in the arithmetic
                                                 3.- Exercises.                                  10.- Study of a demultiplexer.                             and logic operations.
                                                Decoders:                                        11.- Study of the errors in demultiplexers.           18.- Study of a parity generator.
                                                 4.- Study of a decoder.                         12.- Exercises.                                       19.- Study of the error in the Parity
                                                 5.- Fault study in the decoder.                 Digital Comparators:                                       generator.
                                                 6.- Exercises.                                  13.- Study of a comparator.                           20.- Exercises.
                                                Multiplexers:                                    14.- Study of the errors in a comparator.
                                                 7.- Study of a multiplexer.                     15.- Exercises.

                   M13. Basic Sequential Circuits
                                                                                                           PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                Bistables:                                         7.- Study of faults of the Shift registers.        13.- Study of errors of the Synchronised
                                                 1.- Bistables.                                    8.- Exercises.                                          Sequential circuits.
                                                 2.- Bistable S-R using NAND gates.              Counters:                                            14.- Exercises.
                                                 3.- Practical performance.                        9.- Practice of the Counters.                      Memories:
                                                 4.- Study of error in the Bistables.            10.- Study of faults of the Counters.                15.- Exercises.
                                                 5.- Exercises.                                  11.- Exercises.
                                                Shift registers:                                 Synchronised sequential circuits:
                                                 6.- Shift registers.                            12.- Practice of the Synchronised.



                  M14. Optoelectronics
                                                                                                           PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                Light transmitters and liquid crystal display    Photo-conducting cells:                               11.- Fault study using fibre optics.
                                                (LCD):                                             6.- Light dependent resistors.                      12.- Exercises.
                                                 1.- Light transmitters.                           7.- Alarm.                                         Infrared:
                                                 2.- Bar graph.                                    8.- Fault study on the photo-conducting             13.- Circuit with infrared diodes.
                                                 3.- LCD display and 7-segment display.                 cell.                                          14.- Fault study of the infrared diodes.
                                                 4.- Fault Study in light transmitters and         9.- Exercises.                                      15.- Exercises.
                                                     liquid crystal display.                     Fibre optics:
                                                 5.- Exercises.                                   10.- Fibre optics practice.

                  M15. Development Module
                                                                                                        MAIN FEATURES
                                                This is a module to build and implement            Logical source.
                                                student’s own circuits, it consists on:            Set of potentiometers.
                                                 Development board.                                Pulse generator and inverters.
                                                 Power supply connector.                           Interrupter.
                                                 Digital visual display unit.                      Clock.

                  More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
                                                                                                  Page 8
2.1- Basic Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics                 (continuation)

LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:                           (continuation)




                                                                                                                                                                            2.- Electronics
                                                                              2    Modules (continuation)
                                                                     Basic Electronics:Transducers
 M41. Resistance Transducers
                                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES

                                1.- Linearly sliding potentiometer.                 3.- Rotary coil potentiometer.
                                2.- Rotary carbon-track potentiometer.              4.- Precision servo-potentiometer.




 M43. Applications of Temperature
                                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                               The integrated circuit temperature                        Temperature Dependent Resistance             used in an alarm circuit (double
                               transducer:                                               (T.D.R) transducer.                          thermistor).
                                 1.- Characteristics of an integrated              The N.T.C (Negative Temperature              The “K” type thermocouple temperature
                                     temperature circuit.                          Coefficient) thermistor:                     thermistor:
                                 2.- Construction of a digital thermometer.          4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C              6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
                               The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:                   thermistor.                                        thermopar.
                                3.- Characteristics of a platinum                    5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor



 M44. Applications of Light
                                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                1.- Photovoltaic Cell.                              4.- Characteristics of a phototransistor.    7.- Photoconductive Cell.
                                2.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell.         5.- Photodiode PIN.                          8.- Luminous intensity detector.
                                3.- Phototransistor.                                6.- Characteristics of a PIN photodiode.




 M45. Linear Position and Force

                                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                1.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable            2.- Characteristics of a Variable            3.-The characteristics of a strain gauge
                                    Differential Transformer (LVDT).                    Resistance.                                 Transducer.




 M-46. Environmental Measurements
                                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                1.- Characteristics of Air flow Sensor.              3.- Characteristics of Humidity Sensor.
                                2.- Characteristics of Air pressure
                                   Sensor.




 M-47. Rotational Speed and Position Control
                                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                1.- Characteristics of a slotted opto                3.- Characteristics of an inductive         5.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent
                                    transducer and its applications for                  transducer.                                 Magnet tachogenerator.
                                    counting and speed measurement.
                                2.- Characteristics of the reflective                4.- Characteristics of a half effect
                                    opto-transducer.                                     transducer.




 M-48. Sounds Measurements
                                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                1.- Characteristics of a Dynamic                     2.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic       3.- Theoretical/Practical questions.
                                   Microphone.                                           Receiver.



 M-49. Applications of Temperature and Pressure
                                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                The integrated circuit temperature                       Temperature Dependent Resistance The “K” type thermocouple temperature
                               transducer:                                               (T.D.R) transducer.                    thermistor:
                                 1.- Characteristics of an integrated              The N.T.C (Negative Temperature                6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
                                      temperature circuit.                         Coefficient) thermistor:                           thermocouple.
                                 2.- C o n s t r u c t i o n o f a d i g i t a l    4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C thermistor. Pressure transducer:
                                      thermometer.                                  5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor used    7.- Characteristic of a pressure
                               The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:                         in an alarm circuit (double                   transducer.
                                 3.- Characteristics of a platinum                       thermistor).


 More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf

                                                                                    Page 9                                                                www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                      2.1- Basic Electronics                     (continuation)

                         LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:                     (continuation)
       2.- Electronics
Electronics


                                                                                                  2   Modules (continuation)
                                                                                         Basic Electronics: Control Electronics

                         M60. Analog/Digital Converters

                                                                                                            PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES

                                                       1.- Binary Slope Converter.                     5.- Flash Converter.

                                                       2.- Integrated converter.

                                                       3.- Simple Slope Converter.

                                                       4.- Double Slope Converter.




                         M-61. Digital/Analog Converters

                                                                                                            PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                       1.- Weighted Resistance Converter.               5.- Pulse - Width Modulation Converter.
                                                        2.- Ladder Converter R/2R.
                                                        3.- Integrated Converter.
                                                        4.- Series Blocking Converter.




                          M-65. Control and Regulation
                                                                                                            PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                        1.- Study in open loop Nº1: Proportional       6.- Study in open loop Nº 6: Block              9.-Potentiometer adjustment.
                                                            block.                                        composition: Negative zero and
                                                        2.- Study in open loop Nº2: Integrator            Negative Pole.
                                                            block.                                     7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by
                                                        3.- Study in open loop Nº3: Simple pole.           means of Optimum Quantitative.1st
                                                        4.- Study in open loop Nº4: 2nd order              order system.
                                                            plant.                                     8.-Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by
                                                        5.- Study in open loop Nº5: Non lineal             means of Optimum Quantitative.
                                                            Plants: Limitation and Hysteresis.             2nd order system.




                                                                                     Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities

                         M-99. Expansion Board

                                                       The aim of the M99 Expansion Board is to         - Some electronic sub-boards already
                         Example of an electronic
                           sub-board put in the        provide generic support to up to 8                  developed:
                               M99 Board
                                                       electronic sub-boards, each one with its             M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
                                                       own specific functionality, customized to            M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
                                                       client necessities.
                                                                                                            M99-3. Function Generator.
                                                       The sub-boards have to be inserted in any of
                                                       the eight 32-pin female connectors                   M99-4. AM Modulator.
                                                       reserved for it on the M99 Board.                    M99-5. AM Demodulator.
                                                       There are connectors, in both the sub-               * We can design and include any
                                                       boards and on the M99, through which one               electronic circuit or application on a
                                                       can access the internal input/output data              sub-board according to customer
                                                       points, to take measures and get                       requirements. This way, any
                                                       information about the practice. Thus, the              Modules can be complemented with
                                                       student carries out the pedagogical aims.              extra circuits, in extra sub-boards.
                                                       In the upper right corner of the M99 board             The sub-boards can also be
                                                       there are 14 connectors for power supply.              purchased independently to the
                                                       Thanks to them, the sub-boards can be                  modules, thus giving total
                                                       supplied with different voltage intensities.           freedom to customers in the
                                                       Either ”FA-CO” Power Supply or “EBC-                   acquisition of circuits.
                                                       100” Base unit with built-in power supply,
                                                       are required to work with the M99
                                                       Expansion Board, like with any other
                                                       Module.




                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf

                                                                                                       Page 10
2.1- Basic Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics                         (continuation)

LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:                                   (continuation)




                                                                                                                                                                                               2.- Electronics
                                                                                           Software
                                                         3   CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:

                                                                                                With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
                                                                                                consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
             Module
        (electronic board)
                                               +                                                Student/Module Software (M../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
                                                                                                knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
                                  Instructor      Student/Module                                These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
                                   Software          Software                                   information on the subject of study.


 With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
 Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
      - Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
      - Create easily new entries or delete them.
      - Create data bases with student information.
      - Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
      - Print reports.
      - Develop own examinations.
      - Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
     ...and many other facilities.

 The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
 configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.

 M../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module
 Software).
 It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
 Each module has its own Student Software package.
       - The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
       - Each Software Package contains:
         Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
         understanding of the studied subject.
         Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
         been understood.
         Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
         showing how to complete the circuits and get the right information from
         them.
         Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
                                                        Available Student/Module Software Packages:
 Basic electricity                                            -M8/SOF. Filters.                                               -M44/SOF. Applications of light.
 -M1/SOF. Direct Current Circuits(D.C.).                      -M9/SOF. Power Electronics.                                     -M45/SOF. Linear Position and Force.
 -M2/SOF. Alternating Current Circuits(A.C.).                 -M10/SOF. Digital Systems and Converters.                       -M46/SOF. Environmental Measurement .
 -M16/SOF. Electric Networks.                                 -M11/SOF. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.                     -M47/SOF. Rotational Speed and Position Control.
 -M17/SOF. Electromagnetism.                                  -M12/SOF. Basic Combinational Circuits.                         -M48/SOF. Sound Measurements.
 Basic Electronic:                                            -M13/SOF. Basic Sequential Circuits.                            -M49/SOF. Applications of Temperature and Pressure.
 -M3/SOF. Semiconductors I.                                   -M14/SOF. Optoelectronics.                                      Basic Electronic: Control Electronics:
 -M4/SOF. Semiconductors II.                                  -M15/SOF. Development Module.                                   -M60/SOF. Analog/Digital Converters.
 -M5/SOF. Power Supplies.                                     Basic Electronic: Transducers:                                  -M61/SOF. Digital/Analog Converters.
 -M6/SOF. Oscillators.                                        -M41/SOF. Resistance transducers.                               -M65/SOF. Control and Regulation.
 -M7/SOF. Operational Amplifiers.                             -M43/SOF. Applications of Temperature.

                                        4   LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
 This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
 different areas of science: Basic Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.
 On the Basic Electronics Area, it can be used with the M1 to M17 modules. These modules cover every subject in Basic Electricity and Electronics, both analog and digital.
 CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
 With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.




  Simply insert the experimental data, with a single   Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
  click CAL will perform the calculations.             be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
                                                       set of lab. exercises.

 Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
 information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:




It provides a handy option to avoid using different            ...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
reference sources while in progress. For example: the        tables.                                                Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
values of Physical constants, their symbols and right                                                               any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
names, conversion factors...
 More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
                                                                                          Page 11                                                                       www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                                                   2.1- Basic Electronics                      (continuation)

                         LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:                                                (continuation)
       2.- Electronics

                                                                                                                            Data Acquisition
Electronics


                                                              5   EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/Virtual Instrumentation System



                                                            Data acquisition
                                                                                                                              EDAS/VIS is the perfect link between the electronic modules and the PC. With the EDAS/VIS
                            1                   Cables to
                                                interface      and virtual
                                                            instrumentation
                                                                                                                              system, information from the modules is sent to the computer. There, it can be analyzed and
                                     2
                           Connection                           software                                                      represented.




                                                                                           Data acquisition
                             points                                                                                           We easily connect the Data Acquisition Interface Box (DAIB) to the modules with the supplied
                                    3




                                                                                               board
                            4                                Data acquisition    Cable                                        cables (connection points are placed in the modules). Like any other hardware, the DAIB is
                                                              interface box        to
                                   “n”                                          computer                      Student         connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
                                                                                                                post
                                Module                                                                                        Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software (specific for every module), the student can get
                           (electronic board)
                                                                                                                              the results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with
                                                                                                                              them.



                         This EDAS/VIS System includes DAIB + DAB + EDAS/VIS-SOF:
                          5.1)Hardware:
                           5.1.1)DAIB. Data Acquisition Interface Box:
                                  Steel box. Dimensions: 310 x 220 x 145 mm. approx.
                                  Front panel:
                                    16 Analog inputs.
                                      Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
                                      Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
                                    2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital inputs/outputs, configurable as inputs or outputs.
                                    Digital signal simulator. Analog signal simulator.
                                 Inside: Internal power supply of 12 and 5 V. Potentiometer.
                                 Back panel:Power supply connector. SCSI connector (for connecting with the data acquisition board).                                                               DAIB
                                 Connecting cables.


                           5.1.2) DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
                                  PCI board (National Instruments) to be placed in a                               For EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version:
                                  computer slot.                                                                    This is a similar version to the 1.25, with t h e
                                  For EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version:                                                        only difference that for this one, the sampling
                                   Analog inputs: 16. Sampling rate up to:                                          rate to 250,000 S/s .
                                   1,250,000 S/s.                                                                                                                                                   DAB
                                   Analog outputs: 2.
                                   Digital Input/Output: 24 inputs/outputs.




                          5.2) EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software:
                                It works as:
                                   -Digital oscilloscope.                            -Function generator.                                   -Transient recorder.
                                   -Multimeter.                                      -Spectrum analyzer.                                    -Logic analyzer
                                 Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different inputs and outputs.
                                 It stores acquired data in a file (16 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs, 24 digital inputs/outputs at the same
                                 time) for further analysis. Print screens and reports of the signals at any time. Quick capture in a period of
                                 time and posterior representation. Two signal generators, independent for sinusoidal, triangular, saw and
                                 square. Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
                                 Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
                                 Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
                                 Measurement, analysis, visualization, representation and report of results. All 16 input channels could be
                                 scaled to compare signal with different voltage levels.




                          More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
                                                                                                                                 Page 12
                                                                                 issue:01/11



                             TRANSDUCERS AND SENSORS MODULE

Ref: 0230                                                                            1 / 2

ITEM             REFERENCE                      DESCRIPTION                    QTY.
  1         SAIT                TRANSDUCERS AND INSTRUMENTATION TRAINER          1
  2         SAIT/SOF*           COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF           1
                                TRANSDUCERS AND INSTRUMENTATION
  3         SAIT/CAL            COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR             1
                                TRANSDUCERS AND INSTRUMENTATION (RESULTS
                                CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
  4         BS                  MODULAR SYSTEM FOR THE STUDY OF SENSORS,
                                COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
            BSPC                BASIC UNIT WITH COMPUTER CONTROLLED              1
                                INTERFACE FOR MODULAR SYSTEM FOR THE STUDY
                                OF SENSORS
            DAB                 DATA ACQUISITION BOARD                           1
            BS/CCSOF            COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA       1
                                MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR MODULAR SYSTEM FOR
                                THE STUDY OF SENSORS
            BS-1                VIBRATIONS AND /OR DEFORMATION MODULE            1
            BS-2                TEMPERATURE MODULE                               1
            BS-3                PRESSURE MODULE                                  1
            BS-4                FLOW MODULE                                      1
            BS-5                OVENS MODULE                                     1
            BS-6                LIQUID LEVEL MODULE                              1
            BS-7                TACHOMETER MODULE                                1
            BS-8                PROXIMITY MODULE                                 1
            BS-9                PNEUMATIC MODULE                                 1
            BS-10               LIGHT TEST MODULE                                1
  5         BS/SOF*             COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF           1
                                MODULAR SYSTEM FOR THE STUDY OF SENSORS
  6         BS/CAL              COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE         1
                                STUDY OF SENSORS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
                                ANALYSIS) OF THE MODULES: BS-1 VIBRATIONS,
                                BS-2 TEMPERATURE, BS-3 PRESSURE, BS-4 FLOW,
                                BS-5 OVENS, BS-6 LIQUID LEVEL, BS-7
                                TACHOMETER, BS-8 PROXIMITY & BS-9 PNEUMATIC
  7         INS/SOF             CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE            1
                                (TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
  8         EDAS/VIS-0.25       EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL           1
                                INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (250.000 samples per
                                second), FORMED BY:
            VIS                 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope,           1
                                Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
                                Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
                                and Logic Generator)
            DAIB                DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX                   1
            DAB                 DATA ACQUISITION BOARD                           1
            EDAS/SOF            DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE                        1
  9         0230PARTS           COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                       1
 10         0230PA              COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
 11         0230IYPM            INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP                     1
 12         0230CAPRO           TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
 13         0230TD              TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
 14         0230MANU            DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
 Ref: 0230                                                                  2 / 2



Notes:

1) Multipost option:
     This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
     number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
      a) Technical conditions included:

             -   Laboratories adaptation.
             -   Installation of all units supplied.
             -   Starting up for all units.
             -   Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
           - Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
           the teaching techniques uses.
           - Technology transfer.
      b) Commercial conditions:
           - Packing.
           - Financing charges.
           - C.I.F. charges.
      c) Others conditions:
             - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:

                   .   Required services manual.
                   .   Assembly and installation manual.
                   .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                   .   Set in operation manual.
                   .   Safety norms manual.
                   .   Practices manual.
                   .   Maintenance manual.
                   . Calibration manual.




             See Catalogues in next pages
                                                                                                                                                2.3- Transducers and Sensors                             (continuation)

                         SAIT. Transducers and Instrumentation Trainer
       2.- Electronics
Electronics


                                                                                                        Optional:



                                                                                                 EDAS/VIS.
                                                                                      EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
                                                                                       Virtual Instrumentation System




                                                                                                                             Data Acquisition
                                                                                                                 Data          and Virtual
                                                                             Data Acquisition Interface Box    Acquisition   Instrumentation
                                                                                                                 Board           Software




                                     SAIT. Trainer

                                        SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                                      PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                         The SAIT trainer shows didactically the function principles            1.- Basic Control Systems description.                         Linear Position transducers.
                         of the transducers most used in industry. It is divided into
                                                                                                Characteristics of the Control System:                         40.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable Differential
                         two parts: the lower part, in which all the input and output                                                                               Transformer (LVDT).
                                                                                                2.- Characteristics of an ON/OFF temperature
                         transducers are found, while in the upper part, the system
                                                                                                     control System.                                           41.- Characteristics of a Variable Resistance.
                         of signal conditioning and those of instrumentation are
                                                                                                3.- Characteristics of an ON/ OFF Lighting System.             42.- Characteristics of a Strain gauge Transducer.
                         found; the electrical and pneumatic power supplies are
                         housed in its interior.                                                4.- Investigation of the Characteristics of a Positional       Transducers for Environmental Measurement
                                                                                                     Control System.                                           Applications:
                         Input Transducers:
                                                                                                5. - Proportional Control.                                     43.- Characteristics of a air flow transducer.
                           Resistance Transducers for applications in angular or
                           linear position:                                                     6.- Proportional+Integral Control.                             44.- Characteristics of a pressure sensor.
                              Linearly sliding potentiometer. Rotary carbon-track               7. - Proportional+DerivateControl.                             45.- Characteristics of a humidity sensor.
                              potentiometer. Rotary coil potentiometer. Precision               8. - Proportional+Integral+Derivate Control.                   Rotational Velocity Transducers or Position Measuring
                              servo- potentiometer. The Wheatstone Bridge circuit.              9. - Characteristics of a Speed Control System.                Applications:
                           Applications of temperature:                                         10.- Operation in Open Loop.                                   46.- Characteristics of a slotted opto-transducers and its
                                                                                                11.- Operation in Closed Loop, Proportional Control.                applications for counting and speed measurement.
                              NTC (Negative Temperature Coefficient)
                              Thermistors. RTD Sensor (Platinum Transducer with                 12.- Proportional+Integral Control.                            47.- Characteristics of the reflective optotransducers
                                                                                                                                                                    and Gray code disk.
                              Temperature dependent Resistance). Temperature                    13.- Proportional+Integral+Derivate Control.
                              sensor IC “Integrated Circuit LM 335”. Type “K”                                                                                  48.- Characteristics of an inductive transducer.
                                                                                                Display devices:
                              Thermocouples.                                                                                                                   49.- Characteristics of a Hall effect transducer.
                                                                                                14.- Application of the Timer/Counter as a meter of
                           Applications of light:                                                    time.                                                     50.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent magnet
                              Photovoltaic Cell. Phototransistor. Photodiode PIN.                                                                                   Tachogenerator.
                                                                                                15.- Application of the Timer/Counter as a simple counter.
                              Photoconductive Cell.                                                                                                            Transducers for Measuring Sound:
                                                                                                16.- Application of the Timer/Counter as rev-counter or
                           Linear position and force:                                                frequency-meter.                                          51.- Characteristics of a Dynamic Microphone.
                              Linear Variable Differential Transformer LVDT.                    17.- Characteristics of an L.E.D. bargraph display unit.       52.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic receiver.
                              Extensiometric Transducer.                                        18.- Characteristic of a Mobile Coil Meter.                    Transducers for Sound Output:
                           Environmental measurements:                                          19.- Comparison of Digital, Bargraph and Mobile Coil           53.- Characteristics of the mobile coil loudspeaker.
                              Air flow Sensor. Air pressure Sensor. Humidity sensor.                 meters.                                                   54.- Characteristics of a Buzzer.
                           Rotational speed and position control:                               20.- To widen the voltage index of the B. M. meter.            Output Transducer for Linear or Angular Movement:
                              Slotted optoelectronic Sensor. Opto-reflective                    Variable Resistance transducers in angle or linear             55.- Characteristics of a D.C. Solenoid.
                              Sensor. Inductive sensor. Hall effect Sensor.                     arrangement:                                                   56.- Characteristics of a D.C. Relay.
                              Permanent D.C. magnet tachogenerator.                             21.- Variation of the Output Voltage for a                     57.- Characteristics of a Solenoid air valve.
                           Sound measurements:                                                       Potentiometer used as a Position transducer.              58.- Characteristics of a Permanent Magnet Motor.
                              Dynamical microphone. Ultrasonic receiver.                        22.- The Buffer as compensator for the effect of the load      Signal Conditioning Circuits:
                         Visualization Devices:                                                      on the output voltage of a potentiometer.                 59.- Characteristics of the Direct Current amplifiers 1,
                              Timing device/ counter with LED display. Graphic bar              23.- Servo potentiometer. Variation of the output                   2 and x100.
                              visualizer. Mobile coil voltmeter.                                     voltage with respect to its position.                     60.- Characteristics of a current amplifier and
                         Output Transducers:                                                    24.- Measuring the Resistance using a Wheatstone                    application of a buffer amplifier.
                              Electrical Resistance. Incandescent Lamp.                              Bridge Circuit.                                           61.- Characteristics of Power and Buffer Amplifiers.
                           Applications for the sound output:                                   25.- Measuring the Voltage using “Null Balance”                62.- Characteristics of an Inverter Amplifier.
                              Buzzing (Buzzer). Mobile coil loud speaker. Ultrasonic                 Procedures (Method1).
                                                                                                                                                               63.- Characteristics of a Differential Amplifier.
                              transmitter.                                                      26.- Measuring Voltages using “Null Balance”
                                                                                                     Procedures (Method 2).Measuring voltages                  Signal Converter Circuits:
                           Applications of linear or angular motion:
                                                                                                     smaller than the normal available voltage.                64.- Characteristics of a Voltage to Current Converter.
                              D.C. Soleinod. D.C. Relay. Solenoid Valve.
                                                                                                27.- Measuring Voltages using “Null Balance”                   65.- Characteristics of a Current to Voltage Converter.
                              Permanent Magnet D.C. Motor.
                                                                                                     Procedures (Method 2).Measuring voltages                  66.-Characteristics of a Voltage to Frequency
                         Signal Conditioners:                                                        greater than the normal voltage.                               Converter.
                              D.C. Amplifiers. A.C. Amplifier. Power Amplifier.
                                                                                                Transducers for Applications of Temperature                    67.-Characteristics of a Frequency to Voltage
                              Current Amplifier. Buffers. Inverting Amplifier.                  Measurement:                                                        Converter.
                              Differential amplifier. V/F and F/V Converters. V/I
                                                                                                28.- Characteristics of an Integrated Temperature Circuit.     68.- Characteristics of a Full Wave Rectifier.
                              and I/V Converters. Full Wave Rectifier. Hysteresis
                                                                                                29.- Construction of a Digital Thermometer using the           Comparators, Oscillator and Filters:
                              convertible Comparator. Electronic switch. Oscillator                  facilities of the TRANSDUCER TRAINER.
                              40 kHz. Filter 40 kHz. Time-constant convertible                                                                                 69.- Characteristics of a Comparator.
                                                                                                30.- Characteristics of a Platinum Temperature                 70.- Characteristics of an Alarm Oscillator circuit.
                              Low Pass Filter.                                                       Dependent Resistance (T.D.R.) Transducer.
                              Circuit with Mathematical Operation: Adding                                                                                      71.- Characteristics of an Electronic Switch.
                                                                                                31.- T h e N . T. C . ( N e g a t i v e Te m p e r a t u r e
                              amplifier. Integrator with different time constants.                   coefficient)Thermistor.                                   72.- Characteristics of the Oscillator of 40 kHz.
                              Differentiator with different time constants.                     32.- Characteristics of an N.T.C. Thermistor                   73.- Characteristics of Filters.
                              Instrumentation Amplifier. Circuit SAMPLE & HOLD.                      (Resistance measuring method).                            Circuits that carry out Mathematical Operations:
                              Amplifiers with gain control and offset.                          33.- Characteristics of the N.T.C. Thermistor used in an       74.- Characteristics of a Adding Amplifier.
                         Furthermore it contains a linearly mounted system of a                      alarm circuit (double thermistor).                        75.- Characteristics of an Integrator.
                         D.C. motor, tachodynamo, reflective, slotted opto-                     34.- Characteristics of a Type “K” Thermocouple.               76.- Characteristics of a Differentiator Circuit.
                         sensors to detect the absolute and incremental position.                    Transducers for Light Measuring Applications:             77.- Characteristics of a Sample and Hold Circuit.
                         Cables.                                                                35.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell.
                         Manuals: 8 manuals supplied.                                           36.- Characteristics of a photo-transistor.
                         Dimensions (approx.): 400 x 400 x 300 mm.                              37.- Luminous intensity detector.
                         Weight: 10 Kg.
                                                                                                38.-The P  .I.N. Photodiode.
                         More information in:                                                   39.- Characteristics of a P .I.N. Photodiode.
                         www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
                         electronics/transducerssensors/SAIT.pdf
                                                                                                                                  Page 22
                                                                                                                                            2.3- Transducers and Sensors
                         BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:
       2.- Electronics
Electronics


                                  2   Test Modules                                                 1   Base Units:                                                              2   Test Modules
                                (to be used with Base Units)                             (common for all test modules type “BS”)                                              (to be used with Base Units)

                          BS1                                                                                                                                                                            BS6
                                                                                       BSPC. Computer Controlled Base Unit
                                                                                                                                                     Teaching
                                                                                                                                                    Technique
                                                                                                                                                       used

                                                                                                                           SCADA.
                                                                                                                 EDIBON Computer Control System



                                                                                                          Base
                                                                                                          Unit
                                                                                                                                                             Computer
                                                                                                                                                             (not included
                         BS2                                                                                      Data Acquisition   Software for:           in the supply)
                                                                                                                      Board          - Computer Control
                                                                                                                                     - Data Acquisition
                                                                                                                                     - Data Management
                                                                                                                                                                                                             BS7



                                                                                                         OR

                                                                                       BSUB. Base Unit (non computer controlled).

                          BS3
                                                                                                                                                                                                             BS8




                          BS4
                                                                                                                                                                                                             BS9




                          BS5

                                                                                                                                                                              Other modules




                         “BS” System includes a set of electronic components with a twofold purpose: to control the signal produced by the transducers, and to evaluate and quantify it.
                         Sensors or transducers are common elements in the state of our technology. Therefore this SYSTEM has been developed to show the basic principles of different types
                         of sensors and their way of processing signals.
                         This system consists of:
                         1 Base Unit, to control the system:
                                 Option 1: BSPC. Computer Controlled Base Unit, including EDIBON Computer Control System. OR
                                 Option 2: BSUB. Base Unit (non computer controlled).
                         2 Test Modules:

                                 BS1. Vibration and/or Deformation Test         BS4.   Flow Test Module.                                                  BS8. Proximity Test Module.
                                      Module.                                   BS5.   Ovens Test Module.                                                 BS9. Pneumatic Test Module.
                                 BS2. Temperature Test Module.                  BS6.   Liquid Level Test Module.
                                 BS3. Pressure Test Module.                     BS7.   Tachometers Test Module.


                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf

                          Non computer controlled version available.
                                                                                                        Page 18
2.3- Transducers and
2.1- Basic Electronics Sensors                           (continuation)




                                                                                                                                                                                  2.- Electronics
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:                 (continuation)

                                                                          1   Base Units
 BSPC. Computer Controlled Base Unit
                                                                     SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
                              Unit to control the system. Common for the different test modules type “BS”. Elements of the unit are included in a stainless steel box. In the
                              back panel of the box, we can find the outlet and the general switch of the unit for its operation. In the front panel there are two masks with
                              all type of signal conditioners, and even an analogical voltmeter.
                              Amplifiers: Several amplifier circuits of DC are included in the Base Unit, but only three are used specifically for the amplifiers applications:
                              Amplifier 1, Amplifier 2, Amplifier 3. AC amplifier. Power amplifier. Current amplifier. Two buffer amplifiers. Inverter amplifier. Two
                              circuits of differential amplifiers are supplied.
                              Signal Converters Circuits: Converter from Voltage to Current. Converter from Current to Voltage. Converter from Voltage to Frequency.
                              Converter of Frequency to Voltage (F/V). Full-Wave Rectifier. Phase rectifier. Phase shifter. Semiconductor detector of temperature.
                              Comparators, Generators, Oscillators and Filters: Comparator. Alarm oscillator. Electronic switch. Oscillator. Filters. Integrator. The
                              differentiator. Circuit “Sample and Hold”. Pulse generator. Pulse Receiver. PID Control. Power Control. Low Frequency Oscillator.
                              Current generator.
                              Others:Supply Sources of Direct Current (1A). Power source (4A). 4 Potentiometers of 1K, 5K, 10K and 20K.
                              SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System:
                                  Control Interface integrated in the unit box (BSPC). Data acquisition board to be installed in a computer slot.
                                  Computer Control Software.
                              Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. It is supplied with 8 manuals.
                              Dimensions (approx.) = 490x450x470 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
                              More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
 BSUB. Base Unit
                                                                    SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
                             Unit to control the system. Common for the different test modules type “BS”. Elements of the unit are included in a stainless steel box. In the
                             back panel of the box, we can find the outlet and the general switch of the unit for its operation. In the front panel there are two masks with
                             all type of signal conditioners, and even an analogical voltmeter.
                             Amplifiers: Several amplifier circuits of DC are included in the Base Unit, but only three are used specifically for the amplifiers applications:
                             Amplifier 1, Amplifier 2, Amplifier 3. AC amplifier. Power amplifier. Current amplifier. Two buffer amplifiers. Inverter amplifier. Two
                             circuits of differential amplifiers are supplied.
                             Signal Converters Circuits: Converter from Voltage to Current. Converter from Current to Voltage. Converter from Voltage to Frequency.
                             Converter of Frequency to Voltage (F/V). Full-Wave Rectifier. Phase rectifier. Phase shifter. Semiconductor detector of temperature.
                             Comparators, Generators, Oscillators and Filters: Comparator. Alarm oscillator. Electronic switch. Oscillator. Filters. Integrator. The
                             differentiator. Circuit “Sample and Hold”. Pulse generator. Pulse Receiver. PID Control. Power Control. Low Frequency Oscillator.
                             Current generator.
                             Others:Supply Sources of Direct Current (1A). Power source (4A). 4 Potentiometers of 1K, 5K, 10K and 20K.
                             Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. It is supplied with 8 manuals.
                             Dimensions (approx.) = 490x450x470 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
                             More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf

                                                                              2   Test Modules
 BS1.Vibration and/or Deformation Test Module
                                                    SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                      PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                             This Test Module has been designed to teach mechanical vibration and           1.- To measure the vibration of a vibrant girder using
                             displacement variable measurement techniques.                                       extensiometric gauges.
                             Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are                 2.- To use a heating resistance to rise the girder temperature
                             represented graphically.                                                            in order to study the effect on the sensors.(Thermocouple
                             Extensiometric gauges:                                                              and heating resistance).
                                Characteristics: Resistance at 24ºC: 120 W. Gauge factor at 24ºC:           3.- To detect the displacement of the BS1 system vibrant
                                2.120.                                                                           girder using a LVDT sensor.
                             Heating resistance and thermocouple:                                           4.- Effect of temperature variation on an extensiometric
                                Resistance to produce temperature variations in the vibrant bar.                 beam.
                                Thermocouple type “K”. Temperature range:-50ºC to 350ºC.                    5.- Effect of deformation on the resistance of a beam.
                             LVDT Sensor: Input Voltage range: 10 to 24VDC.                                 6.- Measure of the three deformation dimensions or
                             Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power                 deformation of spherical or cylindrical systems.
                             supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the           7.- Linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) for
                             Test Module.                                                                        measuring displacements.
                                                                                                            8.- Analysis of how to compensate the variation of resistance
                             Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
                                                                                                                 of a gauge due to temperature variations, using shorted
                             Each module may operate independently of another.                                   circuits with compensating gauges.
                             Dimensions (approx.) = 405x300x350 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.                          9.- Linear variable differential transformers (LVDT) as a
                             More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/                            weighing system.
                             en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf                                 10.- Effect on the vibration of a beam with different masses.

 BS2.Temperature Test Module
                                                    SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                             The Temperature Test Module has been designed to teach the use and
                             applications of sensors of temperature as a measure, and its control.          1.- How to use the Curie effect as application of a high
                             Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are                     temperature thermostatic controller.
                             represented graphically.                                                       2.- Adjustable bimetallic thermostat. To use the bimetallic
                             Bimetallic switch sensor: Opening temperature: 50ºC. Closing                       thermostat as a temperature control, calculating its
                                Temp.: 30ºC.                                                                    hysteresis.
                             Adjustable bimetallic thermostat, with heater resistor:                        3.- Adjustable bimetallic thermostat. How we can reduce the
                                Temperature range: 0ºC to 30ºC.                                                 hysteresis by adding a resistor to the heating circuit.
                             Relay AC: Voltage and current (nominal) :250V-10A. 3 sockets.                  4.- To use the thermostat based on a bimetallic sensor to
                                Switching voltage: 12 V.
                                                                                                                control the temperature.
                             Capillary thermostat: Temperature range: 0ºC-90ºC.
                             Thermocouples: 3 Cromel-Alumel thermocouples type K.                           5.- Capillary thermostatic controller.
                                Temperature range: - 50ºC to 250ºC.
                             Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with
                             power supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of
                             the Test Module.
                             Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
                             Each module may operate independently of another.
                             Dimensions (approx.) = 405x280x335 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
                             More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
                             en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf

  Non computer controlled version available.                                      Page 19                                                                   www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                    2.3- Transducers and Sensors                                  (continuation)

                         BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:
       2.- Electronics
                                                                                    (continuation)
Electronics

                                                                                          2   Test Modules (continuation)
                         BS3.Pressure Test Module
                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                   PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                     The Pressure Test Module has been designed to teach the use and             1.- Use of linear positioning sensor (potentiometer) to detect
                                                     applications of this kind of sensors measurement systems. It shows the          the displacement produced by a diaphragm expansion
                                                     different pressure measurement techniques.                                      caused by the air pressure.
                                                     Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are              2.- Use of a LVDT as an element to measure the diaphragm
                                                     represented graphically.
                                                                                                                                     distortion that is consequence of the pressure inside the
                                                     Linear positioning sensor (Potentiometer).
                                                                                                                                     pressure chamber.
                                                        Resistor range: 500 W to 5 KW. Operation force: 200-750g.
                                                     LVDT sensor: Sensibility: 780mV/mm. Power voltage: 10 to 24Vdc.             3.- Differential pressure sensor with hole-board system. Use
                                                     Differential pressure sensor: Measurement range: 0 to 30 psi.                   of a differential pressure sensor of the semiconductor
                                                        Sensibility: 3.33mV/psi. Overpressure: 60 psi.                               type to measure the pressure fall in a hole-board system.
                                                     Extensiometric gauges: Nominal resistor @ 25ºC: 120 W. Gauge                4.- Extensiometric Gauges. To detect objects using an
                                                        factor: 2.00 to 2.1 typical.                                                 infrared sensor by light beam interruption.
                                                     Manometric pressure sensor: Measurement range: 0 a 30 psi.                  5.- Measure the pressure in the chamber, using two different
                                                        Overpressure: 60 psi.
                                                                                                                                     types of sensors (manometric and absolute pressure
                                                     Absolute pressure sensor: Measurement range: 2 to 30 psi.
                                                        Overpressure: 60 psi.                                                        sensor).
                                                     Air Compressor: Air flow: 10 l /min. Pressure: 1.83Kg/cm2. Power            6.- Extensiometric gauges for measuring deformations: their
                                                        supply: 220V, 50/60Hz.                                                       resistance changes as the diaphragm expands due to the
                                                     Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power             pressure coming from the pressure container.
                                                     supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the Test
                                                     Module.
                                                     Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
                                                     Each module may operate independently of another.
                                                     Dimensions (approx.) = 400x270x320 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
                                                      More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
                                                      en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf


                         BS4.Flow Test Module
                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                   PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                      The objective this module is to show techniques to measure                 1.- To measure the water volume produced by an
                                                      changeable fluids.                                                             underwater pump in the module using an optical flow
                                                      Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
                                                      represented graphically.                                                       sensor.
                                                      Flow optical sensor:                                                       2.- To use a high-resolution optical flow sensor to measure
                                                         Power supply: 4.5 to 24 Vdc. Standard flow range: 0.5 to 5 GPM.             low volumes.
                                                      High resolution optical flow sensor: Measurement range: 0.25 to 6.5        3.- Level sensor by pressure. To use a differential pressure
                                                          l/min.                                                                     sensor to measure the liquid level in one of the tanks.
                                                      Underwater pump.                                                           4.- Differential pressure sensor. To measure the pressure-fall
                                                      Level sensor by pressure: It is a differential pressure sensor. Pressure       in the module hole board system, as a necessary
                                                          range: 0 to 1psi. Overpressure: 20psi.
                                                                                                                                     parameter to determine volume.
                                                      Differential pressure sensor (Hole board system): Measurement
                                                      range: 0 to 30 psi. Overpressure: 60 psi.                                  5.- To measure the flow volume generated by the underwater
                                                      Changeable flow meter: Range:0 -2 l/min.                                       pump using a flow meter of changeable area.
                                                      V narrowing.                                                               6.- To obtain the flow-volume value in the secondary tank
                                                      Main and secondary tanks.                                                      using the V narrowing weir.
                                                      Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with
                                                      power supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of
                                                      the Test Module.
                                                      Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
                                                      Each module may operate independently of another.
                                                      Dimensions (approx.) = 405x280x400 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
                                                      More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
                                                      en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf


                         BS5.Ovens Test Module
                                                                             SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                   PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                      With “BS5” Test Module it is possible to study temperature                 1.- Heating resistance. Raise the oven internal temperature
                                                      measurement techniques using several kinds of sensors placed                   over the environmental temperature using a heating
                                                      inside the sealed place that is used as oven.                                  resistance to make tests and practices related with
                                                      Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are                 temperature measurement.
                                                      represented graphically.
                                                      Oven chamber.                                                              2.- To use a fan as refrigerating element of the oven.
                                                      Heating resistance: Maximum dissipation power of 500W.                     3.- To use thermocouples as temperature sensors elements
                                                      Fan: Maximum power: 0.96 W. Maximum air flow: 2.5 l/s.                         inside the oven. Temperature measurement using a
                                                      Thermocouples:                                                                 thermocouple.
                                                          4 thermocouples placed inside the oven, each one of them at a          4.- To measure temperature inside the oven using a platinum
                                                          different height. Temperature range: -184 ºC to 400 ºC.                    resistance thermometer.
                                                      Platinum resistance thermometer:                                           5.- To measure temperature inside the oven using a
                                                          Temperature range: -70ºC to 600ºC.                                         thermistor temperature sensor.
                                                      Thermistor:                                                                6.- Temperature measurement using a thermistor, based on
                                                          NTC thermistor. Resistence at 25ºC: 5.8 KW. Temperature                    its negative temperature coefficient.
                                                          range: -40ºC to 125ºC.
                                                                                                                                 7.- To obtain the temperature value inside the oven, using a
                                                      Semiconductor temperature sensor: Reverse polarized diode.
                                                                                                                                     semiconductor sensor (diode).
                                                      Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with
                                                      power supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel        8.- PID control.
                                                      of the Test Module.
                                                      Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
                                                      Each module may operate independently of another.
                                                      Dimensions (approx.) = 405x300x470 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
                                                      More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
                                                      en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf


                          Non computer controlled version available.
                                                                                                      Page 20
2.3- Transducers and
2.1- Basic Electronics Sensors                          (continuation)

 BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:               (continuation)




                                                                                                                                                                               2.- Electronics
                                                                   2   Test Modules (continuation)
 BS6.Liquid Level Test Module
                                                     SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                              The Liquid Level Test Module “BS6” has been designed to teach the
                              use and applications of level sensors and their measurement systems.          1.- To use a capacitative sensor to measure the liquid level in
                              This module teaches techniques to measure and control the liquid                  the tank.
                              level in a tank.
                              Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are                2.- To use the differential pressure sensor as an element to
                              represented graphically.                                                          determine the water level in a tank.
                              Water tanks. 2 Minipumps: Power supply: 12Vdc (max. voltage).                 3.- To use a changeable resistance fixed to a float system as a
                              Nominal current: 1 A DC.                                                          liquid level measurement element.
                              Capacitative level sensor. Pressure level sensor, pressure range: 0-
                                                                                                            4.- Conduction Sensor. Use of a sensor made up of to steel
                              1psi. Level gauge changeable resistance with path end and beginning
                              switches. Conduction sensor. Magnetic float level sensor. Optical level           electrodes to measure the water level of a tank.
                              sensor.                                                                       5.- Magnetic float level sensor. Detect a precise tank liquid
                              Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power               level with a magnetic switch sensor.
                              supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the          6.- Control the BS6 system left tank liquid level using an
                              Test Module.
                              Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.                                           optical level sensor.
                              Each module may operate independently of another.
                              Dimensions (approx.) = 400x300x400 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
                              More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
                              en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf

 BS7.Tachometers Test Module
                                                     SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                              This module has been designed to teach linear and angular speed               1.- DC Motor. Provide the group of sensors of the BS7 system
                              measurement techniques.
                                                                                                                fixed to the central axle of the equipment with movement
                              Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
                              represented graphically.                                                          power.
                              Inductive Sensor: output voltage:                                             2.- DC Tachometer. To use a DC motor as a tachometer to
                              DC Motor: nominal voltage: 12V., resistance: 9,7 Oh., max. vacuum                 measure the revolutions of the BS7 system central axle.
                              speed: 8500 r.p.m., max. load speed: approx. 3500 r.p.m., start               3.- Inductive Sensor.
                              voltage: 210mV. DC Tachometer.                                                4.- Refractive Infrared Sensor. To measure the central axle
                              Refractive Infrared Sensor. Hall Effect position sensor.                          revolutions of the BS7 system using a light reflection
                              Slot Sensor: Slotted optical switch where an input LED and an output              optical sensor.
                              phototransistor are capsulated.
                              Encoder.                                                                      5.- To obtain the central axle speed value using a slotted
                              Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power               optical sensor through light interruption.
                              supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the          6.- To obtain the central axle speed value using a Hall-effect
                              Test Module.                                                                      position sensor.
                              Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.                                       7.- To measure the central axle revolutions of the BS7 system
                              Each module may operate independently of another.                                 using the encoder.
                              Dimensions (approx.) = 300x200x200 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
                              More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
                              en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf

  BS8.Proximity Test Module
                                                     SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                              This Module has been designed to teach techniques to detect the               1.- How to use a capacitative sensor to detect metal objects
                              proximity of objects, focusing on the distance at which each sensor is
                              able to detect the object and the type of material it can detect.                 as the pass in front of the sensor.
                              Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are                2.- To use a Hall effect sensor as an element to detect the
                              represented graphically.                                                          presence of magnetic objects.
                              DC Motor: Nominal power supply: 12Vdc.                                        3.- Reflection infrared sensor. To use an optical sensor that
                              Proximity capacitative sensor, detection distance: 10 mm.
                                                                                                                works through infrared light reflection.
                              Hall effect sensor.
                              Infrared sensor by reflection: Emission narrow beam GaAs IR Emitter.          4.- Infrared sensor by transmission. To detect objects using
                                  Detection narrow beam IR Photodetector.                                       an infrared sensor by light beam interruption.
                              Transmission infrared sensor: Emission narrow beam GaAs IR Emitter.           5.- Conduction sensor. To detect magnetic objects using a
                                  Detection narrow beam IR Photodetector.                                       REED switch sensor.
                              Conduction sensor. Inductive sensor: detection distance: 2mm.
                              Ultrasound sensor: transmitter sensibility: 106 dB., receiver sensibility:    6.- To detect the presence of ferrous object using an inductive
                                  65 dB., resonance frequency: 40kHz.                                           sensor.
                              Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power           7.- Ultrasound sensor. To detect metallic and non-metallic
                              supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the              object using high frequency sounds.
                              Test Module. Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
                              Each module may operate independently of another.
                              Dimensions (approx.) = 400x270x200 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
                              More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
                              en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf

BS9.Pneumatic Test Module
                                                      SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                              The Pneumatics Test Module “BS9” has been designed to teach                  1.-   Proportional valves. To control electronically the vertical
                              techniques of control and handling of a pneumatic piston.
                              Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are                     displacement of a double effect pneumatic piston using
                              represented graphically.                                                           proportional valves.
                              Proportional valve 1 and 2: Nominal voltage: 24Vdc, pressure range:          2.-   Differential pressure sensor. To use a pressure sensor for
                              8 bar max., 0 to 6 bar control. Pneumatic switch: max. pressure: 6                 measuring the pressure difference between both
                              bars. Regulation filter: manual drainage, max. input pressure: 8 bars.
                              Differential pressure sensor: measurement range: 0 to 30 psi. LVDT                 pneumatic piston air inlets.
                              Sensor.                                                                      3.-   Pneumatic switch. To deflect the air flow in the BS9 system
                              Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power                using a pneumatic switch.
                              supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the         4.-   LVDT Linear Displacement Sensor. To measure pneumatic
                              Test Module.
                              Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.                                            piston displacement using an excitation and DC output
                              Each module may operate independently of another.                                  LVDT.
                              Dimensions (approx.) = 400x270x200 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
                              More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
                              en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf


  Non computer controlled version available.                                   Page 21                                                                    www.edibon.com
                                                                           issue:01/11



                          SENSORS INSTRUMENTATION

Ref: 0231                                                                      1 / 2

ITEM          REFERENCE                   DESCRIPTION                    QTY.
  1         SPC           WEIGHING SYSTEM,COMPUTER CONTROLLED              1
  2         SPC/CAL       COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR             1
                          WEIGHING SYSTEM (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
                          ANALYSIS)
  3         SCSP          PRESSURE SENSORS CALIBRATION SYSTEM              1
  4         SCSP/CAL      COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR             1
                          PRESSURE SENSORS CALIBRATION SYSTEM
                          (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
  5         SCST          TEMPERATURE SENSORS CALIBRATION SYSTEM           1
  6         SCST/CAL      COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR             1
                          TEMPERATURE SENSORS CALIBRATION SYSTEM
                          (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
  7         SCSCN         FLOW AND LEVEL SENSORS CALIBRATION SYSTEM        1
  8         SCSCN/CAL     COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR FLOW        1
                          AND LEVEL SENSORS CALIBRATION SYSTEM
                          (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
  9         0231PARTS     COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                       1
 10         0231PA        COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
 11         0231IYPM      INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP                     1
 12         0230CAPRO     TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
 13         0230TD        TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
 14         0231MANU      DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
 Ref: 0231                                                                  2 / 2



Notes:

1) Multipost option:
     This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
     number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
      a) Technical conditions included:

             -   Laboratories adaptation.
             -   Installation of all units supplied.
             -   Starting up for all units.
             -   Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
           - Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
           the teaching techniques uses.
           - Technology transfer.
      b) Commercial conditions:
           - Packing.
           - Financing charges.
           - C.I.F. charges.
      c) Others conditions:
             - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:

                   .   Required services manual.
                   .   Assembly and installation manual.
                   .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                   .   Set in operation manual.
                   .   Safety norms manual.
                   .   Practices manual.
                   .   Maintenance manual.
                   . Calibration manual.




             See Catalogues in next pages
2.3- Transducers and
2.1- Basic Electronics Sensors                                                (continuation)

SPC. Computer Controlled Weighing System




                                                                                                                                                                                      2.- Electronics
 Arm for balance with
   counterbalance                                                         Always included
                                                                           in the supply:
                                                                                                             Teaching
                                                                                                            Technique
                                                                                                               used
                                                          SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
     Upper view




                        Force Sensor                            2                    3             4
                           detail                            Control               Data     Software for:
                                                          Interface Box         Acquisition - Computer Control
                                         Device for                                Board    - Data Acquisition
                                                          5 Cables and Accessories          - Data Management
                                          the tray
                                         coupling         6 Manuals

                                                         OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
                        1   Unit: SPC. Weighing System

                                                           SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                               PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                           Items supplied as standard
                                                                                                                                           1.- Sensor Calibration.
 1  SPC Unit:
     Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.                2.- Hysteresis study.
     Stainless steel arm for balance. Counterbalance of 0.5 and 1 Kg. Anodized aluminium tray. High precision force sensor of 0-           3.- Weight high precission measurement.
     10N.
  2 SPC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
     With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
     visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
     time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
     signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
     parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
     parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
     the control software.
  3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
     PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
     250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
 4 SPC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
     Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
     to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
  5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
  6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
 Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 700x400x400 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.             Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
 More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/SPC.pdf




     .
 SCSP Pressure Sensors Calibration System
                                                                                                 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                           PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                             Bench-top unit.
                                                             Anodized aluminium structure.
                                                             Main metallic elements in stainless steel.
                                                             Diagram in the front panel.
                                                             Vacuum-meter of range (-9800 [ mmH2O] to 0).
                                                             Vacuum-meter of range (-1000 [ mmH2O] to 0).
                                                             Manometer of range (0 to 1000 [ mmH2O] ).
                                                             Manometer of range (0 to 2,5 [ bars]).
                                                             Mobile Piston (syringe).
                                                             8 valves.
                                                             Non-return valve.
                                                             Polyurethane tubes.
                                                             This system is supplied with atm, bares, psi, mmHg, mmH2O, conversion
                                                             tables.
                                                             This system allows the calibration of 6 sensors (same type) simultaneously.
                                                             Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
                                                             Dimensions (approx.) =720 x 300 x 570 mm. Weight: 15 Kg.
                                                             More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
                                                             units/electronics/transducerssensors/SCSP.pdf




                                                                                                                 Page 23                                             www.edibon.com
                                                                            issue:01/11



                          CONTROL ELECTRONICS MODULE

Ref: 0240                                                                       1 / 2

ITEM          REFERENCE                    DESCRIPTION                    QTY.
  1         RYC            TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF REGULATION       1
                           AND CONTROL, COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
            RYC.Unit       TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF REGULATION       1
                           AND CONTROL INCLUDING THE CONTROL INTERFACE
            DAB            DATA ACQUISITION BOARD                           1
            RYC/CCSOF      COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA       1
                           MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR TEACHING EQUIPMENT
                           FOR STUDY OF REGULATION AND CONTROL
  2         RYC/CAL        COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR             1
                           REGULATION AND CONTROL (RESULTS CALCULATION
                           AND ANALYSIS)
  3         CADDA          TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF A/D AND          1
                           D/A CONVERTERS, COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED
                           BY:
            CADDA Unit     TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF A/D AND D/A      1
                           CONVERTERS INCLUDING CONTROL INTERFACE
            DAB            DATA ACQUISITION BOARD                           1
            CADDA/CCSOF    COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION+ DATA        1
                           MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR TEACHING EQUIPMENT
                           FOR STUDY OF A/D AND D/A CONVERTERS
  4         CADDA/CAL      COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR A/D         1
                           AND D/A CONVERTERS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
                           ANALYSIS)
  5         0240PARTS      COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                       1
  6         0240PA         COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
  7         0240IYPM       INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP                     1
  8         0240CAPRO      TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
  9         0240TD         TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
 10         0240MANU       DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
 Ref: 0240                                                                  2 / 2



Notes:

1) Multipost option:
     This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
     number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
      a) Technical conditions included:

             -   Laboratories adaptation.
             -   Installation of all units supplied.
             -   Starting up for all units.
             -   Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
           - Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
           the teaching techniques uses.
           - Technology transfer.
      b) Commercial conditions:
           - Packing.
           - Financing charges.
           - C.I.F. charges.
      c) Others conditions:
             - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:

                   .   Required services manual.
                   .   Assembly and installation manual.
                   .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                   .   Set in operation manual.
                   .   Safety norms manual.
                   .   Practices manual.
                   .   Maintenance manual.
                   . Calibration manual.




             See Catalogues in next pages
                                                                                                                                                                      2.4- Control Electronics
                         RYC. Computer Controlled Teaching Unit for the Study of Regulation and Control
       2.- Electronics
Electronics


                                                                                                         Always included
                                                                                                          in the supply:

                                                                                                                                             Teaching
                                                                                                                                            Technique
                                                                                                                                               used
                                                                                          RTC. EDIBON Real Time Control System

                                                                                             Control
                                                                                            Interface
                                                                                            included
                                                                                           in the unit
                                                                                                                   2                  3
                                                                                                                Data          Software for:
                                                                                                            Acquisition       - Computer Control
                                                                                                               Board          - Data Acquisition
                                                                                        4 Cables and Accessories              - Data Management
                          1   Unit: RYC. Teaching Unit for the Study of Regulation      5 Manuals
                                    and Control, including Control Interface


                                                                                             SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                               PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                                                              Items supplied as standard
                                                                                                                                                               1.-Study in open loop Nº1: Proportional Block.
                          1RYC Unit:                                                                                                                           2.-Study in open loop Nº2: Integrative Block.
                            Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
                                                                                                                                                               3.-Study in open loop Nº3: Simple pole.
                            Steel box. 3 Modules of Controller of 1st Order. 3 Modules of Integrator. 2 Modules of Inverter Amplifier.
                            Module of Inverter Reductor. Module of Negative Zero. Module of Positive Zero. Module of Hysteresis.                               4.-Study in open loop Nº4: Second order plants.
                            Module of Limiter. Module of Controller of 2nd Order. Module of Adding.14 Capacitors from 1mF to 100mF.                            5.-Study in open loop Nº5: Non-line plants: Limitation
                            6 Diodes. 34 Operational Amplifiers. 33 Potentiometers.186 Resistances. 2 Transistors. On/Off switch.                                  and Hysteresis.
                            Fuse. Connector to PC. Control Interface.                                                                                          6.- Study in open loop Nº6: Blocks Composition:
                         2 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:                                                                                                            Negative Zero and Negative Pole.
                            PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs.                                 7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by means of
                            Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.                                                            Quantitative Optimum 1st order system.
                         3 RYC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:                                                               8.- Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by means of
                            Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible,                             Quantitative Optimum 2nd order system.
                            open and multicontrol software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously on                           Other practical possibilities:
                            all process parameters. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to
                            250,000 data per second. Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the process and modification                         Analog regulators procedure: (9-11):
                            of the conditions during the process.                                                                                              9.-First order filter.
                         4 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.                                                                                      10.-Integral regulator.
                         5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.                                                                                     11.-Regulating I+P with phase advance in the feedback.
                         Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.                                                                       12.-Potentiometer adjustment.
                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/control/RYC.pdf

                         CADDA. Computer Controlled Teaching Unit for the Study of Analog/Digital (A/D) and Digital/Analog (D/A) Converters


                                                                                                            Always included
                                                                                                             in the supply:


                                                                                                                                               Teaching
                                                                                                                                              Technique
                                                                                                                                                 used
                                                                                          RTC. EDIBON Real Time Control System

                                                                                             Control
                                                                                            Interface
                                                                                            included
                                                                                           in the unit
                                                                                                                   2                  3
                                                                                                                Data          Software for:
                                                                                                              Acquisition     - Computer Control
                                                                                                                Board         - Data Acquisition
                                                                                                                              - Data Management
                                                                                        4 Cables and Accessories
                          1   Unit: CADDA. Teaching Unit for the Study of A/D and D/A   5 Manuals
                                    Converters, including Control Interface.

                                                                                               SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                            PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                                                     Items supplied as standard
                          1CADDA Unit:
                                                                                                                                                           1.- Sampling theorem.
                            Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Steel box.                            2.- Analog/Digital integrated converter. Monopolar
                            In this unit, the elements are separated in two parts: lefthand part for analog to digital conversions, and                        assembly.
                            right hand part for digital to analog conversions.                                                                             3.- Analog/Digital integrated converter. Bipolar assembly.
                            Analog/Digital converter board. Digital/Analog converter board.                                                                4.- Monopolar binary ramp converter.
                                                                                                                                                           5.- Quantification effects.
                            Signal generator board, with 100 to 330 mF capacitors, 10 to 50K potentiometers and 1 to 100K                                  6.-Bipolar binary ramp converter.
                            resistors.                                                                                                                     7.-Binary ramp converter with continuous monopolar
                            Female and male connectors, interconnections.                                                                                     counting.
                            Power supply.                                                                                                                  8.-Binary ramp converter with bipolar continuous
                                                                                                                                                               counting.
                            LPF-Low Pass Filter: 2nd order low pass filter, needed to convert analog signals to digital. Sample/Hold                       9.-Monopolar simple ramp.
                            module. Comparator module. Clock module. Analog switch. Ramp module. A/D control module. D/A                                  10.- Bipolar simple ramp converter.
                            module, including an integrated digital to analog converter. A/D module, including an integrated                              11.- Monopolar double ramp converter.
                            analog to digital converter. Counter module. Waveform generator. 8 analog switches, all are managed                           12.- Double bipolar ramp converter.
                            by a PC. Weighted resistors: 8 resistances are connected to a common point. D/A module: same                                  13.- Monopolar converter of successive approximations.
                                                                                                                                                          14.- Bipolar converter of successive approximations.
                            module than described before “D/A”. Analog input and output for PC. Serial lock 1 module. Adding                              15.- Integrated Digital/Analog converter. Monopolar
                            module: same module as previously described ”Adding”. Serial lock 2 module: same module than serial                                assembly.
                            lock 1, but based only on an inverter. R/2R : stair of resistance R/2R. Potentiometer. D/A control module.                    16.- Digital/Analog integrated converter. Bipolar assembly.
                            Operational amplifier. Two capacities of 100nF with common connection.Sample/Hold module: same                                17.- Digitalization and reconstruction of monopolar signals.
                                                                                                                                                          18.- Digitalization and reconstruction of bipolar signals.
                            module as previously described “Sample/Hold”.                                                                                 19.-Digital/Analog monopolar converter of weighted
                            Control Interface.                                                                                                                 resistance.
                         2 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:                                                                                                   20.- Digital/Analog bipolar converter of weighted
                            PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs.                                 resistance.
                                                                                                                                                          21.- Analog switches errors.
                            Sampling rate up to:250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.                                                    22.- R/2R monopolar stair converter.
                         3 CADDA/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:                                                        23.- R/2R bipolar stair converter.
                            Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible,                     24.-Current division in R/2R stairs.
                            open and multicontrol software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously                          25.-Digital/Analog converter of monopolar inverted stair.
                                                                                                                                                          26.-Digital/Analog bipolar converter of inverted stair.
                            on all process parameters. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling                                   27.-Digital/Analog monopolar converter of series blocking.
                            velocity up to 250,000 data per second. Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the process                       28.-Digital/Analog bipolar converter of series blocking.
                            and modification of the conditions during the process.                                                                        29.-Digital/Analog converter of load balance.
                         4 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.                                                                                  30.-Bipolar Digital/Analog converter of load balance.
                         5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
                                                                                                                                                          31.-Monopolar Digital/Analog converter of pulse width
                                                                                                                                                              modulation.
                         Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 450 x 470 mm. Weight: 40 Kg.                                                                   32.-Digital/Analog bipolar converter of pulse width
                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/control/CADDA.pdf                                       modulation.
                                                                                                                                     Page 24
                                                                             issue:01/11




                    DOMESTIC ELECTRIC INSTALLATIONS (10 CAI + CAL)

Ref: 0413-410/10S                                                                1 / 3

ITEM         REFERENCE                          DESCRIPTION                QTY.
         LIELBA              "DOMESTIC " ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
                             INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
  1      AD1A                ROBBERY ALARM STATION,INCLUDED:                 1
         ALI02               DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.                     1
         ALI03               AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC).             1
         DET27               GLASS BREAK DETECTOR.                           1
         INT32               INTRUSION SWITCH/DETECTOR WITH RELAY 1000W.     2
         SEL03               3-PILOTS LIGHTS.                                1
         SEL21               INDOOR SIREN.                                   1
         VAR07               KIT: BURGLAR ALARM CENTRAL + INFRARED ELE.      1
                             + BATTERY.
  2      AD1/SOF*            COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE     10
                             APPLICATION - BASIC ROBBERY ALARM STATION.
  3      AD1/CAL             COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE       10
                             APPLICATION - BASIC ROBBERY ALARM STATION.
                             (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
  4      AD3A                FIRE ALARM STATION, INCLUDED:                   1
         ALI02               DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.                     1
         ALI03               AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC).             1
         ALA02               FIRE ALARM STATION (WITH BATTERY).              1
         DET06               SMOKE DETECTOR FOR DOMESTIC CONTROL.            1
         DET21               FIRE DETECTOR THROUGH IONIZATION FOR            1
                             CENTRAL.
         SEL21               INDOOR SIREN.                                   1
  5      AD3/SOF*            COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE     10
                             APPLICATION - BASIC FIRE ALARM STATION
  6      AD3/CAL             COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE       10
                             APPLICATION - BASIC FIRE ALARM STATION.
                             (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
  7      AD5                 APPLICATION - TEMPORIZATION OF STAIRS,          1
                             INCLUDED
         ALI02               DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.                     1
         CTI10               AUTOMATIC OF STAIRS                             1
         INT21               SWITCH + COMMUTATOR GROUP + BELL PUSH-          1
                             BUTTON.
         LAM08               2 LAMP-HOLDERS + INCANDESCENT LAMPS 40 W.       2
         LAM13               2 LOW CONSUMPTION FLUORESCENT LAMPS.            2
  8      AD5/SOF*            COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE     10
                             APPLICATION - TEMPORIZATION OF STAIRS
  9      AD5/CAL             COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE       10
                             APPLICATION - TEMPORIZATION OF STAIRS.
                             (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
 10      AD33                INSTALLATIONS FAULTS SIMULATOR,INCLUDED:        1
         ALI02               DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.                     1
         COM14               2 COMMUTATORS.                                  2
         ENC09               2-POLE EUROPEAN SOCKET WITH SAFETY DEVICE.      2
Ref: 0413-410/10S                                                             2 / 3

ITEM         REFERENCE                   DESCRIPTION                    QTY.
 10      COM21           INVERTER + GROUP OF 2 COMMUTATORS.               2
         LAM08           2 LAMP-HOLDERS + INCANDESCENT LAMPS 40 W.        2
         LAM09           FLUORESCENT LAMP.                                1
         MED65           DIGITAL MULTIMETER.                              1
         FUS04           3 FUSE-HOLDERS 10 A, 230 VAC (INCLUDE            1
                         2,4,6,10 A).
 11      AD33/SOF*       SOFTWARE DE ENSEÑANZA ASISTIDO DESDE            10
                         COMPUTADOR (PC) SIMULADOR DE FALLOS EN
                         INSTALACIONES ELECTRICAS
 12      AD33/CAL        SOFWARE DE APRENDIZAJE ASISTIDO DESDE           10
                         COMPUTADOR PARA CIRCUITOS C.C. (CÁLCULO Y
                         ANÁLISIS DE RESULTADOS) POR SIMULADOR DE
                         FALLOS EN INSTALACIONES ELECTRICAS
 13      INS/SOF         CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE            1
                         (TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
 14      MUAD            ELECTRIC POWER DATA ACQUISITION                  1
                         SYSTEM,INCLUDED:
         EPIB            ELECTRIC POWER INTERFACE BOX                     1
         DAB             DATA ACQUISITION BOARD                           1
         MUAD/SOF        DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE                        1
 15      CABD            CABLES KIT                                       1
 16      0410PARTS       COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                       1
 17      0410PA          COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
 18      0410IYPM        INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP                     1
 19      0410CAPRO       TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
 20      0410TD          TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
 21      0410MANU        DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
Ref: 0413-410/10S                                                              3 / 3



* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.

Notes:
1) Multipost option:
     This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
     units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.

2)Supply conditions included:
     a) Technical conditions:

           - Laboratories adaptation.
           - Installation of all units supplied.
           - Starting up for all units.
           - Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
           - Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
           teaching techniques uses.
           - Technology transfer.
     b) Commercial conditions:

           - Packing.
           - Financing charges.
           - C.I.F. charges.
     c) Others conditions:


           - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit

                    .   Required services manual.
                    .   Assembly and installation manual.
                    .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                    .   Set in operation manual.
                    .   Safety norms manual.
                    .   Practices manual.
                    .   Maintenance manual.
                    .   Calibration manual.




           See Catalogues in next pages
4.1- Basic Electricity

   LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:

                                                                                   1   Frame                                                                    2   APPLICATIONS
          2   APPLICATIONS                                                   (applications support)
  (AD1A)                                                                                                                                                   (AI1)
                                                                 (BASB)

                                                                                                                               Modules automatic
                                           High Safety                                                                         anchorage system
                                           Automatic earth
           (AD3A)                         connection system                                                                                            (AI2)


                                                                 Sight of the frame with some modules
                                                                                 allocated
                                                                                               or
                                                               (BASS)
  (AD5)                                                                                                                                                        (AI4)




          (AD6A)                                                                                                                                       (AI5)

                                                                      Sight of the frame




                                                                                                                                                                                                 4.- Electricity
                                                                with some modules allocated


                                                 3   CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
  (AD8)                                                                                                             Teaching
                                                                                                                   Technique                               (AE7)
                                                                                                                      used

                                                                                   INS/SOF.   Teacher Software




                                                                                              EMT../SOF.
                                                                                   Student/Module Software
          (AD9A)                                                                                                                                       (AE8)
                                                4    MUAD. Electric Power Data Acquisition System
                                                                                                                  Teaching
                                                                                                                 Technique
                                                                                                                    used
                                                                                    EPIB. Electric power
                                                                                       interface box

  (AD13)                                                                                                                                                  (AE9)
                                                                          DAB. Data adquisition board


                                                                                MUAD/SOF. Power Data
                                                                                  acquisition System

                                                 5
                                                                                       Manuals


              Other APPLICATIONS                                                                                                                         Other APPLICATIONS
                                                                                                                TOTALLY
                                                                                                             SAFETY SYSTEM


     The complete laboratory includes part 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 ,and any part can be supplied individually or additionally.
     Minimum supply: Frame (BASB or BASS) + one Application + Manuals.


                                                                          Available Applications:
! Domestic Electric Installations:                                                     ! Industrial Electric Installations:
AD1A. Robbery alarm station.         AD22. Flooding control station.                   AI1. Star-delta starter.                            AI11. People safety against indirect electrical
                                                                                       AI2. S t a r t e r t h r o u g h a u t o -                contacts in IT neutral regimen.
AD3A. Fire alarm station.            AD23. Wireless basic control                            transformer.                                  AI12. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AD5. Temporization of stairs.               station (RF).                              AI3. Speed commutator for                           AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics.
AD6A. Luminosity control station.    AD25A. C o n t r o l s t a t i o n f o r                Dahlander motor.                              ! Energy Installations:
                                                                                       AI4. Starter-inverter.                              AE1. Aerial line model.
AD8. Blinds activator.                      domestic electric services                 AI5. AC wound rotor motor                           AE2. Reactive energy control and
AD9A. Heating control station.              through the telephone.                           starter.                                            compensation.
AD11A. Network analyzer.             AD28A. Integral control station of                AI6. DC motor starter.                              AE3. Test unit for magneto-thermal automatic
                                            domestic electric systems.                 AI7. Automatic change of speed                            switches.
AD13. Audio door entry system.                                                               of a Dahlander motor with                     AE4. Test unit for differential automatic switches.
AD14. Audio and video door           AD30. Gas control station.                              change of direction.                          AE5. Relay control station.
       entry system.                 AD31. Movement and sound                          AI8. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m -              AE6. Energy counters control station.
                                            detection and control.                           pensation (Power factor                       AE7. Multi-functional electrical protection
AD15A. Position control station.                                                             correction).                                        station.
AD17A. Photoelectric control         AD32. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits                    AI9. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t           AE8. Power & torque measurements of
       position station.                    analyzer.                                        indirect electrical contacts                        electrical motors.
                                     AD33. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s             in TT neutral regimen.                        AE9. Directional Relay: Earth fault detection.
AD24. Position Switch.                                                                 AI10. People safety against indirect                      Directional power flow detection. Reactive
AD19A. Sound station.                       simulator.                                       electrical contacts in TN                           power flow detection.
                                                                                             neutral regimen.

More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf


                                                                                          Page 37                                                                          www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                    4.1- Basic Electricity                       (continuation)

                  LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:                    (continuation)


                                                                                       1   Frame
                  Applications support. There are two options to chose:

                   BAS-B. Basic Frame                                     SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
                                                         Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
                                                         Possibility of housing up to 10 different modules.
                                                         Automatic anchorage system for any module.
                                                         Automatic earth connection system.

                                or
                   BASS. Double Frame
                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
                                                         Double frame, single side working post.
                                                         Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
                                                         Dimensions approx.:1300mm x 800mm x 700mm.
                                                         Possibility of housing until 12 different modules at the same
                                                         time. Transparent internal separation. Automatic anchorage
                                                         system for any module. Automatic earth connection system.
                                                         Dimensions: 1300x800x700mm. approx. Weight:



                                                                                       Applications
4.- Electricity




                                                                                   2

                   Main features:
                    Painted steel modules. All modules have handles and diagram. Automatic anchorage system for housing the modules in the frame. Automatic earth connection in the
                    modules. Safety connections. Safety wires.
                    There is a manual for each application (8 manuals normally supplied).


                                                                           Domestic Electrical Installations
                   AD1A. Robbery Alarm Station
                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                               PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                   Included Modules:                                                     1.- Assembly of the station with intrusion detector and alarm.
                                                   ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                    2.- Assembly of the station with glass breaking detector and
                                                   ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                 alarm.
                                                   DET27. Glass Break Detector.
                                                                                                                         3.- Assembly of the station with both types of detectors and alarm.
                                                   INT32. Intrusion Switch/Detector with Relay 1000W. (2 units).
                                                   SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.                                                4.- Assembly of the station with infrared detectors.
                                                   SEL21. Indoor Siren.
                                                   VAR07. Kit: Burglar Alarm Central + infrared ele. + battery.
                                                   More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                                   catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD1A.pdf

                   AD3A. Fire Alarm Station
                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                               PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                   Included Modules:
                                                   ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                    1.- Assembly of the station with fire detector, smoke detector and
                                                   ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                 alarm.
                                                   ALA02. Fire Alarm Station (with battery).
                                                   DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.                           2.- Test of the station with fire detector.
                                                   DET21. Fire Detector through Ionization for Central.                  3.- Test of the station with smoke detector.
                                                   SEL21. Indoor Siren.                                                  4.- Test of the station with detection of fire by the thermal detector.
                                                   DET10. Water Electro-valve.                                           5.- Activation of the electro-valve following the detection of the
                                                   DET22. Fire Thermal Detector.                                             fire.
                                                   SEL17. Fire Indicators, Bell type.
                                                   More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                                   catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AD5. Temporization of Stairs
                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                               PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                   Included Modules:                                                     1.- Assembly of the basic set of temporization.
                                                   ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                    2.- Test of the set from two points with incandescent lamps.
                                                   CTI10. Automatic of Stairs.                                           3.- Test of the set from two points with fluorescent lamps.
                                                   INT21. Switch+Commutator Group+Bell Push-Button.
                                                   LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
                                                   LAM13. 2 Low Consumption Fluorescent Lamps. (2 units).
                                                   More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                                   catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD5.pdf


                   AD6A. Luminosity Control Station
                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                               PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                   Included Modules:
                                                   ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                    1.-   Assembly of the control station.
                                                   COM14. 2 Commutators.                                                 2.-   Control of luminosity of an halogen lamp.
                                                   LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.                       3.-   Control of luminosity of an incandescent lamp.
                                                   REG06. Voltage Electronic Regulator (Switch) 40 to 300W/230Vac.       4.-   Test of the station by movement sensor.
                                                   INT18. 1-pole Switch + 1-pole Switch with Light.
                                                   LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.                                               5.-   Luminosity control.
                                                   LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.                                              6.-   Complete control.
                                                   SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
                                                   More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                                   catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD6A.pdf

                                                                                                   Page 38
4.1- Basic Electricity        (continuation)

LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:            (continuation)
                                                              2   Applications      (continuation)
                                                    Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
 AD8. Blinds Activator
                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                         Included Modules:
                         ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                          1.- Assembly of the activator (motor, detectors and switches).
                         INT22. 2 Switches for Blinds.
                         DET19. Twilight Detector.                                                   2.- Blind activation by pulsators (push-buttons).
                         DET20. Light Detector.                                                      3.- Blind activation by sensors.
                         VAR01. Motor for Blinds / Curtains.
                         PUL29. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (without Interlock).
                         PUL30. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (with Interlock).
                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                         catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

 AD9A. Heating Control Station
                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                         Included Modules:
                         ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                          1.- Assembly of the heating control station.
                         MED76. Thermostat for Heating.                                              2.- Assembly of the heating and refrigeration control.
                         MED77. Thermostat for Heating and Refrigeration.
                         SEL09. 2 Double Luminous Signalling red-green 230Vac. (2 units).            3.- Test with several temperatures.
                         TIM01. 2 Bell 70dB,230V. (2 units).
                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                         catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
 AD11A. Network Analyzer
                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                         Included Modules:




                                                                                                                                                                          4.- Electricity
                         ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                        1.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
                         MED11. AC Ammeter (0-10A).                                                      frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
                         MED25. Pointer Frequency Meter(45-65Hz).                                        of a 220V single-phase circuit.
                         MED32. 1-Phase Wattmeter 230V.
                         MED21. AC Voltmeter (0-250V).                                               2.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
                         MED30. 1-Phase Phasemeter 230V.                                                 frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
                         MED38. 1-Phase Varmeter 230V.                                                   of a 380V three-phase circuit.
                         MED12. AC Ammeter (custom made). (3 units).
                         MED22. AC Voltmeter (0-400V). (3 units).
                         MED31. 3-Phase Phasemeter 400V. (3 units).
                         MED39. 3-Phase Balanced Varmeter 440V.
                         MED33. 3-Phase Balanced Wattmeter 440V.
                         MED63. Synchronoscope.
                         MED64. Phase Sequence Indicator.
                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                         catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
 AD13. Audio Door Entry System
                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                      PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                         Included Modules:                                                           1.- Assembly of the system.
                         ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                          2.- To check the interphone operation.
                         POR01. Phones Power Supply.
                         POR02. Phone.
                         POR03. Interphone.
                         POR06. Lock.
                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                         catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

 AD14. Audio and Video Door Entry System
                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                      PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                         Included Modules:                                                           1.- Assembly of the system.
                         ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
                         POR06. Lock.                                                                2.- To check of the video and audio operation.
                         POR05. Phone/Monitor.
                         POR04. Video Camera.
                         POR07. Digital Station.
                         POR08. Video-Interphone Power Supply.
                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                         catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD14.pdf
 AD15A. Position Control Station
                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                         Included Modules:
                         ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                          1.- Assembly of the station with sensors.
                         ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                   2.- Test of the capacitive detection of a body.
                         INT14. 1-pole 2 Switches.                                                   3.- Test of the inductive position detection of a body.
                         SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
                         SEN04. Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor type PNP.                     4.- Assembly of the station with presence and movement wall
                         SEN14. AC Cylindrical Capacitive Proximity Sensor.                              sensor.
                         SEN29. AC Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor.                           5.- To check the movement detection of a body.
                         SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-Switch.
                         SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                         catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

 AD17A. Photoelectric Control Position Station
                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                         Included Modules:                                                           1.-   Assembly of the control station.
                         ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
                         ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                   2.-   Test of the detection with cylindrical sensor.
                         LAM04. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (24Vac). (2 units).                         3.-   Test of the detection with miniature sensor.
                         SEN18. Cylindrical Photoelectric Sensor.
                         SEN19. Miniature Photoelectric Sensor.                                      4.-   Test of the detection with compact sensor.
                         SEN20. Compact Photoelectric Sensor.                                        5.-   Assembly of the control station with battery and sensors.
                         SEN21. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
                         SEN22. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).                             6.-   Test of the detection with emitters and receivers.
                         SEN23. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).                           7.-   Test with only emitters and receptors.
                         SEN24. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                         catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
                                                                        Page 39                                                                          www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                  4.1- Basic Electricity                      (continuation)

                  LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:            (continuation)

                                                                                2   Applications      (continuation)
                                                                       Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
                   AD24. Position Switch
                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:
                                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                          1.- Instantaneous Micro-switch.
                                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply.                                           2.- MBB Micro-switch.
                                           LAM03. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (220Vac).                                   3.- BBM Micro-switch.
                                           SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-switch.
                                           SEN02. MBB Micro-switch.
                                           SEN03. BBM Micro-switch.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AD19A. Sound Station
                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:
                                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                          1.-   Mono-stereo system installation.
                                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
                                           AUD01. Analog Sound Regulator.                                              2.-   Mono system with warnings reception.
                                           AUD04. Speaker of 2”, 2W, 8 ohm. (3 units).                                 3.-   Mono-stereo system installation with warnings reception.
                                           AUD06. Basic Audio Central.                                                 4.-   Stereo system installation with warnings reception.
                                           AUD20. Analog Sound Regulator (mono-stereo).
                                           AUD02. Digital Sound Regulator.                                             5.-   Background Music installation.
                                           AUD05. Speaker of 4”, 7W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
                                           AUD03. Warnings Emitter Module.
                                           AUD08. Background Music Regulator 3W.
                                           AUD10. Double Background Music Regulator.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
4.- Electricity




                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AD22. Flooding Control Station                 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:
                                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                          1.- Assembly of the flooding control with a probe.
                                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                   2.- Test of the flooding control.
                                           DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
                                           DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).                                      3.- Test of the flooding control acting on an eletro-valve.
                                           DET10. Water Electro-valve.
                                           DET11. Probe for Water Electro-valve. (2 units).
                                           SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
                                           SEL21. Indoor Siren.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AD23. Wireless Basic Control Station (RF)
                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:
                                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                          1.- Wireless intrusion detection and alarm.
                                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                   2.- Wireless panic button alarm.
                                           DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
                                           DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
                                           DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
                                           DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
                                           SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
                                           TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AD25A. Control Station for Domestic Electric Services through the Telephone
                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:                                                           1.-   Smoke detection.
                                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
                                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                   2.-   Gas detection and electro-valve control.
                                           CTR01. Basic Control Module.                                                3.-   Flooding detection and electro-valve control.
                                           DET01. Flooding Detector.
                                           DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector). (3units).           4.-   Temperature and Battery.
                                           DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).                                      5.-   Intrusion detection.
                                           DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.                                   6.-   Wireless detection.
                                           DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
                                           DET10. Water Electro-valve.                                                 7.-   Complete control of home electric services through the
                                           DET12. Gas Electro-valve.                                                         telephone.
                                           DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
                                           DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
                                           DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
                                           VAR05. Tones Dialling Telephone.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AD28A. Integral Control Station of Domestic Electric Systems
                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:
                                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                          1.- Assembly of the complete system with               the smoke,
                                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                       flooding and gas detectors.
                                           CTR02. Advanced Control Module.
                                           CTR05. Power Module 72W.                                                    2.- Test of the station with smoke, flooding and gas
                                           CTR07. Timers Module.                                                           detectors.
                                           CTR08. Inputs Module 24V.                                                   3.- To set the temporization and monitoring the results.
                                           CTR11. Outputs Module 24V.
                                           CTR17. Infrared Remote Control for Control Modules.                         4.- Assembly of the complete system with infrared and
                                           CTR18. Infrared Receptor.                                                       instrusion detectors.
                                           DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).                                      5.- Test of the station with infrared and instrusion
                                           DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.                                       detectors.
                                           DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
                                           DET09. Intrusion Detector for domestic control.                             6.- Electro-valves activation.
                                           DET10. Water Electro-valve.                                                 7.- Wireless assembly of the sensor through infrared
                                           DET12. Gas Electro-valve.                                                       control.
                                           VAR08. Monitor.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD28A.pdf
                                                                                           Page 40
4.1- Basic Electricity          (continuation)

LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:             (continuation)
                                                               2   Applications      (continuation)
                                                      Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
 AD30. Gas Control Station
                                                 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:                                                          1.- Gas detection.
                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                  2.- Electro-valve activation.
                           DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
                           DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
                           DET02. Gas Detector.
                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

 AD31. Movement and Sound Detection and Control
                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:
                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                         1.- Movement and sound detection controlled by switches.
                           INT15. 2 Switches with Light.                                              2.- Movement and sound detection controlled by pulsators.
                           LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
                           INT31. Intrusion Switch/Detector from 40 to 300W.
                           LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
                           PUL22. 2 Light Push-Buttons.
                           TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
 AD32. 24vac/12vdc Circuits Analyzer
                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:




                                                                                                                                                                              4.- Electricity
                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                         1.- AC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
                           ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).                        2.- DC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
                           MED04. DC Milliammeter (0-600 mA).
                           MED05. DC Ammeter (0-1.5A).
                           MED08. AC Milliammeter (0-600mA).
                           MED09. AC Ammeter (0-2.5A).
                           MED15. DC Voltmeter (0-5V).
                           MED16. DC Voltmeter (0-50V).
                           MED19. AC Voltmeter (0-10V).
                           MED20. AC Voltmeter (0-60V).
                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

 AD33. Installations Faults Simulator
                                                 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:
                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                         1.-   Ground fault simulation of a plug base.
                           COM14. 2 Commutators (2 units).                                            2.-   Fault simulation between phases of a plug base.
                           ENC09. 2-pole European Socket with Safety Device.(2 units).                3.-   Ground fault simulation of an incandescent lamp base.
                           COM21.Inverter + Group of 2 Commutators. (2 units).                        4.-   Ground fault simulation of a fluorescent lamp base.
                           LAM01. Lamps.                                                              5.-   Fault simulation between phases of an incandescent lamp
                           LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).                       base.
                           LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.                                                   6.-   To simulate fault of power-supply contact in the lamp base.
                           MED65. Digital Multimeter.                                                 7.-   To simulate fault of contact of the switch.
                           FUS04. 3 Fuse-holders 10A, 230Vac (include 2, 4,6,10A).
                                    Fault box.                                                        8.-   To simulate fault of contact of the fuse.
                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/                              9.-   To simulate fault of contact of the fluorescent base.
                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
                                                    Industrial Electrical Installations
 AI1. Star-Delta Starter                         SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:
                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                       1.-   Assembly of the starter.
                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
                           CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac. (3 units)).                                2.-   Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
                           IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.               3.-   Measurement of the star current and delta current.
                           MED60. Network Analyzer.
                           PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).                                    4.-   Direct start of the motor. Measurement of the starting current.
                           REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
                           REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
                           VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

 AI2 Starter through Auto-transformer
                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:
                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                  1.- Assembly of the starter.
                           CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).                                2.- Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
                           IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
                           MED60. Network Analyzer.                                                   3.- Measurement of both the star and delta current.
                           PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
                           REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
                           REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
                           TRA14. 3-Phase Auto-transformer.
                           VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

 AI3. Speed Commutator for Dahlander Motor
                                                 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:
                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                       1.- Assembly of the commutator.
                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                  2.- Test of the commutator changing the speed of a Dahlander
                           CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
                           IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.                   motor.
                           MED60. Network Analyzer.                                                   3.- Measurement of the voltage and current.
                           PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
                           REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
                           REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
                           VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
                                                                          Page 41                                                                         www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                           4.1- Basic Electricity                            (continuation)

                  LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:           (continuation)

                                                                               2   Applications (continuation)
                                                                      Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
                   AI4. Starter-Inverter
                                                                 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                  PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:
                                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
                                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                             1.- Assembly of the starter.
                                           CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).                                     2.- To test of the direct start of a squirrel cage motor.
                                           CON11. 3-pole Contactor- Inverter (220Vac).
                                           MED60. Network Analyzer.                                              3.- To invert the rotation direction of the motor.
                                           PUL03. Push-Buttons with Light (220Vac).(2 units).
                                           REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A).
                                           VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AI5. AC Wound Rotor Motor Starter
                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                 PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:
                                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                  1.- Assembly of the starter.
                                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                             2.- To test the starter changing the resistances step by step.
                                           VAR06. Motor (EMT8) (wound rotor).
                                           CAR22. AC Starting Rheostat.
                                           IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
                                           CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
                                           PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AI6. DC Motor Starter
4.- Electricity




                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
                                           Included Modules:                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                  1.- Direct starter.
                                           ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
                                           VAR04. Motor (EMT5) (DC motor).                                       2.- Starter rheostat.
                                           CAR23. DC Starting Rheostat.
                                           IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
                                           CON03. 3-pole Contactor (12Vdc).
                                           PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
                                           CAR20. Diodes and Thyristors.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AI7. Automatic Change of Speed of a Dahlander Motor with Change of Direction
                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                 PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:
                                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                  1.- Assembly of the set.
                                           IAM24. 3-pole+neutral Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 6A,           2.- Motor starting with right turning direction at high speed. R.p.m
                                                    Curve C.                                                         and consumption measurements.
                                           CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (5 units).
                                           REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A). (2 units).        3.- Motor stop and change to left the turning direction at high
                                           PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NC Contacts). (5 units).           speed.
                                           PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NO Contacts). (5 units).       4.- Change to low speed.
                                           VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).                                5.- Motor stop and change to right the turning direction.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/                         6.- Change to high speed. R.p.m and consumption
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf                          measurements.

                   AI8. Reactive Power Compensation (Power Factor Correction)
                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                 PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:                                                     1.- Measurement of active power consumed by a receiver.
                                           ALI02.   Domestic Main Power Supply.                                  2.- Measurement of reactive power consumed by a receiver.
                                                                                                                 3.- Measurement of apparent power consumed by a receiver.
                                           CAR04. Variable Resistive Load,150 ohm, 500W.                         4.- Measurement of power factor of a receiver.
                                                                                                                 5.- Measurement of active energy consumed by a receiver.
                                           CAR09. Capacitive Load 4 x 7 mF.                                      6.- Measurement of reactive energy consumed by a receiver.
                                           CAR12. Inductive Load 0-33-78-140-193-236 mH. (2 units).              7.- Compensation of reactive energy (improvement of the power
                                                                                                                     factor).
                                           MED60B.Network Analyzer with active and reactive energy counters.     8.- Comparison of the active energy consumed after the
                                                                                                                     compensation.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/                         9.- Comparison of the reactive energy consumed after the
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AI8.pdf                             compensation.
                                                                                                                 10.-Measurement of power factor after the compensation.

                   AI9. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TT Neutral Regimen
                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                 PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:
                                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                  1.- Study of an isolation fault in TT neutral regimen.
                                           CAR05. Double Variable Resistive Load , 150 ohm, 500 W.
                                           Resistance 1600 W.                                                    2.- Structure of a differential switch. Necessity to use a differential
                                           COM12.Commutator/Switch.                                                  switch.
                                           PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).                                3.- Study of the selectivity among differential switches.
                                           TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
                                           IAD13. 3-pole + neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 25A,
                                                    300mA, class AC, instantaneous.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AI10. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TN Neutral Regimen
                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
                                           Included Modules:                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
                                           COM12.Commutator/Switch. (2 units).                                   1.- Study of an isolation fault in TN neutral regimen.
                                           TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.                                   2.- Measurement of the ground loop impedances.
                                           IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,        3.- Indirect contact with defect mass.
                                                    class A.                                                     4.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
                                           Resistance 200 W.
                                           Resistance 100 W, 72W.                                                    TN-C conditions.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/                         5.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf                          TN-S conditions.
                                                                                           Page 42
4.1- Basic Electricity          (continuation)

LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
                                                    2 Applications                    (continuation)
                                                      Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
 AI11. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in IT Neutral Regimen
                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
                                                                                                                         PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:
                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                1.- Study of an isolation simple fault.             5.- Study of the ground loop impedance.
                           INT01. 1-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
                           INT02. 2-pole Load Switch. (2 units).               2.- Study of an isolation double fault
                           CPA.     Isolation Permanent Controller.                (only with one mass).
                           Capacitor 300V. 200 nF .(2 units).
                           Resistance 100 W.                                   3.- Study with several masses.
                           Resistance 10 W.
                           More information in:                                4.- Operation of the isolation controller.
                           www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
                           units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

 A12. Modular Trainer (AC Motors)
                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:
                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                1.- Direct starting of a three-phase                    phase motor with microswitch and
                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).               motor through contactor, with some                  push-buttons box.
                           PUL48. 3 Double Chamber Push-buttons. (2                stop and start push-buttons.                   10.- Star-delta starting with an turn
                                    units).                                    2.- Configuration of a magnetic                         inverter of a three-phase motor.
                           LAM02. Auxiliary Lamps(3 lamps.                         protection system, with stop mush              11.- Automatic star-delta starting of a
                           CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (4 units).             room button.                                        three-phase motor.
                           VAR09. Frequency variator.                          3.- Direct starting of a three-phase               12.- Turning inverted starter of a three-
                                                                                   motor by GV protector with a switch.                phase motor with microswitch, with




                                                                                                                                                                                4.- Electricity
                           REL30. Synchronization Relay (variable delay).
                           REL47. Thermal relay (GV protector) module          4.- Direct starting of a three-phase                    start push-buttons, stop and
                                    (2 units).                                     motor through impulses contactor.                   function cycle. (Direct).
                           REL45. Module with disjunctor.                      5.- Direct starting of a three-phase               13.- Manual star-delta starting of a
                           IAM31. 4-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic                 motor by GV protector with push-                    three-phase motor.
                                    Switch,4A,Curve C                              buttons and signalling.                        14.- Control of a single phase motor
                           FUS10. Module with 3 fuse-holders and power         6.- Direct starting of a three-phase                    direct and, with time-delay
                                    fuses.                                         motor by GV protector with two                      connection and disconnection.
                                                                                   boxes of push-buttons and                      15.- Starting of a three-phase motor with
                           TRA06. 3-Phase Power Transformer (custom                signalling.
                                    made).                                                                                             single- phase voltage.
                           CAR10. Capacitive Load (custom made).               7.- Turning inverted starter of a three-           16.- Motor speed control with a variator.
                                                                                   phase motor stopping before turning            17.-Parameters of the motor through
                           VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).                    in the opposite direction.
                           VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).                                                                      software.
                                                                               8.- Turning inverted starter of a three-           18.-Control of a two-speeds Dahlander
                           VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.                 phase motor without stopping before
                           More information in:                                                                                        motor.
                           www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/                  turning in the opposite direction.
                           units/electricity/basic/AI12.pdf                    9.- Turning inverted starter of a three-


 AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics
                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                              PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:
                                                                               Estatic Electricity:                               28.-Identification, coils measurement
                           ALI10. Power Supply Module                          1.- Static electricity checking,with an                 and starting-up of a single-phase
                           CAR30. Inductances Module                                electroscope and anelectrometer.                   motor.
                           CAR31. Capacitors Module                            2.- Static electricity experiments.                29.-Identification, measurement and
                           CAR32. Rectifier Diodes Module                      Direct current (DC) and Alternating Current             starting-up of an universal motor.
                           CAR33 .Resistive Components Module                  (AC):                                              30.-Identification, coils measuremt and
                                                                               3.- Ohm´s law verification.                             starting-up of a three phase motor.
                           LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp                                                                                Transformers:
                                                                               4.- Installation of the resistive components
                           LAM26. Lighting Module                                   module.                                       31.-Experiments and practices with a
                           MED65.Digital Multimeter                            5.- Total resistance of a circuit in series.            dismantled transformer.
                           REL50. Relays Module.                               6. Resistance of a circuit in parallel.            32.-Identification of the three-phase
                           VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage)                 7.- Power measurement of a resistive                    transformer.
                                                                                    circuit.                                      33.-Connection as single-phase
                           VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.                                                                transformer.
                                                                               8.- Total resistance of a circuit in series/in
                           TRA28. Three-phase transformer                           parallel.                                     34.-Star/star three-phase connection.
                           VAR16. Electromagnetism Kits with group of          9.- Connection of lamps in series.                 35.-Reverse star/star three-phase
                                   motor/generator                             10.-Lamps in parallel.                                  connection .
                           VAR17. Dismantled transformer kit                   11.-Analysis of the variable resistances           36.-Direct delta/delta three-phase
                                                                                    response curve.                                    connection.
                           VAR18. Electrostatic kit                                                                               37.-Star/delta three-phase connection.
                                                                               12.-Voltage divider analysis.
                           VAR25. Open Universal Motor.                                                                           38.-Three-phase/six-phase connection.
                                                                               13.-Lamp with variable lighting.
                                                                               14.-Simplification systems: Application of         39.-Transformer with coils in series in
                           More information in:                                     Kirchhoff´s first law. Application of              phase.
                           www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/                   Kirchhoff´s second law. Thevenin´s            RL, RC and RCL Circuits:
                           units/electricity/basic/AI13.pdf                         and Norton´s Theorem.                         40.-Analysis of a RL circuit in series.
                                                                               15.-Application of the superposition               41.-Analysis of a RL circuit in parallel.
                                                                                    theorem.                                      42.-Analysis of a RC circuit in series.
                                                                               16.-Resistive circuits in delta.                   43.-Analysis of a RC circuit in parallel.
                                                                               17.-Measurement and visualization of the           44.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in series.
                                                                                    alternating current.                          45.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in parallel.
                                                                               18.-Measurement of the phase angle                 Rectification and filtrate:
                                                                                    among voltages (AC).                          46.-Analysis of the rectifier diode
                                                                               Dynamic Electricity:                                    response curve.
                                                                               19.- Identification of the components of the       47.-Half wave rectification .
                                                                                    trainer.                                      48.-Rectification to feed the universal
                                                                               20.-Preparation of the power supply and of              motor.
                                                                                    the measurement instruments                   49.-Double wave rectification with two
                                                                               Electric capacity:                                      windings.
                                                                               21.-Load and unload analysis of a                  50.-Double wave with a Graezt's bridge.
                                                                                    capacitor.                                    51.-Half wave three-phase rectification.
                                                                               Magnetism, Electromagnetism and                    52.-Three-phase rectification in bridge.
                                                                               Electromagnetic induction:                         Electric circuits:
                                                                               22.-Electromagnetic Induction.                     53.-Basic electric installation with lamps.
                                                                               23.-Electromagnetic Induction.                     54.-Lamps controlled from two points
                                                                               24.- Electromagnet: Oersted's experiment.               and from three points.
                                                                               25.- The electromagnetic field (Electromagnets).   55.-Lamps control by a switch relay.
                                                                               Motors:                                            56.-Lamps control by a commutato relay.
                                                                               26.-Electric motors                                57.-Installation of a fluorescent tube
                                                                               27.-Generators.
                                                                            Page 43                                                                        www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                   4.1- Basic Electricity                         (continuation)

                  LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:             (continuation)

                                                                                 2   Applications      (continuation)
                                                                                      Energy Installations
                   AE1. Aerial Line Model
                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                            Included Modules:
                                            ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                        1.-   Assembly of the set.
                                            CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).                       2.-   Measurement of the voltage without loads.
                                            CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.                                             3.-   Measurement of the voltage with loads.
                                            CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
                                            TRA05. 3-Phase Power Transformer 220/127V, 1000VA.                          4.-   Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
                                            CAR18. Aerial Line Model.                                                   5.-   Fault to earth and measurement of the current through the
                                            TRA18. Petersen Coil.                                                             Petersen coil.
                                            More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                            catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE1.pdf

                   AE2. Reactive Energy Control and Compensation
                                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                            Included Modules:
                                            ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                        1.-   Assembly of the set with inductive load.
                                            CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).                       2.-   Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
                                            CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.                                             3.-   To calculate the necessary capacitors to get cos j= 1.
                                            CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
                                                                                                                        4.-   Capacitors connection and power factor measurement.
                                            More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                            catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE2.pdf

                   AE3. Test Unit for Magneto-thermal Automatic Switches
                                                                 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                            Included Modules:
                                                                                                                        1.- To connect the set.
4.- Electricity




                                            ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
                                            CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.                              2.- To simulate a high current (thermal) and to test if the automatic
                                            IAM13. 2-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 1A, Curve C.                    switch breaks.
                                            TRA19. Transformer for Experiments (custom made).                           3.- To measure the current and to check the tripping.
                                            More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                            catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AE4. Test Unit for Differential Automatic Switches
                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                            Included Modules:
                                            ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                        1.- To simulate a fault to earth and to test if the differential breaks.
                                            IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
                                                     class A.
                                            CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
                                            More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                            catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AE5. Relay Control Station
                                                                    SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                            Included Modules:
                                            ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                        1.- To connect the transformers to line.
                                            REL23. Overcurrent Relay and Fault to Earth.                                2.- To connect the protection relay.
                                            CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).                                            3.- To simulate a line fault and the relay will trip the circuit breaker.
                                            TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
                                            CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
                                            More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                            catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AE6. Energy Counters Control Station
                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                            Included Modules:
                                            ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                        1.- Assembly of the voltage and current transformers.
                                            CAR01. Fixed Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500 W.                                2.- To measure the energy consumed by the load with the energy
                                            TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.                               counter.
                                            TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
                                            MED72. Energy Counter.
                                            More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                            catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE6.pdf

                   AE7. Multi-Functional Electrical Protection Station
                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                            Included Modules:                                                           1.- Assembly of the station with the relay.
                                            ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
                                            CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).                       2.- To simulate faults in the line.
                                            CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.                                             3.- To simulate under and/or overvoltage, changing the line
                                            CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
                                            REL22. Multi-function Protection Relay ( software included).                    parameters.
                                            TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.                           4.- To check if the relay trips the contactor.
                                            CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
                                            TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
                                            More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                            catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AE8. Power & Torque Measurements of Electrical Motors
                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                            Included Modules:
                                            ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                        1.- Assembly of the set and to start the motor and dynamo.
                                            ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                   2.- To change the dynamo current and to measure both the power
                                            CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
                                            PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).                                          and the torque of the motor.
                                            REL08. Time Electronic Relay against Overcurrents (0.3-1.5A).               3.- To obtain the efficiency curve.
                                            MED60. Network Analyzer.
                                            VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
                                            FREND. Dynamo Brake.
                                            TECNEL/T. Tachodynamo.
                                            More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                            catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
                                                                                           Page 44
4.1- Basic Electricity                        (continuation)

LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
                                                    2 Applications                                     (continuation)
                                                                             Energy Installations (continuation)
  AE9. Directional Relay: Earth Fault Detection. Directional Power Flow Detection. Reactive Power Flow Detection
                                                                 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                       PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                      Included Modules:                                                                 1.-   Assembly of the set.
                                      ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                              2.-   Directional relay tripping test, in a case of an earth fault.
                                      CAR08. 3-Phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
                                      CON01. 3-Pole Contactor (24Vac).                                                  3.-   To test the tripping when power flows in the opposite direction.
                                      CAR11. 3-Phase Capacitive Load.                                                   4.-   To test the tripping when the reactive power is over or under
                                      TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.                                       certain limit.
                                      REL20. 1-Phase Directional Relay.
                                      CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
                                      TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
                                      More information in: http://www.edibon.com/products/
                                      catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf


                                                                                              Software
                                                       3   CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:

                                                                                                  With no physical connection between application/ module and computer, this
                                                                                                  complete package consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with




                                                                                                                                                                                                 4.- Electricity
          Application
        (several modules)
                                              +                                                   the Student/Application Software (A.../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the
                                                                                                  teacher knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the
                                 Instructor     Student/Application                               students. These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with
                                  Software           Software                                     all the information on the subject of study.



  With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
  Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
       - Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
       - Create easily new entries or delete them.
       - Create data bases with student information.
       - Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
       - Print reports.
       - Develop own examinations.
       - Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
      ...and many other facilities.

  The Instructor Software is the same for all the applications, and working in network
  configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.

  A.../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Application
  Software).
  It explains how to use the applications, run the experiments and what to do at any
  moment.
  Each application has its own Student Software package.
       - The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
       - Each Software Package contains:
         Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
         understanding of the studied subject.
         Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
         been understood.
         Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the
         applications, showing how to complete the exercises and practices.
         Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.

                                                                 Available Student/Applications Software Packages:
! Domestic Electrical Installations:            AD25A/SOF.Control station for domestic            AI6/SOF. DC motor starter.                        ! Energy Installations:
AD1A/SOF Robbery alarm Station.
        .                                                    electric services through the        AI7/SOF. A u t o m a t i c c h a n g e o f        AE1/SOF. Aerial line model.
AD3A/SOF. Fire alarm station.                                telephone.                                     speed of a Dahlander                    AE2/SOF. Reactive energy control and
AD5/SOF. Temporization of stairs.               AD28A/SOF.Integral control station of                       motor with change of                              compensation.
AD6A/SOF. L u m i n o s i t y c o n t r o l                  domesticelectric systems.                      direction.                              AE3/SOF. Test unit for magneto-thermal
            station.                            AD30/SOF. Gas control station.                    AI8/SOF. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m -                  automaticswitches.
AD8/SOF. Blinds activator.                      AD31/SOF. Movement and sound                                pensation (Power factor                 AE4/SOF. Test unit for differential
AD9A/SOF. Heating control station.                           detection and control.                         correction).                                      automatic switches.
AD11A/SOF. Network analyzer.                    AD32/SOF. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits                AI9/SOF Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
                                                                                                         .                                          AE5/SOF. Relay control station.
AD13/SOF. A u d i o d o o r e n t r y                        analyzer.                                      indirect electrical c o n t a c t s     AE6/SOF. Energy counters control
            system.                             AD33/SOF. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s             inTT neutral regimen.                             station.
AD14/SOF. Audio and video door                               simulator.                           AI10/SOF. People safety against indirect          AE7/SOF. Multi-functional electrical
            entry system.                       Industrial Electrical Installations:                        electrical contacts in TN                         protection station.
AD15A/SOF. Position control station.            AI1/SOF.     Star-delta starter.                            neutral regimen.                        AE8/SOF. Power & torque measurements
AD17A/SOF.Photoelectric control                 AI2/SOF.     Starter through auto-                AI11/SOF. People safety against indirect                    of electrical motors.
            position station.                                transformer.                                   electrical contacts in IT neutral       AE9/SOF. Directional Relay: Earth fault
AD24/SOF. Position Switch.                      AI3/SOF.     Speed commutator for                           regimen.                                          detection. Directional power
AD19A/SOF.Sound station.                                     Dahlander motor.                     AI12/SOF. Modular Trainer(AC motors).                       flow detection. Reactive
AD22/SOF. Flooding control station.             AI4/SOF.     Starter-inverter.                    AI13/SOF. M o d u l a r Tr a i n e r f o r                  power flow detection.
AD23/SOF. Wireless basic control                AI5/SOF.     AC wound rotor motor                           Electrotecnics.
            station (RF).                                    starter.

More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                                                                                             Page 45                                                                        www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                                            4.1- Basic Electricity                     (continuation)

                  LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:                                        (continuation)

                                                                                                                 Data Acquisition
                                                                 4                4   MUAD. Power Data Acquisition System
                                                                                                                                  MUAD is the perfect link between the applications/modules and the PC. MUAD is
                                                                                                                                  a continuous data acquisition system with virtual instrumentation, that measures,
                                            Cables to          Data acquisition                                                   analyzes and represents the parameters involved in the process.
                          1
                                    2
                                            interface             software                                                        MUAD allows voltage and current acquisition and measurement, data processing,
                                                                (MUAD/SOF)
                                        3
                                                                                                                                  frequency spectrum and all the functions of a digital oscilloscope.




                                                                                      Data acquisition
                    Connections
                      points                                                                                                      We easily connect the Electric Power Interface Box (EPIB) to the




                                                                                                         (DAB)
                               4
                                                                                                                                  application/module with the supplied cables (there are several connection points




                                                                                          board
                              “n”                       Electric power   Cable to
                                                        interface box    computer
                                                                                                                   Student        placed for it). The EPIB is connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board
                       Application                          (EPIB)                                                   post         (DAB), and by using the Data Acquisition with Virtual Instrumentation Software, the
                                                                                                                                  student can get results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the
                                                                                                                                  screen and work with them.


                  The MUAD system allows voltage and current measurement and acquisition, data processing, frequency spectrum and the functions of a digital oscilloscope.

                  This MUAD System includes EPIB + DAB + MUAD/SOF:
                  1)Hardware :
                    1.1) EPIB. Electric power interface box ( dimensions: 300 x 120 x 180 mm. approx.):
                          Interface that carries out the conditioning of the diverse signals that can be acquired in a process, for
                          their later treatment and visualisation.
                          In the front panel, the elements are separated in two parts: left-hand part to VOLTAGE sensors, and
                          right-hand part corresponds with CURRENT sensors.
4.- Electricity




                          Analog Input Channels:                                                                                                                                         EPIB
                               8 analog input channels. Sampling range: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
                               4 Tension sensors AC/DC, 400V. 4 Current sensors.


                   1.2) DAB. Data acquisition board :
                         PCI Data acquisition board (National Instruments) to be placed in a computer slot.
                         Bus PCI.
                         Analog input:
                            Number of channels= 16 single-ended or 8 differential.
                            Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
                            Sampling rate up to: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
                         Analog output:
                            Number of channels=2.
                            Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.                                                                                                                                DAB
                         Digital Input/Output:
                            Number channels=24inputs/outputs.
                         Timing: Counter/timers=2.


                  2) MUAD/SOF. Data acquisition software :
                     Data Acquisition Software with Graphic Representation:
                         Amicable graphical frame.
                         Compatible with actual Windows operating systems.
                         Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different signals.
                         Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
                         Sampling velocity up to 250 KSPS. (Kilo samples per second) guaranteed.


                  More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
                                                                                                                                                                                     MUAD/SOF




                                                                                                                       Page 46
                                                                                issue:01/11




                      DOMESTIC ELECTRIC INSTALLATIONS (10 CAI + CAL)

Ref: 0413-411/10S                                                                   1 / 3

ITEM         REFERENCE                            DESCRIPTION                 QTY.
         LIEBA                 BASIC ELECTRONICS AND ELECTRICITY
                               INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
  1      AD9A                  HEATING CONTROL STATION,INCLUDED:                1
         ALI02                 DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.                      1
         MED76                 THERMOSTAT FOR HEATING.                          1
         MED77                 THERMOSTAT FOR HEATING AND REFRIGERATION.        1
         SEL09                 DOUBLE LUMINOUS SIGNALLING RED-GREEN 230         2
                               VAC.
         TIM01                 BELL 70DB, 230 V.                                2
  2      AD9A/SOF*             COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE      10
                               APPLICATION - HEATING CONTROL STATION
  3      AD9A/CAL              COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR            10
                               HEATING CONTROL STATION
  4      AD14                  APPLICATION - AUDIO AND VIDEO DOOR ENTRY         1
                               SYSTEM,INCLUDED:
         ALI02                 DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.                      1
         POR06                 LOCK.                                            1
         POR05                 PHONE/MONITOR.                                   1
         POR04                 VIDEO CAMERA.                                    1
         POR07                 DIGITAL STATION.                                 1
         POR08                 VIDEO-INTERPHONE POWER SUPPLY.                   1
  5      AD14/SOF *            COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF D.C      10
                               CIRCUITS - AUDIO AND VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
  6      AD14/CAL              COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE        10
                               APPLICATION - AUDIO AND VIDEO DOOR ENTRY
                               SYSTEM. (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
  7      AD15A                 POSITION CONTROL STATION,INCLUDED:               1
         ALI02                 DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.                      1
         ALI03                 AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC).              1
         INT14                 1-POLE 2 SWITCHES.                               1
         SEL01                 LIGHT SIGNALLING BEACONS.                        1
         SEN04                 CYLINDRICAL INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SENSOR TYPE      1
                               PNP.
         SEN14                 AC CYLINDRICAL CAPACITIVE PROXIMITY SENSOR.      1
         SEN29                 AC CYLINDRICAL INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SENSOR.       1
         SEN01                 INSTANTANEOUS MICRO-SWITCH.                      1
         SEN26                 PRESENCE AND MOVEMENT SENSOR (WALL).             1
  8      AD15A/SOF*            COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE      10
                               APPLICATION - POSITION AND CONTROL STATION
  9      AD15A/CAL             COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR            10
                               POSITION CONTROL STATION
 10      AD19A                 SOUND STATION,INCLUDED:                          1
         ALI02                 DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.                      1
         ALI03                 AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC).              1
         AUD01                 ANALOG SOUND REGULATOR.                          1
         AUD04                 SPEAKER OF 2", 2W, 8OHM.                         3
Ref: 0413-411/10S                                                            2 / 3

ITEM         REFERENCE                   DESCRIPTION                   QTY.
 10      AUD06           BASIC AUDIO CENTRAL.                            1
         AUD20           ANALOG SOUND REGULATOR (MONO-STEREO).           1
         AUD02           DIGITAL SOUND REGULATOR.                        1
         AUD05           SPEAKER OF 4", 7W, 8OHM.                        3
         AUD03           WARNINGS EMITTER MODULE.                        1
         AUD08           BACKGROUND MUSIC REGULATOR 3W.                  1
         AUD10           DOUBLE BACKGROUND MUSIC REGULATOR.              1
 11      AD19A/SOF*      COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE      5
                         APPLICATION - SOUND STATION
 12      AD19A/CAL       COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR D.C.       5
                         CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
                         ANALYSIS) - SOUND STATION
 13      AD23            APPLICATION - WIRELESS BASIC CONTROL            1
                         STATION (RF),INCLUDED:
         ALI02           DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.                     1
         ALI03           AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC).             1
         DET13           WIRELESS INTRUSION DETECTOR RF.                 1
         DET14           WIRELESS PANIC PUSH-BUTTON RF.                  1
         DET15           WIRELESS 1-CHANNEL RECEPTOR RF.                 1
         SEL01           LIGHT SIGNALLING BEACONS.                       1
         TIM05           BELL + BUZZER.                                  1
 14      AD23/SOF*       COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE     10
                         APPLICATION - WIRELESS BASIC CONTROL
                         STATION (RF)
 15      AD23/CAL        COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE       10
                         APPLICATION - WIRELESS BASIC CONTROL
                         STATION (RF). (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
                         ANALYSIS)
 16      AD30            APPLICATION - GAS CONTROL STATION,INCLUDED:     1
         ALI02           DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.                     1
         ALI03           AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC).             1
         DET12           GAS ELECTRO-VALVE.                              1
         DET03           FITTED POWER SUPPLY (GAS AND FLOODING           1
                         DETECTOR).
         DET02           GAS DETECTOR.                                   1
 17      AD30/SOF*       COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE     10
                         APPLICATION - GAS CONTROL STATION
 18      AD23/CAL        COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE       10
                         APPLICATION - WIRELESS BASIC CONTROL
                         STATION (RF). (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
                         ANALYSIS)
 19      INS/SOF         CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE           1
                         (TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
 20      MUAD            ELECTRIC POWER DATA ACQUISITION                 1
                         SYSTEM,INCLUDED:
         EPIB            ELECTRIC POWER INTERFACE BOX                    1
         DAB             DATA ACQUISITION BOARD                          1
         MUAD/SOF        DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE                       1
 21      CABD            CABLES KIT                                      1
 22      0411PARTS       COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS                      1
Ref: 0413-411/10S                                                                       3 / 3

 ITEM        REFERENCE                             DESCRIPTION                    QTY.
  23      0411PA                   COMPLEMENTARY ITEM                               1
  24      0411IYPM                 INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP                     1
  25      0411CAPRO                TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS     1
  26      0411MANU                 DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS                        1
  27      0411TD                   TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"                   1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.

Notes:
1) Multipost option:
       This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
       units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.

2)Supply conditions included:
       a) Technical conditions:

           - Laboratories adaptation.
           - Installation of all units supplied.
           - Starting up for all units.
           - Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
           - Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
           teaching techniques uses.
           - Technology transfer.
       b) Commercial conditions:

           - Packing.
           - Financing charges.
           - C.I.F. charges.
       c) Others conditions:


           - 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit

                    .   Required services manual.
                    .   Assembly and installation manual.
                    .   Interface and software/control console manual.
                    .   Set in operation manual.
                    .   Safety norms manual.
                    .   Practices manual.
                    .   Maintenance manual.
                    .   Calibration manual.




            See Catalogues in next pages
4.1- Basic Electricity

   LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:

                                                                                   1   Frame                                                                    2   APPLICATIONS
          2   APPLICATIONS                                                   (applications support)
  (AD1A)                                                                                                                                                   (AI1)
                                                                 (BASB)

                                                                                                                               Modules automatic
                                           High Safety                                                                         anchorage system
                                           Automatic earth
           (AD3A)                         connection system                                                                                            (AI2)


                                                                 Sight of the frame with some modules
                                                                                 allocated
                                                                                               or
                                                               (BASS)
  (AD5)                                                                                                                                                        (AI4)




          (AD6A)                                                                                                                                       (AI5)

                                                                      Sight of the frame




                                                                                                                                                                                                 4.- Electricity
                                                                with some modules allocated


                                                 3   CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
  (AD8)                                                                                                             Teaching
                                                                                                                   Technique                               (AE7)
                                                                                                                      used

                                                                                   INS/SOF.   Teacher Software




                                                                                              EMT../SOF.
                                                                                   Student/Module Software
          (AD9A)                                                                                                                                       (AE8)
                                                4    MUAD. Electric Power Data Acquisition System
                                                                                                                  Teaching
                                                                                                                 Technique
                                                                                                                    used
                                                                                    EPIB. Electric power
                                                                                       interface box

  (AD13)                                                                                                                                                  (AE9)
                                                                          DAB. Data adquisition board


                                                                                MUAD/SOF. Power Data
                                                                                  acquisition System

                                                 5
                                                                                       Manuals


              Other APPLICATIONS                                                                                                                         Other APPLICATIONS
                                                                                                                TOTALLY
                                                                                                             SAFETY SYSTEM


     The complete laboratory includes part 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 ,and any part can be supplied individually or additionally.
     Minimum supply: Frame (BASB or BASS) + one Application + Manuals.


                                                                          Available Applications:
! Domestic Electric Installations:                                                     ! Industrial Electric Installations:
AD1A. Robbery alarm station.         AD22. Flooding control station.                   AI1. Star-delta starter.                            AI11. People safety against indirect electrical
                                                                                       AI2. S t a r t e r t h r o u g h a u t o -                contacts in IT neutral regimen.
AD3A. Fire alarm station.            AD23. Wireless basic control                            transformer.                                  AI12. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AD5. Temporization of stairs.               station (RF).                              AI3. Speed commutator for                           AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics.
AD6A. Luminosity control station.    AD25A. C o n t r o l s t a t i o n f o r                Dahlander motor.                              ! Energy Installations:
                                                                                       AI4. Starter-inverter.                              AE1. Aerial line model.
AD8. Blinds activator.                      domestic electric services                 AI5. AC wound rotor motor                           AE2. Reactive energy control and
AD9A. Heating control station.              through the telephone.                           starter.                                            compensation.
AD11A. Network analyzer.             AD28A. Integral control station of                AI6. DC motor starter.                              AE3. Test unit for magneto-thermal automatic
                                            domestic electric systems.                 AI7. Automatic change of speed                            switches.
AD13. Audio door entry system.                                                               of a Dahlander motor with                     AE4. Test unit for differential automatic switches.
AD14. Audio and video door           AD30. Gas control station.                              change of direction.                          AE5. Relay control station.
       entry system.                 AD31. Movement and sound                          AI8. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m -              AE6. Energy counters control station.
                                            detection and control.                           pensation (Power factor                       AE7. Multi-functional electrical protection
AD15A. Position control station.                                                             correction).                                        station.
AD17A. Photoelectric control         AD32. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits                    AI9. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t           AE8. Power & torque measurements of
       position station.                    analyzer.                                        indirect electrical contacts                        electrical motors.
                                     AD33. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s             in TT neutral regimen.                        AE9. Directional Relay: Earth fault detection.
AD24. Position Switch.                                                                 AI10. People safety against indirect                      Directional power flow detection. Reactive
AD19A. Sound station.                       simulator.                                       electrical contacts in TN                           power flow detection.
                                                                                             neutral regimen.

More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf


                                                                                          Page 37                                                                          www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                    4.1- Basic Electricity                       (continuation)

                  LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:                    (continuation)


                                                                                       1   Frame
                  Applications support. There are two options to chose:

                   BAS-B. Basic Frame                                     SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
                                                         Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
                                                         Possibility of housing up to 10 different modules.
                                                         Automatic anchorage system for any module.
                                                         Automatic earth connection system.

                                or
                   BASS. Double Frame
                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
                                                         Double frame, single side working post.
                                                         Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
                                                         Dimensions approx.:1300mm x 800mm x 700mm.
                                                         Possibility of housing until 12 different modules at the same
                                                         time. Transparent internal separation. Automatic anchorage
                                                         system for any module. Automatic earth connection system.
                                                         Dimensions: 1300x800x700mm. approx. Weight:



                                                                                       Applications
4.- Electricity




                                                                                   2

                   Main features:
                    Painted steel modules. All modules have handles and diagram. Automatic anchorage system for housing the modules in the frame. Automatic earth connection in the
                    modules. Safety connections. Safety wires.
                    There is a manual for each application (8 manuals normally supplied).


                                                                           Domestic Electrical Installations
                   AD1A. Robbery Alarm Station
                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                               PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                   Included Modules:                                                     1.- Assembly of the station with intrusion detector and alarm.
                                                   ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                    2.- Assembly of the station with glass breaking detector and
                                                   ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                 alarm.
                                                   DET27. Glass Break Detector.
                                                                                                                         3.- Assembly of the station with both types of detectors and alarm.
                                                   INT32. Intrusion Switch/Detector with Relay 1000W. (2 units).
                                                   SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.                                                4.- Assembly of the station with infrared detectors.
                                                   SEL21. Indoor Siren.
                                                   VAR07. Kit: Burglar Alarm Central + infrared ele. + battery.
                                                   More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                                   catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD1A.pdf

                   AD3A. Fire Alarm Station
                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                               PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                   Included Modules:
                                                   ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                    1.- Assembly of the station with fire detector, smoke detector and
                                                   ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                 alarm.
                                                   ALA02. Fire Alarm Station (with battery).
                                                   DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.                           2.- Test of the station with fire detector.
                                                   DET21. Fire Detector through Ionization for Central.                  3.- Test of the station with smoke detector.
                                                   SEL21. Indoor Siren.                                                  4.- Test of the station with detection of fire by the thermal detector.
                                                   DET10. Water Electro-valve.                                           5.- Activation of the electro-valve following the detection of the
                                                   DET22. Fire Thermal Detector.                                             fire.
                                                   SEL17. Fire Indicators, Bell type.
                                                   More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                                   catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AD5. Temporization of Stairs
                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                               PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                   Included Modules:                                                     1.- Assembly of the basic set of temporization.
                                                   ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                    2.- Test of the set from two points with incandescent lamps.
                                                   CTI10. Automatic of Stairs.                                           3.- Test of the set from two points with fluorescent lamps.
                                                   INT21. Switch+Commutator Group+Bell Push-Button.
                                                   LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
                                                   LAM13. 2 Low Consumption Fluorescent Lamps. (2 units).
                                                   More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                                   catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD5.pdf


                   AD6A. Luminosity Control Station
                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                               PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                                   Included Modules:
                                                   ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                    1.-   Assembly of the control station.
                                                   COM14. 2 Commutators.                                                 2.-   Control of luminosity of an halogen lamp.
                                                   LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.                       3.-   Control of luminosity of an incandescent lamp.
                                                   REG06. Voltage Electronic Regulator (Switch) 40 to 300W/230Vac.       4.-   Test of the station by movement sensor.
                                                   INT18. 1-pole Switch + 1-pole Switch with Light.
                                                   LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.                                               5.-   Luminosity control.
                                                   LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.                                              6.-   Complete control.
                                                   SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
                                                   More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                                   catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD6A.pdf

                                                                                                   Page 38
4.1- Basic Electricity        (continuation)

LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:            (continuation)
                                                              2   Applications      (continuation)
                                                    Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
 AD8. Blinds Activator
                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                         Included Modules:
                         ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                          1.- Assembly of the activator (motor, detectors and switches).
                         INT22. 2 Switches for Blinds.
                         DET19. Twilight Detector.                                                   2.- Blind activation by pulsators (push-buttons).
                         DET20. Light Detector.                                                      3.- Blind activation by sensors.
                         VAR01. Motor for Blinds / Curtains.
                         PUL29. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (without Interlock).
                         PUL30. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (with Interlock).
                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                         catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

 AD9A. Heating Control Station
                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                         Included Modules:
                         ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                          1.- Assembly of the heating control station.
                         MED76. Thermostat for Heating.                                              2.- Assembly of the heating and refrigeration control.
                         MED77. Thermostat for Heating and Refrigeration.
                         SEL09. 2 Double Luminous Signalling red-green 230Vac. (2 units).            3.- Test with several temperatures.
                         TIM01. 2 Bell 70dB,230V. (2 units).
                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                         catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
 AD11A. Network Analyzer
                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                         Included Modules:




                                                                                                                                                                          4.- Electricity
                         ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                        1.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
                         MED11. AC Ammeter (0-10A).                                                      frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
                         MED25. Pointer Frequency Meter(45-65Hz).                                        of a 220V single-phase circuit.
                         MED32. 1-Phase Wattmeter 230V.
                         MED21. AC Voltmeter (0-250V).                                               2.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
                         MED30. 1-Phase Phasemeter 230V.                                                 frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
                         MED38. 1-Phase Varmeter 230V.                                                   of a 380V three-phase circuit.
                         MED12. AC Ammeter (custom made). (3 units).
                         MED22. AC Voltmeter (0-400V). (3 units).
                         MED31. 3-Phase Phasemeter 400V. (3 units).
                         MED39. 3-Phase Balanced Varmeter 440V.
                         MED33. 3-Phase Balanced Wattmeter 440V.
                         MED63. Synchronoscope.
                         MED64. Phase Sequence Indicator.
                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                         catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
 AD13. Audio Door Entry System
                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                      PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                         Included Modules:                                                           1.- Assembly of the system.
                         ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                          2.- To check the interphone operation.
                         POR01. Phones Power Supply.
                         POR02. Phone.
                         POR03. Interphone.
                         POR06. Lock.
                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                         catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

 AD14. Audio and Video Door Entry System
                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                      PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                         Included Modules:                                                           1.- Assembly of the system.
                         ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
                         POR06. Lock.                                                                2.- To check of the video and audio operation.
                         POR05. Phone/Monitor.
                         POR04. Video Camera.
                         POR07. Digital Station.
                         POR08. Video-Interphone Power Supply.
                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                         catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD14.pdf
 AD15A. Position Control Station
                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                         Included Modules:
                         ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                          1.- Assembly of the station with sensors.
                         ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                   2.- Test of the capacitive detection of a body.
                         INT14. 1-pole 2 Switches.                                                   3.- Test of the inductive position detection of a body.
                         SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
                         SEN04. Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor type PNP.                     4.- Assembly of the station with presence and movement wall
                         SEN14. AC Cylindrical Capacitive Proximity Sensor.                              sensor.
                         SEN29. AC Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor.                           5.- To check the movement detection of a body.
                         SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-Switch.
                         SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                         catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

 AD17A. Photoelectric Control Position Station
                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                         Included Modules:                                                           1.-   Assembly of the control station.
                         ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
                         ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                   2.-   Test of the detection with cylindrical sensor.
                         LAM04. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (24Vac). (2 units).                         3.-   Test of the detection with miniature sensor.
                         SEN18. Cylindrical Photoelectric Sensor.
                         SEN19. Miniature Photoelectric Sensor.                                      4.-   Test of the detection with compact sensor.
                         SEN20. Compact Photoelectric Sensor.                                        5.-   Assembly of the control station with battery and sensors.
                         SEN21. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
                         SEN22. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).                             6.-   Test of the detection with emitters and receivers.
                         SEN23. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).                           7.-   Test with only emitters and receptors.
                         SEN24. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
                         More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                         catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
                                                                        Page 39                                                                          www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                  4.1- Basic Electricity                      (continuation)

                  LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:            (continuation)

                                                                                2   Applications      (continuation)
                                                                       Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
                   AD24. Position Switch
                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:
                                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                          1.- Instantaneous Micro-switch.
                                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply.                                           2.- MBB Micro-switch.
                                           LAM03. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (220Vac).                                   3.- BBM Micro-switch.
                                           SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-switch.
                                           SEN02. MBB Micro-switch.
                                           SEN03. BBM Micro-switch.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AD19A. Sound Station
                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:
                                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                          1.-   Mono-stereo system installation.
                                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
                                           AUD01. Analog Sound Regulator.                                              2.-   Mono system with warnings reception.
                                           AUD04. Speaker of 2”, 2W, 8 ohm. (3 units).                                 3.-   Mono-stereo system installation with warnings reception.
                                           AUD06. Basic Audio Central.                                                 4.-   Stereo system installation with warnings reception.
                                           AUD20. Analog Sound Regulator (mono-stereo).
                                           AUD02. Digital Sound Regulator.                                             5.-   Background Music installation.
                                           AUD05. Speaker of 4”, 7W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
                                           AUD03. Warnings Emitter Module.
                                           AUD08. Background Music Regulator 3W.
                                           AUD10. Double Background Music Regulator.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
4.- Electricity




                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AD22. Flooding Control Station                 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:
                                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                          1.- Assembly of the flooding control with a probe.
                                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                   2.- Test of the flooding control.
                                           DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
                                           DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).                                      3.- Test of the flooding control acting on an eletro-valve.
                                           DET10. Water Electro-valve.
                                           DET11. Probe for Water Electro-valve. (2 units).
                                           SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
                                           SEL21. Indoor Siren.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AD23. Wireless Basic Control Station (RF)
                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:
                                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                          1.- Wireless intrusion detection and alarm.
                                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                   2.- Wireless panic button alarm.
                                           DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
                                           DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
                                           DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
                                           DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
                                           SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
                                           TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AD25A. Control Station for Domestic Electric Services through the Telephone
                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:                                                           1.-   Smoke detection.
                                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
                                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                   2.-   Gas detection and electro-valve control.
                                           CTR01. Basic Control Module.                                                3.-   Flooding detection and electro-valve control.
                                           DET01. Flooding Detector.
                                           DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector). (3units).           4.-   Temperature and Battery.
                                           DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).                                      5.-   Intrusion detection.
                                           DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.                                   6.-   Wireless detection.
                                           DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
                                           DET10. Water Electro-valve.                                                 7.-   Complete control of home electric services through the
                                           DET12. Gas Electro-valve.                                                         telephone.
                                           DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
                                           DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
                                           DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
                                           VAR05. Tones Dialling Telephone.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AD28A. Integral Control Station of Domestic Electric Systems
                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:
                                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                          1.- Assembly of the complete system with               the smoke,
                                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                       flooding and gas detectors.
                                           CTR02. Advanced Control Module.
                                           CTR05. Power Module 72W.                                                    2.- Test of the station with smoke, flooding and gas
                                           CTR07. Timers Module.                                                           detectors.
                                           CTR08. Inputs Module 24V.                                                   3.- To set the temporization and monitoring the results.
                                           CTR11. Outputs Module 24V.
                                           CTR17. Infrared Remote Control for Control Modules.                         4.- Assembly of the complete system with infrared and
                                           CTR18. Infrared Receptor.                                                       instrusion detectors.
                                           DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).                                      5.- Test of the station with infrared and instrusion
                                           DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.                                       detectors.
                                           DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
                                           DET09. Intrusion Detector for domestic control.                             6.- Electro-valves activation.
                                           DET10. Water Electro-valve.                                                 7.- Wireless assembly of the sensor through infrared
                                           DET12. Gas Electro-valve.                                                       control.
                                           VAR08. Monitor.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD28A.pdf
                                                                                           Page 40
4.1- Basic Electricity          (continuation)

LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:             (continuation)
                                                               2   Applications      (continuation)
                                                      Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
 AD30. Gas Control Station
                                                 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:                                                          1.- Gas detection.
                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                  2.- Electro-valve activation.
                           DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
                           DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
                           DET02. Gas Detector.
                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

 AD31. Movement and Sound Detection and Control
                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:
                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                         1.- Movement and sound detection controlled by switches.
                           INT15. 2 Switches with Light.                                              2.- Movement and sound detection controlled by pulsators.
                           LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
                           INT31. Intrusion Switch/Detector from 40 to 300W.
                           LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
                           PUL22. 2 Light Push-Buttons.
                           TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
 AD32. 24vac/12vdc Circuits Analyzer
                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:




                                                                                                                                                                              4.- Electricity
                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                         1.- AC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
                           ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).                        2.- DC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
                           MED04. DC Milliammeter (0-600 mA).
                           MED05. DC Ammeter (0-1.5A).
                           MED08. AC Milliammeter (0-600mA).
                           MED09. AC Ammeter (0-2.5A).
                           MED15. DC Voltmeter (0-5V).
                           MED16. DC Voltmeter (0-50V).
                           MED19. AC Voltmeter (0-10V).
                           MED20. AC Voltmeter (0-60V).
                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

 AD33. Installations Faults Simulator
                                                 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:
                           ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.                                         1.-   Ground fault simulation of a plug base.
                           COM14. 2 Commutators (2 units).                                            2.-   Fault simulation between phases of a plug base.
                           ENC09. 2-pole European Socket with Safety Device.(2 units).                3.-   Ground fault simulation of an incandescent lamp base.
                           COM21.Inverter + Group of 2 Commutators. (2 units).                        4.-   Ground fault simulation of a fluorescent lamp base.
                           LAM01. Lamps.                                                              5.-   Fault simulation between phases of an incandescent lamp
                           LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).                       base.
                           LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.                                                   6.-   To simulate fault of power-supply contact in the lamp base.
                           MED65. Digital Multimeter.                                                 7.-   To simulate fault of contact of the switch.
                           FUS04. 3 Fuse-holders 10A, 230Vac (include 2, 4,6,10A).
                                    Fault box.                                                        8.-   To simulate fault of contact of the fuse.
                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/                              9.-   To simulate fault of contact of the fluorescent base.
                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
                                                    Industrial Electrical Installations
 AI1. Star-Delta Starter                         SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:
                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                       1.-   Assembly of the starter.
                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
                           CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac. (3 units)).                                2.-   Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
                           IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.               3.-   Measurement of the star current and delta current.
                           MED60. Network Analyzer.
                           PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).                                    4.-   Direct start of the motor. Measurement of the starting current.
                           REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
                           REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
                           VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

 AI2 Starter through Auto-transformer
                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:
                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                  1.- Assembly of the starter.
                           CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).                                2.- Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
                           IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
                           MED60. Network Analyzer.                                                   3.- Measurement of both the star and delta current.
                           PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
                           REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
                           REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
                           TRA14. 3-Phase Auto-transformer.
                           VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

 AI3. Speed Commutator for Dahlander Motor
                                                 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:
                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                       1.- Assembly of the commutator.
                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                  2.- Test of the commutator changing the speed of a Dahlander
                           CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
                           IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.                   motor.
                           MED60. Network Analyzer.                                                   3.- Measurement of the voltage and current.
                           PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
                           REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
                           REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
                           VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
                                                                          Page 41                                                                         www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                           4.1- Basic Electricity                            (continuation)

                  LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:           (continuation)

                                                                               2   Applications (continuation)
                                                                      Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
                   AI4. Starter-Inverter
                                                                 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                  PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:
                                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
                                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                             1.- Assembly of the starter.
                                           CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).                                     2.- To test of the direct start of a squirrel cage motor.
                                           CON11. 3-pole Contactor- Inverter (220Vac).
                                           MED60. Network Analyzer.                                              3.- To invert the rotation direction of the motor.
                                           PUL03. Push-Buttons with Light (220Vac).(2 units).
                                           REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A).
                                           VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AI5. AC Wound Rotor Motor Starter
                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                 PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:
                                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                  1.- Assembly of the starter.
                                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                             2.- To test the starter changing the resistances step by step.
                                           VAR06. Motor (EMT8) (wound rotor).
                                           CAR22. AC Starting Rheostat.
                                           IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
                                           CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
                                           PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AI6. DC Motor Starter
4.- Electricity




                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
                                           Included Modules:                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                  1.- Direct starter.
                                           ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
                                           VAR04. Motor (EMT5) (DC motor).                                       2.- Starter rheostat.
                                           CAR23. DC Starting Rheostat.
                                           IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
                                           CON03. 3-pole Contactor (12Vdc).
                                           PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
                                           CAR20. Diodes and Thyristors.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AI7. Automatic Change of Speed of a Dahlander Motor with Change of Direction
                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                 PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:
                                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                  1.- Assembly of the set.
                                           IAM24. 3-pole+neutral Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 6A,           2.- Motor starting with right turning direction at high speed. R.p.m
                                                    Curve C.                                                         and consumption measurements.
                                           CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (5 units).
                                           REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A). (2 units).        3.- Motor stop and change to left the turning direction at high
                                           PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NC Contacts). (5 units).           speed.
                                           PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NO Contacts). (5 units).       4.- Change to low speed.
                                           VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).                                5.- Motor stop and change to right the turning direction.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/                         6.- Change to high speed. R.p.m and consumption
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf                          measurements.

                   AI8. Reactive Power Compensation (Power Factor Correction)
                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                 PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:                                                     1.- Measurement of active power consumed by a receiver.
                                           ALI02.   Domestic Main Power Supply.                                  2.- Measurement of reactive power consumed by a receiver.
                                                                                                                 3.- Measurement of apparent power consumed by a receiver.
                                           CAR04. Variable Resistive Load,150 ohm, 500W.                         4.- Measurement of power factor of a receiver.
                                                                                                                 5.- Measurement of active energy consumed by a receiver.
                                           CAR09. Capacitive Load 4 x 7 mF.                                      6.- Measurement of reactive energy consumed by a receiver.
                                           CAR12. Inductive Load 0-33-78-140-193-236 mH. (2 units).              7.- Compensation of reactive energy (improvement of the power
                                                                                                                     factor).
                                           MED60B.Network Analyzer with active and reactive energy counters.     8.- Comparison of the active energy consumed after the
                                                                                                                     compensation.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/                         9.- Comparison of the reactive energy consumed after the
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AI8.pdf                             compensation.
                                                                                                                 10.-Measurement of power factor after the compensation.

                   AI9. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TT Neutral Regimen
                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                 PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           Included Modules:
                                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                  1.- Study of an isolation fault in TT neutral regimen.
                                           CAR05. Double Variable Resistive Load , 150 ohm, 500 W.
                                           Resistance 1600 W.                                                    2.- Structure of a differential switch. Necessity to use a differential
                                           COM12.Commutator/Switch.                                                  switch.
                                           PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).                                3.- Study of the selectivity among differential switches.
                                           TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
                                           IAD13. 3-pole + neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 25A,
                                                    300mA, class AC, instantaneous.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AI10. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TN Neutral Regimen
                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
                                           Included Modules:                                                                             PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
                                           COM12.Commutator/Switch. (2 units).                                   1.- Study of an isolation fault in TN neutral regimen.
                                           TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.                                   2.- Measurement of the ground loop impedances.
                                           IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,        3.- Indirect contact with defect mass.
                                                    class A.                                                     4.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
                                           Resistance 200 W.
                                           Resistance 100 W, 72W.                                                    TN-C conditions.
                                           More information in: www.edibon.com/products/                         5.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
                                           catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf                          TN-S conditions.
                                                                                           Page 42
4.1- Basic Electricity          (continuation)

LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
                                                    2 Applications                    (continuation)
                                                      Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
 AI11. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in IT Neutral Regimen
                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
                                                                                                                         PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:
                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                1.- Study of an isolation simple fault.             5.- Study of the ground loop impedance.
                           INT01. 1-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
                           INT02. 2-pole Load Switch. (2 units).               2.- Study of an isolation double fault
                           CPA.     Isolation Permanent Controller.                (only with one mass).
                           Capacitor 300V. 200 nF .(2 units).
                           Resistance 100 W.                                   3.- Study with several masses.
                           Resistance 10 W.
                           More information in:                                4.- Operation of the isolation controller.
                           www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
                           units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

 A12. Modular Trainer (AC Motors)
                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                                PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:
                           ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                1.- Direct starting of a three-phase                    phase motor with microswitch and
                           ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).               motor through contactor, with some                  push-buttons box.
                           PUL48. 3 Double Chamber Push-buttons. (2                stop and start push-buttons.                   10.- Star-delta starting with an turn
                                    units).                                    2.- Configuration of a magnetic                         inverter of a three-phase motor.
                           LAM02. Auxiliary Lamps(3 lamps.                         protection system, with stop mush              11.- Automatic star-delta starting of a
                           CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (4 units).             room button.                                        three-phase motor.
                           VAR09. Frequency variator.                          3.- Direct starting of a three-phase               12.- Turning inverted starter of a three-
                                                                                   motor by GV protector with a switch.                phase motor with microswitch, with




                                                                                                                                                                                4.- Electricity
                           REL30. Synchronization Relay (variable delay).
                           REL47. Thermal relay (GV protector) module          4.- Direct starting of a three-phase                    start push-buttons, stop and
                                    (2 units).                                     motor through impulses contactor.                   function cycle. (Direct).
                           REL45. Module with disjunctor.                      5.- Direct starting of a three-phase               13.- Manual star-delta starting of a
                           IAM31. 4-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic                 motor by GV protector with push-                    three-phase motor.
                                    Switch,4A,Curve C                              buttons and signalling.                        14.- Control of a single phase motor
                           FUS10. Module with 3 fuse-holders and power         6.- Direct starting of a three-phase                    direct and, with time-delay
                                    fuses.                                         motor by GV protector with two                      connection and disconnection.
                                                                                   boxes of push-buttons and                      15.- Starting of a three-phase motor with
                           TRA06. 3-Phase Power Transformer (custom                signalling.
                                    made).                                                                                             single- phase voltage.
                           CAR10. Capacitive Load (custom made).               7.- Turning inverted starter of a three-           16.- Motor speed control with a variator.
                                                                                   phase motor stopping before turning            17.-Parameters of the motor through
                           VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).                    in the opposite direction.
                           VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).                                                                      software.
                                                                               8.- Turning inverted starter of a three-           18.-Control of a two-speeds Dahlander
                           VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.                 phase motor without stopping before
                           More information in:                                                                                        motor.
                           www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/                  turning in the opposite direction.
                           units/electricity/basic/AI12.pdf                    9.- Turning inverted starter of a three-


 AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics
                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                              PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                           Included Modules:
                                                                               Estatic Electricity:                               28.-Identification, coils measurement
                           ALI10. Power Supply Module                          1.- Static electricity checking,with an                 and starting-up of a single-phase
                           CAR30. Inductances Module                                electroscope and anelectrometer.                   motor.
                           CAR31. Capacitors Module                            2.- Static electricity experiments.                29.-Identification, measurement and
                           CAR32. Rectifier Diodes Module                      Direct current (DC) and Alternating Current             starting-up of an universal motor.
                           CAR33 .Resistive Components Module                  (AC):                                              30.-Identification, coils measuremt and
                                                                               3.- Ohm´s law verification.                             starting-up of a three phase motor.
                           LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp                                                                                Transformers:
                                                                               4.- Installation of the resistive components
                           LAM26. Lighting Module                                   module.                                       31.-Experiments and practices with a
                           MED65.Digital Multimeter                            5.- Total resistance of a circuit in series.            dismantled transformer.
                           REL50. Relays Module.                               6. Resistance of a circuit in parallel.            32.-Identification of the three-phase
                           VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage)                 7.- Power measurement of a resistive                    transformer.
                                                                                    circuit.                                      33.-Connection as single-phase
                           VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.                                                                transformer.
                                                                               8.- Total resistance of a circuit in series/in
                           TRA28. Three-phase transformer                           parallel.                                     34.-Star/star three-phase connection.
                           VAR16. Electromagnetism Kits with group of          9.- Connection of lamps in series.                 35.-Reverse star/star three-phase
                                   motor/generator                             10.-Lamps in parallel.                                  connection .
                           VAR17. Dismantled transformer kit                   11.-Analysis of the variable resistances           36.-Direct delta/delta three-phase
                                                                                    response curve.                                    connection.
                           VAR18. Electrostatic kit                                                                               37.-Star/delta three-phase connection.
                                                                               12.-Voltage divider analysis.
                           VAR25. Open Universal Motor.                                                                           38.-Three-phase/six-phase connection.
                                                                               13.-Lamp with variable lighting.
                                                                               14.-Simplification systems: Application of         39.-Transformer with coils in series in
                           More information in:                                     Kirchhoff´s first law. Application of              phase.
                           www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/                   Kirchhoff´s second law. Thevenin´s            RL, RC and RCL Circuits:
                           units/electricity/basic/AI13.pdf                         and Norton´s Theorem.                         40.-Analysis of a RL circuit in series.
                                                                               15.-Application of the superposition               41.-Analysis of a RL circuit in parallel.
                                                                                    theorem.                                      42.-Analysis of a RC circuit in series.
                                                                               16.-Resistive circuits in delta.                   43.-Analysis of a RC circuit in parallel.
                                                                               17.-Measurement and visualization of the           44.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in series.
                                                                                    alternating current.                          45.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in parallel.
                                                                               18.-Measurement of the phase angle                 Rectification and filtrate:
                                                                                    among voltages (AC).                          46.-Analysis of the rectifier diode
                                                                               Dynamic Electricity:                                    response curve.
                                                                               19.- Identification of the components of the       47.-Half wave rectification .
                                                                                    trainer.                                      48.-Rectification to feed the universal
                                                                               20.-Preparation of the power supply and of              motor.
                                                                                    the measurement instruments                   49.-Double wave rectification with two
                                                                               Electric capacity:                                      windings.
                                                                               21.-Load and unload analysis of a                  50.-Double wave with a Graezt's bridge.
                                                                                    capacitor.                                    51.-Half wave three-phase rectification.
                                                                               Magnetism, Electromagnetism and                    52.-Three-phase rectification in bridge.
                                                                               Electromagnetic induction:                         Electric circuits:
                                                                               22.-Electromagnetic Induction.                     53.-Basic electric installation with lamps.
                                                                               23.-Electromagnetic Induction.                     54.-Lamps controlled from two points
                                                                               24.- Electromagnet: Oersted's experiment.               and from three points.
                                                                               25.- The electromagnetic field (Electromagnets).   55.-Lamps control by a switch relay.
                                                                               Motors:                                            56.-Lamps control by a commutato relay.
                                                                               26.-Electric motors                                57.-Installation of a fluorescent tube
                                                                               27.-Generators.
                                                                            Page 43                                                                        www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                   4.1- Basic Electricity                         (continuation)

                  LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:             (continuation)

                                                                                 2   Applications      (continuation)
                                                                                      Energy Installations
                   AE1. Aerial Line Model
                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                            Included Modules:
                                            ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                        1.-   Assembly of the set.
                                            CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).                       2.-   Measurement of the voltage without loads.
                                            CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.                                             3.-   Measurement of the voltage with loads.
                                            CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
                                            TRA05. 3-Phase Power Transformer 220/127V, 1000VA.                          4.-   Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
                                            CAR18. Aerial Line Model.                                                   5.-   Fault to earth and measurement of the current through the
                                            TRA18. Petersen Coil.                                                             Petersen coil.
                                            More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                            catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE1.pdf

                   AE2. Reactive Energy Control and Compensation
                                                                SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                            Included Modules:
                                            ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                        1.-   Assembly of the set with inductive load.
                                            CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).                       2.-   Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
                                            CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.                                             3.-   To calculate the necessary capacitors to get cos j= 1.
                                            CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
                                                                                                                        4.-   Capacitors connection and power factor measurement.
                                            More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                            catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE2.pdf

                   AE3. Test Unit for Magneto-thermal Automatic Switches
                                                                 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                            Included Modules:
                                                                                                                        1.- To connect the set.
4.- Electricity




                                            ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
                                            CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.                              2.- To simulate a high current (thermal) and to test if the automatic
                                            IAM13. 2-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 1A, Curve C.                    switch breaks.
                                            TRA19. Transformer for Experiments (custom made).                           3.- To measure the current and to check the tripping.
                                            More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                            catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AE4. Test Unit for Differential Automatic Switches
                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                            Included Modules:
                                            ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                        1.- To simulate a fault to earth and to test if the differential breaks.
                                            IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
                                                     class A.
                                            CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
                                            More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                            catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AE5. Relay Control Station
                                                                    SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                            Included Modules:
                                            ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                        1.- To connect the transformers to line.
                                            REL23. Overcurrent Relay and Fault to Earth.                                2.- To connect the protection relay.
                                            CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).                                            3.- To simulate a line fault and the relay will trip the circuit breaker.
                                            TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
                                            CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
                                            More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                            catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AE6. Energy Counters Control Station
                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                            Included Modules:
                                            ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                        1.- Assembly of the voltage and current transformers.
                                            CAR01. Fixed Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500 W.                                2.- To measure the energy consumed by the load with the energy
                                            TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.                               counter.
                                            TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
                                            MED72. Energy Counter.
                                            More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                            catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE6.pdf

                   AE7. Multi-Functional Electrical Protection Station
                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                    PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                            Included Modules:                                                           1.- Assembly of the station with the relay.
                                            ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
                                            CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).                       2.- To simulate faults in the line.
                                            CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.                                             3.- To simulate under and/or overvoltage, changing the line
                                            CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
                                            REL22. Multi-function Protection Relay ( software included).                    parameters.
                                            TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.                           4.- To check if the relay trips the contactor.
                                            CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
                                            TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
                                            More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                            catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                   AE8. Power & Torque Measurements of Electrical Motors
                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                     PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                            Included Modules:
                                            ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                        1.- Assembly of the set and to start the motor and dynamo.
                                            ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).                                   2.- To change the dynamo current and to measure both the power
                                            CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
                                            PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).                                          and the torque of the motor.
                                            REL08. Time Electronic Relay against Overcurrents (0.3-1.5A).               3.- To obtain the efficiency curve.
                                            MED60. Network Analyzer.
                                            VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
                                            FREND. Dynamo Brake.
                                            TECNEL/T. Tachodynamo.
                                            More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
                                            catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
                                                                                           Page 44
4.1- Basic Electricity                        (continuation)

LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
                                                    2 Applications                                     (continuation)
                                                                             Energy Installations (continuation)
  AE9. Directional Relay: Earth Fault Detection. Directional Power Flow Detection. Reactive Power Flow Detection
                                                                 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY                                                       PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
                                      Included Modules:                                                                 1.-   Assembly of the set.
                                      ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.                                              2.-   Directional relay tripping test, in a case of an earth fault.
                                      CAR08. 3-Phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
                                      CON01. 3-Pole Contactor (24Vac).                                                  3.-   To test the tripping when power flows in the opposite direction.
                                      CAR11. 3-Phase Capacitive Load.                                                   4.-   To test the tripping when the reactive power is over or under
                                      TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.                                       certain limit.
                                      REL20. 1-Phase Directional Relay.
                                      CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
                                      TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
                                      More information in: http://www.edibon.com/products/
                                      catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf


                                                                                              Software
                                                       3   CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:

                                                                                                  With no physical connection between application/ module and computer, this
                                                                                                  complete package consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with




                                                                                                                                                                                                 4.- Electricity
          Application
        (several modules)
                                              +                                                   the Student/Application Software (A.../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the
                                                                                                  teacher knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the
                                 Instructor     Student/Application                               students. These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with
                                  Software           Software                                     all the information on the subject of study.



  With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
  Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
       - Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
       - Create easily new entries or delete them.
       - Create data bases with student information.
       - Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
       - Print reports.
       - Develop own examinations.
       - Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
      ...and many other facilities.

  The Instructor Software is the same for all the applications, and working in network
  configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.

  A.../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Application
  Software).
  It explains how to use the applications, run the experiments and what to do at any
  moment.
  Each application has its own Student Software package.
       - The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
       - Each Software Package contains:
         Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
         understanding of the studied subject.
         Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
         been understood.
         Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the
         applications, showing how to complete the exercises and practices.
         Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.

                                                                 Available Student/Applications Software Packages:
! Domestic Electrical Installations:            AD25A/SOF.Control station for domestic            AI6/SOF. DC motor starter.                        ! Energy Installations:
AD1A/SOF Robbery alarm Station.
        .                                                    electric services through the        AI7/SOF. A u t o m a t i c c h a n g e o f        AE1/SOF. Aerial line model.
AD3A/SOF. Fire alarm station.                                telephone.                                     speed of a Dahlander                    AE2/SOF. Reactive energy control and
AD5/SOF. Temporization of stairs.               AD28A/SOF.Integral control station of                       motor with change of                              compensation.
AD6A/SOF. L u m i n o s i t y c o n t r o l                  domesticelectric systems.                      direction.                              AE3/SOF. Test unit for magneto-thermal
            station.                            AD30/SOF. Gas control station.                    AI8/SOF. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m -                  automaticswitches.
AD8/SOF. Blinds activator.                      AD31/SOF. Movement and sound                                pensation (Power factor                 AE4/SOF. Test unit for differential
AD9A/SOF. Heating control station.                           detection and control.                         correction).                                      automatic switches.
AD11A/SOF. Network analyzer.                    AD32/SOF. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits                AI9/SOF Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
                                                                                                         .                                          AE5/SOF. Relay control station.
AD13/SOF. A u d i o d o o r e n t r y                        analyzer.                                      indirect electrical c o n t a c t s     AE6/SOF. Energy counters control
            system.                             AD33/SOF. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s             inTT neutral regimen.                             station.
AD14/SOF. Audio and video door                               simulator.                           AI10/SOF. People safety against indirect          AE7/SOF. Multi-functional electrical
            entry system.                       Industrial Electrical Installations:                        electrical contacts in TN                         protection station.
AD15A/SOF. Position control station.            AI1/SOF.     Star-delta starter.                            neutral regimen.                        AE8/SOF. Power & torque measurements
AD17A/SOF.Photoelectric control                 AI2/SOF.     Starter through auto-                AI11/SOF. People safety against indirect                    of electrical motors.
            position station.                                transformer.                                   electrical contacts in IT neutral       AE9/SOF. Directional Relay: Earth fault
AD24/SOF. Position Switch.                      AI3/SOF.     Speed commutator for                           regimen.                                          detection. Directional power
AD19A/SOF.Sound station.                                     Dahlander motor.                     AI12/SOF. Modular Trainer(AC motors).                       flow detection. Reactive
AD22/SOF. Flooding control station.             AI4/SOF.     Starter-inverter.                    AI13/SOF. M o d u l a r Tr a i n e r f o r                  power flow detection.
AD23/SOF. Wireless basic control                AI5/SOF.     AC wound rotor motor                           Electrotecnics.
            station (RF).                                    starter.

More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf

                                                                                             Page 45                                                                        www.edibon.com
                                                                                                                                                            4.1- Basic Electricity                     (continuation)

                  LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:                                        (continuation)

                                                                                                                 Data Acquisition
                                                                 4                4   MUAD. Power Data Acquisition System
                                                                                                                                  MUAD is the perfect link between the applications/modules and the PC. MUAD is
                                                                                                                                  a continuous data acquisition system with virtual instrumentation, that measures,
                                            Cables to          Data acquisition                                                   analyzes and represents the parameters involved in the process.
                          1
                                    2
                                            interface             software                                                        MUAD allows voltage and current acquisition and measurement, data processing,
                                                                (MUAD/SOF)
                                        3
                                                                                                                                  frequency spectrum and all the functions of a digital oscilloscope.




                                                                                      Data acquisition
                    Connections
                      points                                                                                                      We easily connect the Electric Power Interface Box (EPIB) to the




                                                                                                         (DAB)
                               4
                                                                                                                                  application/module with the supplied cables (there are several connection points




                                                                                          board
                              “n”                       Electric power   Cable to
                                                        interface box    computer
                                                                                                                   Student        placed for it). The EPIB is connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board
                       Application                          (EPIB)                                                   post         (DAB), and by using the Data Acquisition with Virtual Instrumentation Software, the
                                                                                                                                  student can get results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the
                                                                                                                                  screen and work with them.


                  The MUAD system allows voltage and current measurement and acquisition, data processing, frequency spectrum and the functions of a digital oscilloscope.

                  This MUAD System includes EPIB + DAB + MUAD/SOF:
                  1)Hardware :
                    1.1) EPIB. Electric power interface box ( dimensions: 300 x 120 x 180 mm. approx.):
                          Interface that carries out the conditioning of the diverse signals that can be acquired in a process, for
                          their later treatment and visualisation.
                          In the front panel, the elements are separated in two parts: left-hand part to VOLTAGE sensors, and
                          right-hand part corresponds with CURRENT sensors.
4.- Electricity




                          Analog Input Channels:                                                                                                                                         EPIB
                               8 analog input channels. Sampling range: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
                               4 Tension sensors AC/DC, 400V. 4 Current sensors.


                   1.2) DAB. Data acquisition board :
                         PCI Data acquisition board (National Instruments) to be placed in a computer slot.
                         Bus PCI.
                         Analog input:
                            Number of channels= 16 single-ended or 8 differential.
                            Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
                            Sampling rate up to: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
                         Analog output:
                            Number of channels=2.
                            Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.                                                                                                                                DAB
                         Digital Input/Output:
                            Number channels=24inputs/outputs.
                         Timing: Counter/timers=2.


                  2) MUAD/SOF. Data acquisition software :
                     Data Acquisition Software with Graphic Representation:
                         Amicable graphical frame.
                         Compatible with actual Windows operating systems.
                         Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different signals.
                         Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
                         Sampling velocity up to 250 KSPS. (Kilo samples per second) guaranteed.


                  More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
                                                                                                                                                                                     MUAD/SOF




                                                                                                                       Page 46

						
Related docs
Other docs by wuxiangyu
2007 Ohio Summer Honors Institutes - TeacherWeb
Views: 47  |  Downloads: 0
Seasons Greetings - BlueToad
Views: 37  |  Downloads: 0
1HarryBrighouseslide
Views: 44  |  Downloads: 0
2000 census - PPT presentation
Views: 40  |  Downloads: 0
2 BACKGROUND AND REQUEST BRYANT _ STRATTON
Views: 36  |  Downloads: 0
1Scholarships_2008
Views: 49  |  Downloads: 0
2005-doctoral-summary
Views: 39  |  Downloads: 0